Communication device

ABSTRACT

The communication device which includes a voice communicating implementer, a downloaded video game implementer, an auto time adjusting implementer, a moving picture replaying implementer, a calculating implementer, a bold font displaying implementer, a stereo audio data output implementer, a photo quality setting implementer, a multiple language implementer, and a caller&#39;s information displaying implementer.

CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

This application is a continuation of U.S. Ser. No. 12/972,439 filed2010-12-18, now U.S. Pat. No. 7,996,038, which is a continuation of U.S.Ser. No. 11/688,901 filed 2007-03-21, now U.S. Pat. No. 7,890,136, whichis a continuation of U.S. Ser. No. 10/710,600 filed 2004-07-23, now U.S.Pat. No. 8,090,402, which claims the benefit of U.S. ProvisionalApplication No. 60/481,426 filed 2003-09-26, all of which are herebyincorporated herein by reference in their entirety.

BACKGROUND OF INVENTION

The invention relates to communication device and more particularly tothe communication device which is capable to communicate with anothercommunication device in a wireless fashion.

U.S. Patent Publication No. 20030119562 is introduced as a prior art ofthe present invention of which the summary is the following: “There areprovided a task display switching method, a portable apparatus and aportable communications apparatus which, when a plurality of applicationsoftware are activated and processed in parallel, make it possible toswitch a display between each of the application software with ease.According to the task display switching method, the portable apparatusand the portable communications apparatus of the present invention, in aportable apparatus capable of processing a plurality of tasks inparallel and of displaying a plurality of display regions for displayingdata, an icon associated with a task displayed on a first display regionis generated automatically or manually, and the generated icon isdisplayed in a second display region. When any icon thus generated isselected from a plurality of icons displayed on the second displayregion, the task associated with the selected icon is restored anddisplayed in the first display region.” However, the foregoing prior artdoes not disclose the communication device which includes a voicecommunicating implementer, a downloaded video game implementer, an autotime adjusting implementer, a moving picture replaying implementer, acalculating implementer, a bold font displaying implementer, a stereoaudio data output implementer, a photo quality setting implementer, amultiple language implementer, and a caller's information displayingimplementer.

For the avoidance of doubt, the number of the prior arts introducedherein (and/or in IDS) may be of a large one, however, applicant has nointent to hide the more relevant prior art(s) in the less relevant ones.

SUMMARY OF INVENTION

It is an object of the present invention to provide a device capable toimplement a plurality of functions.

It is another object of the present invention to provide merchandise tomerchants attractive to the customers in the U.S.

It is another object of the present invention to provide mobility to theusers of communication device.

It is another object of the present invention to provide moreconvenience to the customers in the U.S.

It is another object of the present invention to provide moreconvenience to the users of communication device or any tangible thingin which the communication device is fixedly or detachably (i.e.,removably) installed.

It is another object of the present invention to overcome theshortcomings associated with the foregoing prior art.

(Blank)

The present invention introduces the communication device which includesa voice communicating implementer, a downloaded video game implementer,an auto time adjusting implementer, a moving picture replayingimplementer, a calculating implementer, a bold font displayingimplementer, a stereo audio data output implementer, a photo qualitysetting implementer, a multiple language implementer, and a caller'sinformation displaying implementer.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF DRAWINGS

The above and other aspects, features, and advantages of the inventionwill be better understood by reading the following more particulardescription of the invention, presented in conjunction with thefollowing drawing, wherein:

FIG. 1 is a block diagram illustrating an exemplary embodiment of thepresent invention.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION

The following description is of the best presently contemplated mode ofcarrying out the present invention. This description is not to be takenin a limiting sense but is made merely for the purpose of describing thegeneral principles of the invention. For example, each description ofrandom access memory in this specification illustrate(s) only onefunction or mode in order to avoid complexity in its explanation,however, such description does not mean that only one function or modecan be implemented at a time. In other words, more than one function ormode can be implemented simultaneously by way of utilizing the samerandom access memory. In addition, the figure number is cited after theelements in parenthesis in a manner for example ‘RAM 206 (FIG. 1)’. Itis done so merely to assist the readers to have a better understandingof this specification, and must not be used to limit the scope of theclaims in any manner since the figure numbers cited are not exclusive.There are only few data stored in each storage area described in thisspecification. This is done so merely to simplify the explanation and,thereby, to enable the reader of this specification to understand thecontent of each function with less confusion. Therefore, more than fewdata (hundreds and thousands of data, if necessary) of the same kind,not to mention, are preferred to be stored in each storage area to fullyimplement each function described herein. The scope of the inventionshould be determined by referencing the appended claims.

FIG. 1 is a simplified block diagram of the Communication Device 200utilized in the present invention. In this embodiment, CommunicationDevice 200 includes CPU 211 which controls and administers the overallfunction and operation of Communication Device 200. CPU 211 uses RAM 206to temporarily store data and/or to perform calculation to perform itsfunction, and to implement the present invention, modes, functions, andsystems explained hereinafter. Video Processor 202 generates analogand/or digital video signals which are displayed on LCD 201. ROM 207stores the data and programs which are essential to operateCommunication Device 200. Wireless signals are received by Antenna 218and processed by Signal Processor 208. Input signals are input by InputDevice 210, such as a dial pad, a joystick, and/or a keypad, and thesignals are transferred via Input Interface 209 and Data Bus 203 to CPU211. Indicator 212 is an LED lamp which is designed to output differentcolors (e.g., red, blue, green, etc). Analog audio data is input toMicrophone 215. A/D 213 converts the analog audio data into a digitalformat. Speaker 216 outputs analog audio data which is converted into ananalog format from digital format by D/A 204. Sound Processor 205produces digital audio signals that are transferred to D/A 204 and alsoprocesses the digital audio signals transferred from A/D 213. CCD Unit214 captures video image which is stored in RAM 206 in a digital format.Vibrator 217 vibrates the entire device by the command from CPU 211.

As another embodiment, LCD 201 or LCD 201/Video Processor 202 may beseparated from the other elements described in FIG. 1, and be connectedin a wireless fashion to be wearable and/or head-mountable.

When Communication Device 200 is in the voice communication mode, theanalog audio data input to Microphone 215 is converted to a digitalformat by A/D 213 and transmitted to another device via Antenna 218 in awireless fashion after being processed by Signal Processor 208, and thewireless signal representing audio data which is received via Antenna218 is output from Speaker 216 after being processed by Signal Processor208 and converted to analog signal by D/A 204. For the avoidance ofdoubt, the definition of Communication Device 200 in this specificationincludes so-called ‘PDA’. The definition of Communication Device 200also includes in this specification any device which is mobile and/orportable and which is capable to send and/or receive audio data, textdata, image data, video data, and/or other types of data in a wirelessfashion via Antenna 218. The definition of Communication Device 200further includes any micro device embedded or installed into devices andequipments (e.g., VCR, TV, tape recorder, heater, air conditioner, fan,clock, micro wave oven, dish washer, refrigerator, oven, washingmachine, dryer, door, window, automobile, motorcycle, and modem) toremotely control these devices and equipments. The size of CommunicationDevice 200 is irrelevant. Communication Device 200 may be installed inhouses, buildings, bridges, boats, ships, submarines, airplanes, andspaceships, and firmly fixed therein.

Paragraph [0024]—This Paragraph [0024] illustrate(s) the elements ofCommunication Device 200. The elements of Communication Device 200described in this Paragraph [0024] is identical to the ones described inFIG. 1, except Communication Device 200 has new element, i.e., LED 219.Here, LED 219 receives infra red signals from other wireless devices,which are transferred to CPU 211 via Data Bus 203. LED 219 also sendsinfra red signals in a wireless fashion which are composed by CPU 211and transferred via Data Bus 203. As the second embodiment, LED 219 maybe connected to Signal Processor 208. Here, LED 219 transfers thereceived infra red signals to Signal Processor 208, and Signal Processor208 processes and converts the signals to a CPU readable format whichare transferred to CPU 211 via Data Bus 203. The data produced by CPU211 are processed by Signal Processor 208 and transferred to anotherdevice via LED 219 in a wireless fashion. The task of LED 219 is as sameas that of Antenna 218 described in FIG. 1 except that LED 219 utilizesinfra red signals for implementing wireless communication in the secondembodiment. For the avoidance of doubt, the reference to FIG. 1 (e.g.,referring to FIG. 1 in parenthesis) automatically refers to thisParagraph [0024] in this specification.

Paragraph [0025]—This Paragraph [0025] illustrate(s) the data stored inHost H. In the present embodiment, Host H includes Host InformationStorage Area H00 a which stores various types of data to assist and/orco-operate with Communication Device 200 to implement all modes,functions, and systems described in this specification. As anotherembodiment, Host H may be composed of a plurality of computers, i.e.,one master computer and a plurality of slave computers, wherein themaster computer is connected to the plurality of slave computers. Asanother embodiment, Host H may also be composed of a plurality of mastercomputers by way of utilizing peer-to-peer connection.

Paragraph [0026]—<<3D Video Game Function>>

Paragraph [0027]—This Paragraph [0027] through Paragraph [0035]illustrate the video game function of Communication Device 200 (FIG. 1).

Paragraph [0028]—In this embodiment, Host H includes Host Game DataStorage Area Ha. In Host Game Data Storage Area Ha, a plurality of gamedata are stored for downloading purposes. Games G1, G2, G3, and G4 arestored in Host Game Data Storage Area Ha in the example illustrated inParagraph [0027].

Paragraph [0029]—This Paragraph [0029] illustrates the sequence toinitiate the game function. First of all, a list of modes is displayedon LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). When an input signal is input by utilizingInput Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system to select aspecific mode (S2), the selected mode is activated. In the presentexample described in Paragraph [0029], the communication mode isactivated (S3 a) when the communication mode is selected in the previousstep, the game download mode is activated (S3 b) when the game downloadmode is selected in the previous step, and the game play mode isactivated (S3 c) when game play mode is selected in the previous step.The modes displayed on LCD 201 in S1 which are selected and activated inS2 and S3 may include all functions and modes explained in thisspecification. Once the selected mode is activated, another mode can beactivated while the first activated mode is still implemented by goingthrough the steps of S1 through S3 for another mode, thereby enabling aplurality of functions and modes being performed simultaneously (S4).Here, communication mode is a mode which enables Communication Device200 to communicate (i.e., send and/or receive audio data, text data,image data, video data, and/or other types of data in a wireless fashionvia Antenna 218) in a wireless fashion with other Communication Devices200. The same meaning applies hereinafter.

Paragraph [0030]—This Paragraph [0030] illustrates the data stored inRAM 206 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, the data to activate (as describedin S3 a of the previous paragraph) and to perform the communication modeis stored in Communication Data Storage Area 2061 a, the data toactivate (as described in S3 b of the previous paragraph) and to performgame download mode is stored in Game DL Data Storage Area 2061 b, andthe data to activate (as described in S3 c of the previous paragraph)and to perform game play mode is stored in 2061 c.

Paragraph [0031]—This Paragraph [0031] illustrates the method ofactivating and deactivating the game mode by utilizing the voicerecognition system explained hereinbefore. The voice recognition systemis turned on, in the first place (S1), and the game mode is activated byutilizing the voice recognition system (S2). When utilizing the gamemode is over, it is deactivated by utilizing the voice recognitionsystem, and the system is turned off thereafter (S3).

Paragraph [0032]—This Paragraph [0032] illustrates the sequence ofdownloading a game data, i.e., a game software program, from Host H(Paragraph [0027]). In this embodiment, a list of game data is displayedon LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). When an input signal is input from InputDevice 210 or by the voice recognition system to select a specific gamedata (S2), the selected game data is downloaded to Communication Device200 and is stored in Game DL Data Storage Area 2061 b (Paragraph [0030])(S3). The downloaded game data is decompressed thereafter by CPU 211(FIG. 1).

Paragraph [0033]—This Paragraph [0033] illustrates the data stored inGame Play Data Storage Area 2061 c (Paragraph [0030]). The decompressedgame data are allocated to the predetermined areas, i.e., Game SoftwareStorage Area 2061 d, 3D Object Data Storage Area 2061 e, Texture DataStorage Area 2061 f, and Game Process Data Storage Area 2061 g. Here,Game Software Storage Area 2061 d stores a series of software program toperform the game function of Communication Device 200. 3D Object DataStorage Area 2061 e stores the three-dimensional data of thethree-dimensional objects displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1), such as theshape of each three-dimensional object in a polygon form (or in a wireframe form), and the three-dimensional data of all parts (components) ofeach three-dimensional object. Texture Data Storage Area 2061 f stores aplurality of data of textures which are ‘pasted’ on eachthree-dimensional object (or on each part thereof) when suchthree-dimensional object is displayed on LCD 201. Game Process DataStorage Area 2061 g stores a plurality of data necessary to process thegame software program, such as the strength and speed of eachthree-dimensional object, the layout of the background displayed on LCD201, the weather described in the game, the property of each shadowdisplayed adjacent to the three-dimensional object, the movement of theobjects which are controllable by the user of Communication Device 200,and the movement of the objects which are not controllable by the userof Communication Device 200.

Paragraph [0034]—This Paragraph [0034] illustrates the sequence of thegame software program stored in Game Software Storage Area 2061 d(Paragraph [0033]). When the game mode is started by voice recognitionsystem as described in S1 and S2 of Paragraph [0031], the gameinitiation process is initiated by CPU 211 (FIG. 1) (S1). Here, CPU 211reads, by following the instructions written in the game softwareprogram stored in Game Software Storage Area 2061 d, all the addressdata stored in 3D Object Data Storage Area 2061 e, Texture Data StorageArea 2061 f, and Game Process Data Storage Area 2061 g to promptlyretrieve the required data to process the game when necessary. Duringthe game initiation process, an initiation screen is displayed on LCD201. Once the game is started, CPU 211 checks the status of the inputsignal from Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or by the voice recognitionsystem. If an input signal is detected (S2), a response to such inputsignal is processed by CPU 211 by retrieving data from Game Process DataStorage Area 2061 g (Paragraph [0033]) (S3). For example, if the inputsignal instructs to move forward the three-dimensional object, CPU 211calculates the next action of its body parts (e.g., pushing forward itsright leg) by retrieving data from Game Process Data Storage Area 2061 g(Paragraph [0033]). CPU 211 also processes with the three-dimensionalobjects which are irrelevant to the input signal input from Input Device210 by retrieving data from Game Process Data Storage Area 2061 g, forexample the background objects displayed on LCD 201 including, clouds,pedestrians, buildings, traffic lights, and bridges (S4). CPU 211 alsocalculates the three-dimensional data of each three-dimensional objectand the three-dimensional data of all parts thereof in thethree-dimensional game space by retrieving data from three-dimensionalobject Data Storage Area 2061 e (S4). CPU 211 then retrieves thedesignated textures from Texture Data Storage Area 2061 f (Paragraph[0033]) and ‘pastes’ them to the three-dimensional objects (S4). Thethree-dimensional objects with textures ‘pasted’ are displayed on LCD201 (S5). The sequence of S2 through S5 is repeated until the game isover (S6), and the game termination process, i.e., a process toterminate the game mode is initiated thereafter (S7).

Paragraph [0035]—This Paragraph [0035] illustrates the process toallocate Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) to perform the game function. In thisembodiment, when the game initiation process is initiated as explainedin S1 of Paragraph [0034], the key allocation process is initiatedsimultaneously. As the result of the key allocation process, InputDevice 210 normally utilized for communication purposes, includingkeypad and buttons, is allocated as input means for performing the gamefunction. In the example described in Paragraph [0035], Key #1 isassigned for instructing CPU 211 to move up the three-dimensionalobject, Key #2 is assigned for instructing CPU 211 to move down thethree-dimensional object, Key #3 is assigned for instructing CPU 211 tomove left the three-dimensional object, Key #4 is assigned forinstructing CPU 211 to move right the three-dimensional object, Key #5is assigned for instructing CPU 211 to make the three-dimensional objectto jump, and Key #6 is assigned for instructing CPU 211 to make thethree-dimensional object to dash, and all the foregoing data are storedin Key Allocation Data Storage Area 2061 h.

Paragraph [0036]—<<Auto Time Adjust Function>>

Paragraph [0037]—Paragraph [0038] through Paragraph [0040] illustratethe automatic time adjust function, i.e., a function which automaticallyadjusts the clock of Communication Device 200.

Paragraph [0038]—This Paragraph [0038] illustrates the data stored inRAM 206 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, RAM 206 includes Auto Time AdjustSoftware Storage Area 2069 a, Current Time Data Storage Area 2069 b, andAuto Time Data Storage Area 2069 c. Auto Time Adjust Software StorageArea 2069 a stores software program to implement the present functionwhich is explained in details hereinafter, Current Time Data StorageArea 2069 b stores the data which represents the current time, and AutoTime Data Storage Area 2069 c is a working area assigned forimplementing the present function.

Paragraph [0039]—This Paragraph [0039] illustrates a software programstored in Auto Time Adjust Software Storage Area 2069 a (Paragraph[0038]). First of all, Communication Device 200 is connected to NetworkNT (e.g., the Internet) via Antenna 218 (FIG. 1) (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1)then retrieves an atomic clock data from Network NT (S2) and the currenttime data from Current Time Data Storage Area 2069 b (Paragraph [0038]),and compares both data. If the difference between both data is notwithin the predetermined value X (S3), CPU 211 adjusts the current timedata (S4). The method to adjust the current data can be either simplyoverwrite the data stored in Current Time Data Storage Area 2069 b withthe atomic clock data retrieved from Network NT or calculate thedifference of the two data and add or subtract the difference to or fromthe current time data stored in Current Time Data Storage Area 2069 b byutilizing Auto Time Data Storage Area 2069 c (Paragraph [0038]) as aworking area.

Paragraph [0040]—This Paragraph [0040] illustrates another softwareprogram stored in Auto Time Adjust Software Storage Area 2069 a(Paragraph [0038]). When the power of Communication Device 200 is turnedon (S1), CPU 211 (FIG. 1) stores a predetermined timer value in AutoTime Data Storage Area 2069 c (Paragraph [0038]) (S2). The timer valueis decremented periodically (S3). When the timer value equals to zero(S4), the automatic timer adjust function is activated (S5) and CPU 211performs the sequence described in Paragraph [0039], and the sequence ofS2 through S4 is repeated thereafter.

Paragraph [0041]—<<Video/Photo Mode>>

Paragraph [0042]—This Paragraph [0042] illustrates the details of CCDUnit 214 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, CCD Unit 214 is mounted onRotator 291 (not shown) which is rotatably connected to the side ofCommunication Device 200. Indicator 212 (FIG. 1) is attached to thesurface of CCD Unit 214.

Paragraph [0043]—This Paragraph [0043] illustrates the software programinstalled in Communication Device 200 to initiate the present function.First of all, a list of modes is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1).When an input signal is input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) orvia voice recognition system to select a specific mode (S2), theselected mode is activated. In the present example, the communicationmode is activated (S3 a) when the communication mode is selected in theprevious step, the game download mode and the game play mode areactivated (S3 b) when the game download mode and the game play mode areselected in the previous step of which the details are described inParagraph [0029], and the video/photo mode is activated (S3 c) when thevideo/photo mode is selected in the previous step. The modes displayedon LCD 201 in S1 which are selectable in S2 and S3 may include allfunctions and modes explained in this specification. Once the selectedmode is activated, another mode can be activated while the firstactivated mode is still implemented by going through the steps of S1through S3 for another mode, thereby enabling a plurality of functionsand modes being performed simultaneously (S4).

Paragraph [0044]—This Paragraph [0044] illustrates the data stored inRAM 206 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, the data to activate (as describedin S3 a of the previous paragraph) and to perform the communication modeis stored in Communication Data Storage Area 2061 a, the data toactivate (as described in S3 b of the previous paragraph) and to performthe game download mode and the game play mode are stored in Game DL/PlayData Storage Area 2061 b/2061 c of which the details are described inParagraph [0030], and the data to activate (as described in S3 c of theprevious paragraph) and to perform the video/photo mode is stored inVideo/Photo Data Storage Area 20610 a.

Paragraph [0045]—This Paragraph [0045] illustrates the software programsand data stored in Video/Photo Data Storage Area 20610 a (Paragraph[0044]). In this embodiment, Video/Photo Data Storage Area 20610 aincludes Video/Photo Software Storage Area 20610 b, Video Data StorageArea 20610 c, Audio Data Storage Area 20610 d, Photo Data Storage Area20610 e, Photo Sound Data Storage Area 20610 f, and Indicator DataStorage Area 20610 g. Video/Photo Software Storage Area 20610 b storesthe software programs described in Paragraph through Paragraph [0055],Paragraph [0058], Paragraph [0058], Paragraph [0063] through Paragraph[0065], Paragraph [0067], and Paragraph [0069]. Video Data Storage Area20610 c stores the data described in Paragraph [0046]. Audio DataStorage Area 20610 d stores the data described in Paragraph [0047].Photo Data Storage Area 20610 e stores the data described in Paragraph[0048]. Photo Sound Data Storage Area 20610 f stores a sound data(preferably a wave data) producing a sound similar to the one when aconventional camera is activated. Indicator Data Storage Area 20610 gstores the data described in Paragraph [0049]. Video Data Storage Area20610 c and Audio Data Storage Area 20610 d primarily stores the similardata stored in Area 267 (not shown) and Area 268 (not shown),respectively.

Paragraph [0046]—This Paragraph [0046] illustrates the data stored inVideo Data Storage Area 20610 c (Paragraph [0045]). Video Data StorageArea 20610 c stores a plurality of video data which goes through theprocess described in Paragraph [0053] hereinafter. In the presentexample, six video data, i.e., Video #1, Video #2, Video #3, Video #4,Video #5, and Video #6, are currently stored in Video Data Storage Area20610 c. Message Data Storage Area (MS2 a, MS3 a) 20610 h is alsoincluded in Video Data Storage Area 20610 c, which stores the text dataof MS2 a (‘REC’) and MS3 a (‘STOP’).

Paragraph [0047]—This Paragraph [0047] illustrates the data stored inAudio Data Storage Area 20610 d (Paragraph [0045]). Audio Data StorageArea 20610 d stores a plurality of audio data which goes through theprocess described in Paragraph [0053] hereinafter. In the presentexample, six audio data, i.e., Audio #1, Audio #2, Audio #3, Audio #4,Audio #5, and Audio #6 are currently stored in Audio Data Storage Area20610 d. Each audio data stored in Audio Data Storage Area 20610 dcorresponds to the video data stored in Video Data Storage Area 20610 c(Paragraph [0046]). Namely, Video #1 corresponds to Audio #1, Video #2corresponds to Audio #2, Video #3 corresponds to Audio #3, Video #4corresponds to Audio #4, Video #5 corresponds to Audio #5, and Video #6corresponds to Audio #6.

Paragraph [0048]—This Paragraph [0048] illustrates the data stored inPhoto Data Storage Area 20610 e (Paragraph [0045]). Photo Data StorageArea 20610 e stores a plurality of photo data which goes through theprocess described in Paragraph [0067] hereinafter. In the presentexample, six photo data, i.e., Photo #1, Photo #2, Photo #3, Photo #4,Photo #5, and Photo #6 are currently stored in Photo Data Storage Area20610 e. Message Data Storage Area (MS4 a) 20610 i is also included inPhoto Data Storage Area 20610 e, which stores the text data of MS4 a(‘SHOT’).

Paragraph [0049]—This Paragraph [0049] illustrates the data stored inIndicator Data Storage Area 20610 g (Paragraph [0045]). Indicator DataStorage Area 20610 g stores the data regarding the color of Indicator212 (FIG. 1 and Paragraph [0042]) when Communication Device 200 is in avideo mode or a photo mode. According to the data described in Paragraph[0049], Indicator 212 emits red light when Communication Device 200 isin the video mode and green light when Communication Device 200 is inthe photo mode.

Paragraph [0050]—This Paragraph [0050] illustrates another example ofthe data stored in Indicator Data Storage Area 20610 g (Paragraph[0045]). According to the data described in Paragraph [0050], Indicator212 emits a predetermined color, however, with a different pattern.Namely, the light emitted from Indicator 212 turns on and off whenCommunication Device 200 is in the video mode, whereas the light remainson when Communication Device 200 is in the photo mode.

Paragraph [0051]—This Paragraph [0051] illustrates the software programstored in Video/Photo Software Storage Area 20610 b (Paragraph [0045]).In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) displays a list of the selectablemodes, i.e., the video mode and the photo mode (S1). One of the modes isselected by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognitionsystem (S2).

Paragraph [0052]—This Paragraph [0052] illustrates the software programstored in Video/Photo Software Storage Area 20610 b (Paragraph [0045]).When the video mode is selected in S2 in Paragraph [0051], the videomode is initiated and CPU 211 (FIG. 1) is ready to capture and store thevideo data in one of the areas of Video Data Storage Area 20610 c(Paragraph [0046]) (S1). Next, the video process is initiated which isdescribed in details in Paragraph [0053] (S2 a) until a specific signalis input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognitionsystem (S3). The indicator process is activated simultaneously which isdescribed in details in Paragraph [0054] hereinafter (S2 b).

Paragraph [0053]—This Paragraph [0053] illustrates the video process ofCommunication Device 200, i.e., S2 a of Paragraph [0052]. In thisembodiment, the video data input from CCD Unit 214 (FIG. 1 and Paragraph[0042]) (Sla) is converted from analog data to digital data (S2 a) andis processed by Video Processor 202 (FIG. 1) (S3 a). The processed videodata is stored in Video Data Storage Area 20610 c (Paragraph [0046]) (S4a) and is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S5 a). In this embodiment, theaudio data input from Microphone 215 (FIG. 1) (S1 b) is converted fromanalog data to digital data by A/D 213 (FIG. 1) (S2 b) and is processedby Sound Processor 205 (FIG. 1) (S3 b). The processed audio data isstored in Audio Data Storage Area 20610 d (Paragraph [0047]) (S4 b) andis transferred to Sound Processor 205 and is output from Speaker 216(FIG. 1) via D/A 204 (FIG. 1) (S5 b). The sequences of Sla through S5 aand S1 b through S5 b are continued until a specific signal indicatingto stop such sequence is input from Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or by thevoice recognition system (S6).

Paragraph [0054]—This Paragraph [0054] illustrates the indicator processof Communication Device 200, i.e., S2 b of Paragraph [0052]. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) scans the video mode section of IndicatorData Storage Area 20610 g (Paragraph [0049]) and retrieves the indicatordata therefrom (S1) and activates Indicator 212 (FIG. 1 and Paragraph[0042]) in accordance with the indicator data (S2). In the embodimentexplained in Paragraph [0049], Indicator 212 emits red light whileCommunication Device 200 is in the video mode and Indicator 212 turns onand off in the embodiment explained in Paragraph [0050]. The sequencesof S1 and S2 is continued until a specific signal indicating to stopsuch sequence is input from Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or by the voicerecognition system (S3).

Paragraph [0055]—This Paragraph [0055] illustrates the sequence totransfer the video data and the audio data via Antenna 218 (FIG. 1) in awireless fashion. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) initiates adialing process (S1) until the line is connected to a host (not shown)(S2). As soon as the line is connected, CPU 211 reads the video data andthe audio data stored in Video Data Storage Area 20610 c (Paragraph[0046]) and Audio Data Storage Area 20610 d (Paragraph [0047]) (S3) andtransfers these data to Signal Processor 208 (FIG. 1) where these dataare converted into a transferring data (S4). The transferring data istransferred from Antenna 218 (FIG. 1) in a wireless fashion (S5). Thesequence of S1 through S5 is continued until a specific signalindicating to stop such sequence is input from Input Device 210 (FIG. 1)or via the voice recognition system (S6). The line is disconnectedthereafter (S7).

Paragraph [0056]—This Paragraph [0056] illustrates the basic structureof the transferred data which is transferred from Communication Device200 as described in S4 and S5 of Paragraph [0055]. Transferred Data 610a is primarily composed of Header 611 a, Video Data 612 a, Audio Data613 a, Relevant Data 614 a, and Footer 615 a. Video data 612 acorresponds to the video data stored in Video Data Storage Area 20610 c(Paragraph [0046]), and Audio Data 613 a corresponds to the audio datastored in Audio Data Storage Area 20610 d (Paragraph [0047]). RelevantData 614 a includes various types of data, such as the identificationnumbers of Device A (i.e., the transferor device) and Device B (i.e.,the transferee device), a location data which represents the location ofDevice A, an email data transferred from Device A to Device B, etc.Header 611 a and Footer 615 a represent the beginning and the end ofTransferred Data 610 a respectively.

Paragraph [0057]—This Paragraph [0057] illustrates the data contained inRAM 206 (FIG. 1) of Device B (i.e., the transferee device). Asillustrated in Paragraph [0057], RAM 206 includes Area 269 a whichstores video data, Area 270 a which stores audio data, and Area 266 awhich is a work area utilized for the process explained hereinafter.

Paragraph [0058]—This Paragraph [0058] illustrates the software programstored in Device B. In this embodiment and Paragraph [0058], CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Device B initiates a dialing process (S1) until Device B isconnected to a host (not shown) (S2). Transferred Data 610 a is receivedby Antenna 218 (FIG. 1) of Device B (S3) and is converted by SignalProcessor 208 (FIG. 1) into data readable by CPU 211 (S4). Video dataand audio data are retrieved from Transferred Data 610 a and stored intoArea 269 a (Paragraph [0057]) and Area 270 a (Paragraph [0057]) of RAM206 respectively (S5). The video data stored in Area 269 a is processedby Video Processor 202 (FIG. 1) (S6 a). The processed video data isconverted into an analog data (S7 a) and displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1)(S8 a). S7 a may not be necessary depending on the type of LCD 201 used.The audio data stored in Area 270 a is processed by Sound Processor 205(FIG. 1) (S6 b). The processed audio data is converted into analog databy D/A 204 (FIG. 1) (S7 b) and output from Speaker 216 (FIG. 1) (S8 b).The sequences of S6 a through S8 a and S6 b through S8 b are continueduntil a specific signal indicating to stop such sequence is input byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via the voice recognition system(S9).

Paragraph [0059]—In this embodiment, Message MSla is shown at the upperright corner of LCD 201 (FIG. 1) indicating that a new email has arrivedwhile video/photo mode is implemented.

Paragraph [0060]—This Paragraph [0060] illustrates the data stored inEmail Data Calculating Area 206 c (not shown) and Email Data StorageArea 206 d (not shown) in order to implement the incoming messagefunction. Email Data Calculating Area 206 c includes Incoming MessageCalculating Area 206 k which stores a software program described inParagraph [0061] hereinafter, and Email Data Storage Area 206 d includesMessage Data Storage Area (MS1 a) 206 ma which stores the text data ofMSla (in the present example, the text data ‘Email’).

Paragraph [0061]—This Paragraph [0061] illustrates the software programstored in Incoming Message Calculating Area 206 k (Paragraph [0060]).First of all, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) checks whether a new incoming message hasarrived by scanning Email Data Storage Area 206 d (Paragraph [0060])(S1). If a new message has arrived (S2), CPU 211 retrieves the text data(MS1 a) from Message Data Storage Area (MS1 a) 206 ma and displays onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) for a specified period of time (S3). The softwareprogram is executed periodically with a fixed interval.

Paragraph [0062]—In this embodiment, Message MS2 a is shown on LCD 201(FIG. 1) when the video recording function is implemented, and MessageMS3 a is shown when the implementation of the video recording functionhas been terminated.

Paragraph [0063]—This Paragraph [0063] illustrates the software programstored in Video/Photo Software Storage Area 20610 b (Paragraph [0045])to display messages MS2 a and MS3 a on LCD 201 (FIG. 1). When a startrecording signal has been input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1)or via voice recognition system, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) initiates therecording process, i.e., the process described in Paragraph [0053]hereinbefore (S1). During the recording process, the text data ofMessage MS2 a is retrieved from Message Data Storage Area (MS2 a, MS3 a)20610 h (Paragraph [0046]) and displayed at the upper right corner ofLCD 201 (FIG. 1) indicating that the video recording function is inprocess (S2). If the stop recording signal is input by utilizing InputDevice 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system indicating to stopthe video recording process (S3), CPU 211 stops the video recordingprocess (S4), and retrieves the text data of Message MS3 a from MessageData Storage Area (MS2 a, MS3 a) 20610 h and displays at the upper rightcorner of LCD 201 for a specified period of time (S5). Since Video DataStorage Area 20610 c and Audio Data Storage Area 20610 d are dividedinto several sectors as stated above, a plurality of software programdescribed in Paragraph [0063] can be activated to record and store aplurality of video data and the corresponding audio data simultaneously.

Paragraph [0064]—This Paragraph [0064] illustrates the software programstored in Video/Photo Software Storage Area 20610 b (Paragraph [0045])to playback the recorded video data and the corresponding audio data.First, a video data is selected and playback signal is input byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system(S1). Once these signals are received, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) initiates theplayback process of the recorded video data, i.e., CPU 211 retrieves theselected video data from Video Data Storage Area 20610 c (Paragraph[0046]) and the corresponding audio data from Audio Data Storage Area20610 d (Paragraph [0047]), and Video Processor 202 (FIG. 1) processesthe channel data to be displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). This playbackprocess continues until a stop playback signal is input by utilizingInput Device 210 or via voice recognition system (S3). When a stopplayback signal is input by utilizing Input Device 210 or via voicerecognition system, CPU 211 stops the foregoing process, and retrievesthe text data of Message MS3 a from Message Data Storage Area (MS2 a,MS3 a) 20610 h (Paragraph [0046]) and displays at the upper right cornerof LCD 201 for a specified period of time (S4).

Paragraph [0065]—This Paragraph [0065] illustrates the software programstored in Video/Photo Software Storage Area 20610 b (Paragraph [0045]).When the photo mode is selected in S2 in Paragraph [0051], the photomode is initiated and CPU 211 (FIG. 1) is ready to capture and store thephoto data in one of the areas of Photo Data Storage Area 20610 e(Paragraph [0048]) (S1). Next, the photo process is initiated which isdescribed in details in Paragraph [0067] (S2 a) until a specific signalis input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognitionsystem (S3). The indicator process is activated simultaneously which isdescribed in details in Paragraph [0069] hereinafter (S2 b).

Paragraph [0066]—In this embodiment, Message MS4 a is shown on LCD 201(FIG. 1) when a photo is taken with Communication Device 200.

Paragraph [0067]—This Paragraph [0067] illustrates the software programstored in Video/Photo Software Storage Area 20610 b (Paragraph [0045])to implement the photo mode. When a start recording signal has beeninput by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognitionsystem (S1), CPU 211 (FIG. 1) initiates the recording process, i.e.,retrieves an image data input from CCD Unit 214 (FIG. 1), which iscurrently displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1), and stores in one of thesectors of Photo Data Storage Area 20610 e (Paragraph [0048]), forexample Photo #1 described in Paragraph [0048] (S2). CPU 211 retrievesthe text data of Message MS4 a from Message Data Storage Area (MS4 a)20610 i (Paragraph [0048]) and displays at the upper right corner of LCD201 (FIG. 1) for a specific period of time indicating that a photo datahas been taken and stored (S3). Then CPU 211 retrieves the photo datawhich is just stored in Photo Data Storage Area 20610 e, and VideoProcessor 202 (FIG. 1) processes the photo data to be displayed on LCD201 (FIG. 1) for a specific period of time (S4). Since Photo DataStorage Area 20610 e is divided into several sectors as stated above, S1from S4 can be repeated to record and store a plurality of image data.

Paragraph [0068]—This Paragraph [0068] illustrates the software programstored in Video/Photo Software Storage Area 20610 b (Paragraph [0045])to display the recorded photo data. First, a photo data is selected byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system(S1). When this signal is received, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) initiates thedisplay process of the recorded photo data, i.e., CPU 211 retrieves theselected photo data from Photo Data Storage Area 20610 e, for examplePhoto #1 described in Paragraph [0048], and Video Processor 202 (FIG. 1)processes the selected photo data to be displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1)(S2). The photo data is displayed until a close signal is input byutilizing Input Device 210 or via voice recognition system (S3). When aclose signal is input by utilizing Input Device 210 or via voicerecognition system, CPU 211 terminates to display the photo data (S4).

Paragraph [0069]—This Paragraph [0069] illustrates the software programstored in Video/Photo Software Storage Area 20610 b (Paragraph [0045])which implements the indicator process of Communication Device 200,i.e., S2 b of Paragraph [0065]. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1)scans the photo mode section of Indicator Data Storage Area 20610 g(Paragraph [0049]) and retrieves an indicator data therefrom (S1) andactivate Indicator 212 (FIG. 1 and Paragraph [0042]) in accordance withthe indicator data (S2). In the embodiment explained in Paragraph[0049], Indicator 212 emits green light while Communication Device 200is in the photo mode and Indicator 212 remains to be on in theembodiment explained in Paragraph [0050]. The sequence of S1 through S2is continued until a specific signal indicating to stop such sequence isinput from Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or by the voice recognition system(S3).

Paragraph [0070]—<<Calculator Function>>

Paragraph [0071]—Paragraph [0072] through Paragraph [0075] illustratethe calculator function of Communication Device 200. CommunicationDevice 200 can be utilized as a calculator to perform mathematicalcalculation by implementing the present function.

Paragraph [0072]—This Paragraph [0072] illustrates the software programinstalled in each Communication Device 200 to initiate the presentfunction. First of all, a list of modes is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1)(S1). When an input signal is input by utilizing Input Device 210(FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system to select a specific mode (S2),the selected mode is activated. In the present example, thecommunication mode is activated (S3 a) when the communication mode isselected in the previous step, the game download mode and the game playmode are activated (S3 b) when the game download mode and the game playmode are selected in the previous step of which the details aredescribed in Paragraph [0029], and the calculator function is activated(S3 c) when the calculator function is selected in the previous step.The modes displayed on LCD 201 in S1 which are selectable in S2 and S3may include all functions and modes explained in this specification.Once the selected mode is activated, another mode can be activated whilethe first activated mode is still implemented by going through the stepsof S1 through S3 for another mode, thereby enabling a plurality offunctions and modes being performed simultaneously (S4).

Paragraph [0073]—This Paragraph [0073] illustrates the data stored inRAM 206 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, the data to activate (as describedin S3 a of the previous paragraph) and to perform the communication modeis stored in Communication Data Storage Area 2061 a, the data toactivate (as described in S3 b of the previous paragraph) and to performthe game download mode and the game play mode are stored in Game DL/PlayData Storage Area 2061 b/2061 c of which the details are described inParagraph [0030], and the data to activate (as described in S3 c of theprevious paragraph) and to perform the calculator function is stored inCalculator Information Storage Area 20615 a.

Paragraph [0074]—This Paragraph [0074] illustrates the data stored inCalculator Information Storage Area 20615 a (Paragraph [0073]). In thisembodiment, Calculator Information Storage Area 20615 a includesCalculator Software Storage Area 20615 b and Calculator Data StoragesArea 20615 c. Calculator Software Storage Area 20615 b stores thesoftware programs to implement the present function, such as the oneexplained in Paragraph [0075], and Calculator Data Storage Area 20615 cstores a plurality of data necessary to execute the software programsstored in Calculator Software Storage Area 20615 b and to implement thepresent function.

Paragraph [0075]—This Paragraph [0075] illustrates the software programstored in Calculator Storage Area 20615 b (Paragraph [0074]). In thisembodiment, one or more of numeric data are input by utilizing InputDevice 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system as well as thearithmetic operators (e.g., ‘+’, ‘−’, and ‘×’), which are temporarilystored in Calculator Data Storage Area 20615 c (S1). By utilizing thedata stored in Calculator Data Storage Area 20615 c, CPU 211 (FIG. 1)performs the calculation by executing the software program stored inCalculator Software Storage Area 20615 b (Paragraph [0074]) (S2). Theresult of the calculation is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) thereafter(S3).

Paragraph [0076]—<<Spreadsheet Function>>

Paragraph [0077]—Paragraph [0078] through Paragraph [0081] illustratethe spreadsheet function of Communication Device 200. Here, thespreadsheet is composed of a plurality of cells which are aligned inmatrix. In other words, the spreadsheet is divided into a plurality ofrows and columns in which alphanumeric data is capable to be input.Microsoft Excel is the typical example of the spreadsheet.

Paragraph [0078]—This Paragraph [0078] illustrates the software programinstalled in each Communication Device 200 to initiate the presentfunction. First of all, a list of modes is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1)(S1). When an input signal is input by utilizing Input Device 210(FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system to select a specific mode (S2),the selected mode is activated. In the present example, thecommunication mode is activated (S3 a) when the communication mode isselected in the previous step, the game download mode and the game playmode are activated (S3 b) when the game download mode and the game playmode are selected in the previous step of which the details aredescribed in Paragraph [0029], and the spreadsheet function is activated(S3 c) when the spreadsheet function is selected in the previous step.The modes displayed on LCD 201 in S1 which are selectable in S2 and S3may include all functions and modes explained in this specification.Once the selected mode is activated, another mode can be activated whilethe first activated mode is still implemented by going through the stepsof S1 through S3 for another mode, thereby enabling a plurality offunctions and modes being performed simultaneously (S4).

Paragraph [0079]—This Paragraph [0079] illustrates the data stored inRAM 206 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, the data to activate (as describedin S3 a of the previous paragraph) and to perform the communication modeis stored in Communication Data Storage Area 2061 a, the data toactivate (as described in S3 b of the previous paragraph) and to performthe game download mode and the game play mode are stored in Game DL/PlayData Storage Area 2061 b/2061 c of which the details are described inParagraph [0030], and the data to activate (as described in S3 c of theprevious paragraph) and to perform the spreadsheet function is stored inSpreadsheet Information Storage Area 20616 a.

Paragraph [0080]—This Paragraph [0080] illustrates the data stored inSpreadsheet Information Storage Area 20616 a (Paragraph [0079]). In thisembodiment, Spreadsheet Information Storage Area 20616 a includesSpreadsheet Software Storage Area 20616 b and Spreadsheet Data StorageArea 20616 c. Spreadsheet Software Storage Area 20616 b stores thesoftware programs to implement the present function, such as the oneexplained in Paragraph [0081], and Spreadsheet Data Storage Area 20616 cstores a plurality of data necessary to execute the software programsstored in Spreadsheet Software Storage Area 20616 b and to implement thepresent function.

Paragraph [0081]—This Paragraph [0081] illustrates the software programstored in Spreadsheet Software Storage Area 20616 b (Paragraph [0080]).In this embodiment, a certain cell of a plurality of cells displayed onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) is selected by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) orvia voice recognition system. The selected cell is highlighted by acertain manner, and CPU 211 (FIG. 1) stores the location of the selectedcell in Spreadsheet Data Storage Area 20616 c (Paragraph [0080]) (S1).One or more of alphanumeric data are input by utilizing Input Device 210or via voice recognition system into the cell selected in S1, and CPU211 stores the alphanumeric data in Spreadsheet Data Storage Area 20616c (S2). CPU 211 displays the alphanumeric data on LCD 201 thereafter(S3). The sequence of S1 through S3 can be repeated for a numerousamount of times and saved and closed thereafter.

Paragraph [0082]—<<Word Processing Function>>

Paragraph [0083]—Paragraph [0084] through Paragraph [0097] illustratethe word processing function of Communication Device 200. By way ofimplementing such function, Communication Device 200 can be utilized asa word processor which has the similar functions to Microsoft Words. Theword processing function primarily includes the following functions: thebold formatting function, the italic formatting function, the imagepasting function, the font formatting function, the spell checkfunction, the underlining function, the page numbering function, and thebullets and numbering function. Here, the bold formatting function makesthe selected alphanumeric data bold. The italic formatting functionmakes the selected alphanumeric data italic. The image pasting functionpastes the selected image to a document to the selected location. Thefont formatting function changes the selected alphanumeric data to theselected font. The spell check function fixes spelling and grammaticalerrors of the alphanumeric data in the document. The underliningfunction adds underlines to the selected alphanumeric data. The pagenumbering function adds page numbers to each page of a document at theselected location. The bullets and numbering function adds the selectedtype of bullets and numbers to the selected paragraphs.

Paragraph [0084]—This Paragraph [0084] illustrates the software programinstalled in each Communication Device 200 to initiate the presentfunction. First of all, a list of modes is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1)(S1). When an input signal is input by utilizing Input Device 210(FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system to select a specific mode (S2),the selected mode is activated. In the present example, thecommunication mode is activated (S3 a) when the communication mode isselected in the previous step, the game download mode and the game playmode are activated (S3 b) when the game download mode and the game playmode are selected in the previous step of which the details aredescribed in Paragraph [0029], and the word processing function isactivated (S3 c) when the word processing function is selected in theprevious step. The modes displayed on LCD 201 in S1 which are selectablein S2 and S3 may include all functions and modes explained in thisspecification. Once the selected mode is activated, another mode can beactivated while the first activated mode is still implemented by goingthrough the steps of S1 through S3 for another mode, thereby enabling aplurality of functions and modes being performed simultaneously (S4).

Paragraph [0085]—This Paragraph [0085] illustrates the data stored inRAM 206 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, the data to activate (as describedin S3 a of the previous paragraph) and to perform the communication modeis stored in Communication Data Storage Area 2061 a, the data toactivate (as described in S3 b of the previous paragraph) and to performthe game download mode and the game play mode are stored in Game DL/PlayData Storage Area 2061 b/2061 c of which the details are described inParagraph [0030], and the data to activate (as described in S3 c of theprevious paragraph) and to perform the word processing function isstored in Word Processing Information Storage Area 20617 a.

Paragraph [0086]—This Paragraph [0086] illustrates the data stored inWord Processing Information Storage Area 20617 a (Paragraph [0085]). Inthis embodiment, Word Processing Information Storage Area 20617 aincludes Word Processing Software Storage Area 20617 b and WordProcessing Data Storage Area 20617 c. Word processing Software StorageArea 20617 b stores the software programs described in Paragraph [0087]hereinafter, and Word Processing Data Storage Area 20617 c stores aplurality of data described in Paragraph [0088] hereinafter.

Paragraph [0087]—This Paragraph [0087] illustrates the software programsstored in Word Processing Software Storage Area 20617 b (Paragraph[0086]). In this embodiment, Word Processing Software Storage Area 20617b stores Alphanumeric Data Input Software 20617 b 1, Bold FormattingSoftware 20617 b 2, Italic Formatting Software 20617 b 3, Image PastingSoftware 20617 b 4, Font Formatting Software 20617 b 5, Spell CheckSoftware 20617 b 6, Underlining Software 20617 b 7, Page NumberingSoftware 20617 b 8, and Bullets And Numbering Software 20617 b 9.Alphanumeric Data Input Software 20617 b 1 inputs to a document a seriesof alphanumeric data in accordance to the input signals produced byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system.Bold Formatting Software 20617 b 2 implements the bold formattingfunction which makes the selected alphanumeric data bold of which thesequence is described in Paragraph [0090]. Italic Formatting Software20617 b 3 implements the italic formatting function which makes theselected alphanumeric data italic of which the sequence is described inParagraph [0091]. Image Pasting Software 20617 b 4 implements the imagepasting function which pastes the selected image to a document to theselected location of which the sequence is described in Paragraph[0092]. Font Formatting Software 20617 b 5 implements the fontformatting function which changes the selected alphanumeric data to theselected font of which the sequence is described in Paragraph [0093].Spell Check Software 20617 b 6 implements the spell check function whichfixes spelling and grammatical errors of the alphanumeric data in adocument of which the sequence is described in Paragraph [0094].Underlining Software 20617 b 7 implements the underlining function whichadds the selected underlines to the selected alphanumeric data of whichthe sequence is described in Paragraph [0095]. Page Numbering Software20617 b 8 implements the page numbering function which adds page numbersat the selected location to each page of a document of which thesequence is described in Paragraph [0096]. Bullets And NumberingSoftware 20617 b 9 implements the bullets and numbering function whichadds the selected type of bullets and numbers to the selected paragraphsof which the sequence is described in Paragraph [0097].

Paragraph [0088]—This Paragraph [0088] illustrates the data stored inWord Processing Data Storage Area 20617 c (Paragraph [0086]). In thisembodiment, Word Processing Data Storage Area 20617 c includesAlphanumeric Data Storage Area 20617 c 1, Bold Formatting Data StorageArea 20617 c 2, Italic Formatting Data Storage Area 20617 c 3, ImageData Storage Area 20617 c 4, Font Formatting Data Storage Area 20617 c5, Spell Check Data Storage Area 20617 c 6, Underlining Data StorageArea 20617 c 7, Page Numbering Data Storage Area 20617 c 8, and BulletsAnd Numbering Data Storage Area 20617 c 9. Alphanumeric Data StorageArea 20617 c 1 stores the basic text and numeric data which are notdecorated by bold and/or italic (the default font may be courier new).Bold Formatting Data Storage Area 20617 c 2 stores the text and numericdata which are decorated by bold. Italic Formatting Data Storage Area20617 c 3 stores the text and numeric data which are decorated byitalic. Image Data Storage Area 20617 c 4 stores the data representingthe location of the image data pasted in a document and the image dataitself. Font Formatting Data Storage Area 20617 c 5 stores a pluralityof types of fonts, such as arial, century, courier new, tahoma, andtimes new roman, of all text and numeric data stored in AlphanumericData Storage Area 20617 c 1. Spell check Data Storage Area 20617 c 6stores a plurality of spell check data, i.e., a plurality of correcttext and numeric data for purposes of being compared with thealphanumeric data input in a document and a plurality of pattern datafor purposes of checking the grammatical errors therein. UnderliningData Storage Area 20617 c 7 stores a plurality of data representingunderlines of different types. Page Numbering Data Storage Area 20617 c8 stores the data representing the location of page numbers to bedisplayed in a document and the page number of each page of a document.Bullets And Numbering Data Storage Area 20617 c 9 stores a plurality ofdata representing different types of bullets and numbering and thelocation which they are added.

Paragraph [0089]—This Paragraph [0089] illustrates the sequence of thesoftware program stored in Alphanumeric Data Input Software 20617 b 1.In this embodiment, a plurality of alphanumeric data is input byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system(S1). The corresponding alphanumeric data is retrieved from AlphanumericData Storage Area 20617 c 1 (Paragraph [0088]) (S2), and the documentincluding the alphanumeric data retrieved in S2 is displayed on LCD 201(FIG. 1) (S3).

Paragraph [0090]—This Paragraph [0090] illustrates the sequence of thesoftware program stored in Bold Formatting Software 20617 b 2. In thisembodiment, one or more of alphanumeric data are selected by utilizingInput Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). Next, abold formatting signal is input by utilizing Input Device 210 (e.g.,selecting a specific icon displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) or selecting aspecific item from a pulldown menu) or via voice recognition system(S2). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) then retrieves the bold formatting data from BoldFormatting Data Storage Area 20617 c 2 (Paragraph [0088]) (S3), andreplaces the alphanumeric data selected in S1 with the bold formattingdata retrieved in S3 (S4). The document with the replaced boldformatting data is displayed on LCD 201 thereafter (S5).

Paragraph [0091]—This Paragraph [0091] illustrates the sequence of thesoftware program stored in Italic Formatting Software 20617 b 3. In thisembodiment, one or more of alphanumeric data are selected by utilizingInput Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). Next, anitalic formatting signal is input by utilizing Input Device 210 (e.g.,selecting a specific icon displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) or selecting aspecific item from a pulldown menu) or via voice recognition system(S2). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) then retrieves the italic formatting data fromItalic Formatting Data Storage Area 20617 c 3 (Paragraph [0088]) (S3),and replaces the alphanumeric data selected in S1 with the italicformatting data retrieved in S3 (S4). The document with the replaceditalic formatting data is displayed on LCD 201 thereafter (S5).

Paragraph [0092]—This Paragraph [0092] illustrates the sequence of thesoftware program stored in Image Pasting Software 20617 b 4. In thisembodiment, the image to be pasted is selected by utilizing Input Device210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). Here, the image maybe of any type, such as JPEG, GIF, and TIFF. Next the location in adocument where the image is to be pasted is selected by utilizing InputDevice 210 or via voice recognition system (S2). The data representingthe location is stored in Image Pasting Data Storage Area 20617 c 4(Paragraph [0088]). The image is pasted at the location selected in S2and the image is stored in Image Pasting Data Storage Area 20617 c 4(S3). The document with the pasted image is displayed on LCD 201(FIG. 1) thereafter (S4).

Paragraph [0093]—This Paragraph [0093] illustrates the sequence of thesoftware program stored in Font Formatting Software 20617 b 5. In thisembodiment, one or more of alphanumeric data are selected by utilizingInput Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). Next, afont formatting signal is input by utilizing Input Device 210 (e.g.,selecting a specific icon displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) or selecting aspecific item from a pulldown menu) or via voice recognition system(S2). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) then retrieves the font formatting data fromItalic Formatting Data Storage Area 20617 c 5 (Paragraph [0088]) (S3),and replaces the alphanumeric data selected in S1 with the fontformatting data retrieved in S3 (S4). The document with the replacedfont formatting data is displayed on LCD 201 thereafter (S5).

Paragraph [0094]—This Paragraph [0094] illustrates the sequence of thesoftware program stored in Spell Check Software 20617 b 6. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) scans all alphanumeric data in a document(S1). CPU 211 then compares the alphanumeric data with the spell checkdata stored in Spell Check Data Storage Area 20617 c 6 (Paragraph[0088]), i.e., a plurality of correct text and numeric data for purposesof being compared with the alphanumeric data input in a document and aplurality of pattern data for purposes of checking the grammaticalerrors therein (S2). CPU 211 corrects the alphanumeric data and/orcorrects the grammatical errors (S3), and the document with thecorrected alphanumeric data is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S4).

Paragraph [0095]—This Paragraph [0095] illustrates the sequence of thesoftware program stored in Underlining Software 20617 b 7. In thisembodiment, one or more of alphanumeric data are selected by utilizingInput Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). Next, anunderlining signal is input by utilizing Input Device 210 (e.g.,selecting a specific icon displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) or selecting aspecific item from a pulldown menu) or via voice recognition system toselect the type of the underline to be added (S2). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) thenretrieves the underlining data from Underlining Data Storage Area 20617c 7 (Paragraph [0088]) (S3), and adds to the alphanumeric data selectedin S1 (S4). The document with underlines added to the selectedalphanumeric data is displayed on LCD 201 thereafter (S5).

Paragraph [0096]—This Paragraph [0096] illustrates the sequence of thesoftware program stored in Page Numbering Software 20617 b 8. In thisembodiment, a page numbering signal is input by utilizing Input Device210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). Next, the location todisplay the page number is selected by utilizing Input Device 210 or viavoice recognition system (S2). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) then stores the locationof the page number to be displayed in Page Numbering Storage Area 20617c 8 (Paragraph [0088]), and adds the page number to each page of adocument at the selected location (S3). The document with page numbersis displayed on LCD 201 thereafter (S4).

Paragraph [0097]—This Paragraph [0097] illustrates the sequence of thesoftware program stored in Bullets And Numbering Software 20617 b 9. Inthis embodiment, a paragraph is selected by utilizing input device 210(FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). Next, the type of thebullets and/or numbering is selected by utilizing Input Device 210 orvia voice recognition system (S2). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) then stores theidentification data of the paragraph selected in S1 and the type of thebullets and/or numbering in Bullets And Numbering Data Storage Area20617 c 9 (Paragraph [0088]), and adds the bullets and/or numbering tothe selected paragraph of a document (S3). The document with the bulletsand/or numbering is displayed on LCD 201 thereafter (S4).

Paragraph [0098]—<<Start Up Software Function>>

Paragraph [0099]—Paragraph [0100] through Paragraph [0109] illustratethe start up software program function which enables CommunicationDevice 200 to automatically activate (or start up) the registeredsoftware programs when the power is on.

Paragraph [0100]—This Paragraph [0100] illustrates the overall sequenceof the present function. In this embodiment, the user of CommunicationDevice 200 presses the power button of Communication Device 200 (S1).Then the predetermined software programs automatically activate (orstart up) without having any instructions from the user of CommunicationDevice 200 (S2).

Paragraph [0101]—This Paragraph [0101] illustrates the storage areaincluded RAM 206 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, RAM 206 includes Start UpInformation Storage Area 20621 a which is described in Paragraph [0102]hereinafter.

Paragraph [0102]—This Paragraph [0102] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Start Up Information Storage Area 20621 a (Paragraph[0101]). In this embodiment, Start Up Information Storage Area 20621 aincludes Start Up Software Storage Area 20621 b and Start Up DataStorage Area 20621 c. Start Up Software Storage Area 20621 b stores thesoftware programs necessary to implement the present function, such asthe ones described in Paragraph [0103] hereinafter. Start Up DataStorage Area 20621 c stores the data necessary to implement the presentfunction, such as the ones described in Paragraph [0105] hereinafter.

Paragraph [0103]—This Paragraph [0103] illustrates the software programsstored in Start Up Software Storage Area 20621 b (Paragraph [0102]). Inthis embodiment, Start Up Software Storage Area 20621 b stores Power OnDetecting Software 20621 b 1, Start Up Data Storage Area ScanningSoftware 20621 b 2, and Start Up Software Activating Software 20621 b 3.Power On Detecting Software 20621 b 1 detects whether the power ofCommunication Device 200 is on of which the sequence is described inParagraph [0106] hereinafter, Start Up Data Storage Area ScanningSoftware 20621 b 2 identifies the software programs which areautomatically activated of which the sequence is described in Paragraph[0107] hereinafter, and Start Up Software Activating Software 20621 b 3activates the identified software programs identified by Start Up DataStorage Area Scanning Software 20621 b 2 of which the sequence isdescribed in Paragraph [0108] hereinafter.

Paragraph [0104]—This Paragraph [0104] illustrates the storage areaincluded in Start Up Data Storage Area 20621 c (Paragraph [0102]). Inthis embodiment, Start Up Data Storage Area 20621 c includes Start UpSoftware Index Storage Area 20621 c 1. Here, Start Up Software IndexStorage Area 20621 c 1 stores the software program indexes, wherein asoftware program index is an unique information assigned to eachsoftware program as an identifier (e.g., title of a software program) ofwhich the details are explained in Paragraph [0105] hereinafter.

Paragraph [0105]—This Paragraph [0105] illustrates the data stored inStart Up Software Index Storage Area 20621 c 1 (Paragraph [0104]). Inthis embodiment, Start Up Software Index Storage Area 20621 c 1 storesthe software program indexes of the software programs which areautomatically activated by the present function. Here, the softwareprograms may be any software programs explained in this specification,and the storage areas where these software programs are stored areexplained in the relevant paragraphs thereto. Three software programindexes, i.e., Start Up Software Index 20621 c 1 a, Start Up SoftwareIndex 20621 c 1 b, and Start Up Software Index 20621 c 1 c, are storedin Start Up Software Index Storage Area 20621 c 1 in the presentexample. The software program indexes can be created and store in StartUp Software Index Storage Area 20621 c 1 manually by utilizing inputdevice 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system.

Paragraph [0106]—This Paragraph [0106] illustrates the sequence of PowerOn Detecting Software 20621 b 1 stored in Start Up Software Storage Area20621 b (Paragraph [0103]). In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) checksthe status of the power condition of Communication Device 200 (S1). Whenthe user of Communication Device 200 powers on Communication Device 200by utilizing input device 210 (FIG. 1), such as by pressing a powerbutton (S2), CPU 211 activates Start Up Data Storage Area ScanningSoftware 20621 b 2 (Paragraph [0103]) of which the sequence is explainedin Paragraph [0107] hereinafter.

Paragraph [0107]—This Paragraph [0107] illustrates the sequence of StartUp Data Storage Area Scanning Software 20621 b 2 stored in Start UpSoftware Storage Area 20621 b (Paragraph [0103]). In this embodiment,CPU 211 (FIG. 1) scans Start Up Software Index Storage Area 20621 c 1(Paragraph [0105]) (S1), and identifies the software programs which areautomatically activated (S2). CPU 211 activates Start Up SoftwareActivating Software 20621 b 3 (Paragraph [0103]) thereafter of which thesequence is explained in Paragraph [0108] hereinafter (S3).

Paragraph [0108]—This Paragraph [0108] illustrates the sequence of StartUp Software Activating Software 20621 b 3 stored in Start Up SoftwareStorage Area 20621 b (Paragraph [0103]). In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) activates the software programs of which the software programindexes are identified in S2 of Paragraph [0107] hereinbefore (S1).

Paragraph [0109]—This Paragraph [0109] illustrates another embodimentwherein the three software programs stored in Start Up Software StorageArea 20621 b (Paragraph [0103]) (i.e., Power On Detecting Software 20621b 1, Start Up Data Storage Area Scanning Software 20621 b 2, Start UpSoftware Activating Software 20621 b 3) is integrated into one softwareprogram stored therein. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) checks thestatus of the power condition of Communication Device 200 (S1). When theuser of Communication Device 200 powers on Communication Device 200 byutilizing input device 210 (FIG. 1), such as by pressing a power button(S2), CPU 211 scans Start Up Software Index Storage Area 20621 c 1(Paragraph [0104]) (S3), and identifies the software programs which areautomatically activated (S4). CPU 211 activates the software programsthereafter of which the software program indexes are identified in S4(S5).

Paragraph [0110]—As another embodiment, the software programs per se(not the software program indexes as described in Paragraph [0105]) maybe stored in a specific storage area which are activated by the presentfunction.

Paragraph [0111]—As another embodiment, the present function may beimplemented at the time the user of Communication Device 200 logs oninstead of at the time the Communication Device 200 is powered asdescribed in S2 of Paragraph [0106].

Paragraph [0112]—<<Stereo Audio Data Output Function>>

Paragraph [0113]—Paragraph [0114] through Paragraph [0126] illustratethe stereo audio data output function which enables Communication Device200 to output audio data from Speakers 216L and 216R (not shown) in astereo fashion.

Paragraph [0114]—This Paragraph [0114] illustrates the storage areaincluded in Host Data Storage Area H00 c of Host H (Paragraph [0025]).In this embodiment, Host Data Storage Area H00 c includes Stereo AudioInformation Storage Area H22 a. Stereo Audio Information Storage AreaH22 a stores the software programs and data necessary to implement thepresent function as described in details hereinafter.

Paragraph [0115]—This Paragraph [0115] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Stereo Audio Information Storage Area H22 a (Paragraph[0114]). In this embodiment, Stereo Audio Information Storage Area H22 aincludes Stereo Audio Software Storage Area H22 b and Stereo Audio DataStorage Area H22 c. Stereo Audio Software Storage Area H22 b stores thesoftware programs necessary to implement the present function, such asthe one described in Paragraph [0118] hereinafter. Stereo Audio DataStorage Area H22 c stores the data necessary to implement the presentfunction, such as the ones described in Paragraph [0116] hereinafter.

Paragraph [0116]—This Paragraph [0116] illustrates the stereo audio datastored in Stereo Audio Data Storage Area H22 c (Paragraph [0115]). Aplurality of stereo audio data are stored in Stereo Audio Data StorageArea H22 c. In the example described in Paragraph [0116], three stereoaudio data, i.e., Stereo Audio Data H22 c 1, Stereo Audio Data H22 c 2,and Stereo Audio Data H22 c 3 are stored therein.

Paragraph [0117]—This Paragraph [0117] illustrates the components of thestereo audio data stored in Stereo Audio Data Storage Area H22 c(Paragraph [0116]). This Paragraph describes the components of StereoAudio Data H22 c 1 (Paragraph [0116]) as an example. In this embodiment,Stereo Audio Data H22 c 1 includes Left Speaker Audio Data H22 c 1L,Right Speaker Audio Data H22 c 1R, and Stereo Audio Data Output TimingData H22 c 1T. Left Speaker Audio Data H22 c 1L is an audio data whichis designed to be output from Speaker 216L (not shown). Right SpeakerAudio Data H22 c 1R is an audio data which is designed to be output fromSpeaker 216R (not shown). Stereo Audio Data Output Timing Data H22 c 1Tis a timing data which is utilized to synchronize the output of bothLeft Speaker Audio Data H22 c 1L and Right Speaker Audio Data H22 c 1Rfrom Speaker 216R and Speaker 216L respectively.

Paragraph [0118]—This Paragraph [0118] illustrates the sequence of thesoftware program stored in Stereo Audio Software Storage Area H22 b(Paragraph [0115]). In this embodiment, the software program stored inStereo Audio Software Storage Area H22 b extracts one of the stereoaudio data stored in Stereo Audio Data Storage Area H22 c (Paragraph[0116]) and creates Transferred Stereo Audio Data TSAD for purposes oftransferring the extracted stereo audio data to Communication Device 200(S1).

Paragraph [0119]—This Paragraph [0119] illustrates the components ofTransferred Stereo Audio Data TSAD created by the software programstored in Stereo Audio Software Storage Area H22 b (Paragraph [0118]).In this embodiment, Transferred Stereo Audio Data TSAD is composed ofHeader TSAD1, Com Device ID TSAD2, Host ID TSAD3, Transferred StereoAudio Data TSAD4, and Footer TSAD5. Com Device ID TSAD2 indicates theidentification of Communication Device 200, Host ID TSAD3 indicates theidentification of Host H (Paragraph [0025]), and Transferred StereoAudio Data TSAD4 is the stereo audio data extracted in the mannerdescribed in Paragraph [0118]. Header TSAD1 and Footer TSAD5 indicatethe beginning and the end of Transferred Stereo Audio Data TSAD.

Paragraph [0120]—This Paragraph [0120] illustrates the storage areaincluded in RAM 206 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 (Paragraph[0025]). In this embodiment, RAM 206 includes Stereo Audio InformationStorage Area 20622 a. Stereo Audio Information Storage Area 20622 astores the software programs and data necessary to implement the presentfunction as described in details hereinafter.

Paragraph [0121]—This Paragraph [0121] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Stereo Audio Information Storage Area 20622 a (Paragraph[0120]). In this embodiment, Stereo Audio Information Storage Area 20622a includes Stereo Audio Software Storage Area 20622 b and Stereo AudioData Storage Area 20622 c. Stereo Audio Software Storage Area 20622 bstores the software programs necessary to implement the presentfunction, such as the ones described in Paragraph [0125] and Paragraph[0126] hereinafter. Stereo Audio Data Storage Area 20622 c stores thedata necessary to implement the present function, such as the onesdescribed in Paragraph [0122] hereinafter.

Paragraph [0122]—This Paragraph [0122] illustrates the stereo audio datastored in Stereo Audio Data Storage Area 20622 c (Paragraph [0121]). Aplurality of stereo audio data are stored in Stereo Audio Data StorageArea 20622 c. In the example described in Paragraph [0122], three stereoaudio data, i.e., Stereo Audio Data 20622 c 1, Stereo Audio Data 20622 c2, and Stereo Audio Data 20622 c 3 are stored therein.

Paragraph [0123]—This Paragraph [0123] illustrates the components of thestereo audio data stored in Stereo Audio Data Storage Area 20622 c(Paragraph [0122]). Paragraph describes the components of Stereo AudioData 20622 c 1 (Paragraph [0122]) as an example. In this embodiment,Stereo Audio Data 20622 c 1 includes Left Speaker Audio Data 20622 c 1L,Right Speaker Audio Data 20622 c 1R, and Stereo Audio Data Output TimingData 20622 c 1T. Left Speaker Audio Data 20622 c 1L is an audio datawhich is designed to be output from Speaker 216L (not shown). RightSpeaker Audio Data 20622 c 1R is an audio data which is designed to beoutput from Speaker 216R (not shown). Stereo Audio Data Output TimingData 20622 c 1T is a timing data which is utilized to synchronize theoutput of both Left Speaker Audio Data 20622 c 1L and Right SpeakerAudio Data 20622 c 1R from Speaker 216R and Speaker 216L respectively.

Paragraph [0124]—The downloaded stereo audio data are stored in specificarea(s) of Stereo Audio Data Storage Area 20622 c (Paragraph [0122]).

Paragraph [0125]—This Paragraph [0125] illustrates the sequence ofselecting and preparing to output the stereo audio data from Speakers216L and 216R (not shown) in a stereo fashion. In this embodiment, alist of stereo audio data is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). Theuser of Communication Device 200 selects one stereo audio data byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system(S2). Assuming Stereo Audio Data 20622 c 1 is selected (Paragraph[0122]) in S2, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) retrieves Left Speaker Audio Data 20622c 1L (S3), Right Speaker Audio Data 20622 c 1R (S4), and Stereo AudioData Output Timing Data 20622 c 1T from Stereo Audio Data Storage Area20622 c (Paragraph [0122]) (S5).

Paragraph [0126]—This Paragraph [0126] illustrates the sequence ofoutputting the stereo audio data from Speakers 216L and 216R (not shown)in a stereo fashion. In this embodiment, the user of CommunicationDevice 200 inputs a specific signal to output the stereo audio data byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system(S1). Assuming Audio Data 20622 c 1 (Paragraph [0122]) is selected in S2of Paragraph [0125], CPU 211 outputs Left Speaker Audio Data 20622 c 1L(Paragraph [0123]) and Right Speaker Audio Data 20622 c 1R (Paragraph[0123]) from Speakers 216L and 216R respectively in a stereo fashion inaccordance with Stereo Audio Data Output Timing Data 20622 c 1T(Paragraph [0123]) (S2).

Paragraph [0127]—<<Stereo Visual Data Output Function>>

Paragraph [0128]—Paragraph [0129] through Paragraph [0141] illustratethe stereo visual data output function which enables CommunicationDevice 200 to output visual data from LCDs 201L and 201R (not shown) ina stereo fashion.

Paragraph [0129]—This Paragraph [0129] illustrates the storage areaincluded in Host Data Storage Area H00 c (not shown) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]). In this embodiment, Host Data Storage Area H00 cincludes Stereo Visual Information Storage Area H23 a. Stereo VisualInformation Storage Area H23 a stores the software programs and datanecessary to implement the present function as described in detailshereinafter.

Paragraph [0130]—This Paragraph [0130] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Stereo Visual Information Storage Area H23 a (Paragraph[0129]). In this embodiment, Stereo Visual Information Storage Area H23a includes Stereo Visual Software Storage Area H23 b and Stereo VisualData Storage Area H23 c. Stereo Visual Software Storage Area H23 bstores the software programs necessary to implement the presentfunction, such as the one described in Paragraph [0133] hereinafter.Stereo Visual Data Storage Area H23 c stores the data necessary toimplement the present function, such as the ones described in Paragraph[0131] hereinafter.

Paragraph [0131]—This Paragraph [0131] illustrates the stereo visualdata stored in Stereo Visual Data Storage Area H23 c (Paragraph [0130]).A plurality of stereo visual data are stored in Stereo Visual DataStorage Area H23 c. In the example described in Paragraph [0131], threestereo visual data, i.e., Stereo Visual Data H23 c 1, Stereo Visual DataH23 c 2, and Stereo Visual Data H23 c 3 are stored therein.

Paragraph [0132]—This Paragraph [0132] illustrates the components of thestereo visual data stored in Stereo Visual Data Storage Area H23 c(Paragraph [0131]). Paragraph [0132] describes the components of StereoVisual Data H23 c 1 (Paragraph [0131]) as an example. In thisembodiment, Stereo Visual Data H23 c 1 includes Left LCD Visual Data H23c 1L, Right LCD Visual Data H23 c 1R, and Stereo Visual Data OutputTiming Data H23 c 1T. Left LCD Visual Data H23 c 1L is a visual datawhich is designed to be output from LCD 201L (not shown). Right LCDVisual Data H23 c 1R is a visual data which is designed to be outputfrom LCD 201R (not shown). Stereo Visual Data Output Timing Data H23 c1T is a timing data which is utilized to synchronize the output of bothLeft LCD Visual Data H23 c 1L and Right LCD Visual Data H23 c 1R fromLCD 201R and LCD 201L respectively.

Paragraph [0133]—This Paragraph [0133] illustrates the sequence of thesoftware program stored in Stereo Visual Software Storage Area H23 b(Paragraph [0130]). In this embodiment, the software program stored inStereo Visual Software Storage Area H23 b extracts one of the stereovisual data stored in Stereo Visual Data Storage Area H23 c (Paragraph[0131]) and creates Transferred Stereo Visual Data TSVD for purposes oftransferring the extracted stereo visual data to Communication Device200 (S1).

Paragraph [0134]—This Paragraph [0134] illustrates the components ofTransferred Stereo Visual Data TSVD created by the software programstored in Stereo Visual Software Storage Area H23 b (Paragraph [0133]).In this embodiment, Transferred Stereo Visual Data TSVD is composed ofHeader TSVD1, Com Device ID TSVD2, Host ID TSVD3, Transferred StereoVisual Data TSVD4, and Footer TSVD5. Com Device ID TSVD2 indicates theidentification of Communication Device 200, Host ID TSVD3 indicates theidentification of Host H (Paragraph [0025]), and Transferred StereoVisual Data TSVD4 is the stereo visual data extracted in the mannerdescribed in Paragraph [0133]. Header TSVD1 and Footer TSVD5 indicatethe beginning and the end of Transferred Stereo Visual Data TSVD.

Paragraph [0135]—This Paragraph [0135] illustrates the storage areaincluded in RAM 206 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 (Paragraph[0025]). In this embodiment, RAM 206 includes Stereo Visual InformationStorage Area 20623 a. Stereo Visual Information Storage Area 20623 astores the software programs and data necessary to implement the presentfunction as described in details hereinafter.

Paragraph [0136]—This Paragraph [0136] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Stereo Visual Information Storage Area 20623 a (Paragraph[0135]). In this embodiment, Stereo Visual Information Storage Area20623 a includes Stereo Visual Software Storage Area 20623 b and StereoVisual Data Storage Area 20623 c. Stereo Visual Software Storage Area20623 b stores the software programs necessary to implement the presentfunction, such as the ones described in Paragraph [0140] and Paragraph[0141] hereinafter. Stereo Visual Data Storage Area 20623 c stores thedata necessary to implement the present function, such as the onesdescribed in Paragraph [0137] hereinafter.

Paragraph [0137]—This Paragraph [0137] illustrates the stereo visualdata stored in Stereo Visual Data Storage Area 20623 c (Paragraph[0136]). A plurality of stereo visual data are stored in Stereo VisualData Storage Area 20623 c. In the example described in Paragraph [0137],three stereo visual data, i.e., Stereo Visual Data 20623 c 1, StereoVisual Data 20623 c 2, and Stereo Visual Data 20623 c 3 are storedtherein.

Paragraph [0138]—This Paragraph [0138] illustrates the components of thestereo visual data stored in Stereo Visual Data Storage Area 20623 c(Paragraph [0137]). Paragraph describes the components of Stereo VisualData 20623 c 1 (Paragraph [0137]) as an example. In this embodiment,Stereo Visual Data 20623 c 1 includes Left LCD Visual Data 20623 c 1L,Right LCD Visual Data 20623 c 1R, and Stereo Visual Data Output TimingData 20623 c 1T. Left LCD Visual Data 20623 c 1L is a visual data whichis designed to be output from LCD 201L (not shown). Right LCD VisualData 20623 c 1R is a visual data which is designed to be output from LCD201R (not shown). Stereo Visual Data Output Timing Data 20623 c 1T is atiming data which is utilized to synchronize the output of both Left LCDVisual Data 20623 c 1L and Right LCD Visual Data 20623 c 1R from LCD201R and LCD 201L respectively.

Paragraph [0139]—The downloaded stereo visual data are stored inspecific area(s) of Stereo Visual Data Storage Area 20623 c (Paragraph[0137]).

Paragraph [0140]—This Paragraph [0140] illustrates the sequence ofselecting and preparing to output the stereo visual data from LCDs 201Land 201R (not shown) in a stereo fashion. In this embodiment, a list ofstereo visual data is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). The user ofCommunication Device 200 selects one stereo visual data by utilizingInput Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S2). AssumingStereo Visual Data 20623 c 1 is selected (Paragraph [0137]) in S2, CPU211 (FIG. 1) retrieves Left LCD Visual Data 20623 c 1L (S3), Right LCDVisual Data 20623 c 1R (S4), and Stereo Visual Data Output Timing Data20623 c 1T from Stereo Visual Data Storage Area 20623 c (Paragraph[0137]) (S5).

Paragraph [0141]—This Paragraph [0141] illustrates the sequence ofoutputting the stereo visual data from LCDs 201L and 201R (not shown) ina stereo fashion. In this embodiment, the user of Communication Device200 inputs a specific signal to output the stereo visual data byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system(S1). Assuming Visual Data 20623 c 1 (Paragraph [0137]) is selected inS2 of Paragraph [0140], CPU 211 outputs Left LCD Visual Data 20623 c 1L(Paragraph [0138]) and Right LCD Visual Data 20623 c 1R (Paragraph[0138]) from LCDs 201L and 201R respectively in a stereo fashion inaccordance with Stereo Visual Data Output Timing Data 20623 c 1T(Paragraph [0138]) (S2).

Paragraph [0142]—<<SOS Calling Function>>

Paragraph [0143]—Paragraph [0144] through Paragraph [0156] illustratethe SOS calling function which enables Communication Device 200 tonotify the police department the current location of CommunicationDevice 200 and the personal information of the user of Communication 200when a 911 call is dialed from Communication Device 200.

Paragraph [0144]—This Paragraph [0144] illustrates the storage areaincluded in Host Information Storage Area H00 a (Paragraph [0025]). Inthis embodiment, Host Information Storage Area H00 a includes SOSCalling Information Storage Area H29 a of which the data stored thereinare described in Paragraph [0145].

Paragraph [0145]—This Paragraph [0145] illustrates the storage areasincluded in SOS Calling Information Storage Area H29 a (Paragraph[0144]). In this embodiment, SOS Calling Information Storage Area H29 aincludes SOS Calling Data Storage Area H29 b and SOS Calling SoftwareStorage Area H29 c. SOS Calling Data Storage Area H29 b stores the datanecessary to implement the present function, such as the ones describedin Paragraph [0146] and Paragraph [0147]. SOS Calling Software StorageArea H29 c stores the software programs necessary to implement thepresent function, such as the ones described in Paragraph [0155] andParagraph [0156].

Paragraph [0146]—This Paragraph [0146] illustrates the storage areaincluded in SOS Calling Data Storage Area H29 b (Paragraph [0145]). Inthis embodiment, SOS Calling Data Storage Area H29 b includes PoliceDepartment Location Data Storage Area H29 b 1 of which the data storedtherein are described in Paragraph [0147].

Paragraph [0147]—This Paragraph [0147] illustrates the data stored inPolice Department Location Data Storage Area H29 b 1 (Paragraph [0146]).As illustrated in Paragraph [0147], Police Department Location DataStorage Area H29 b 1 includes three columns, i.e., Police Dept ID,Location Data, and Phone #. Police Dept ID represents the identificationof a police department (e.g., NYPD). Location Data represents thegeographical location data (in x, y, z format) of the police departmentof the corresponding Police Dept ID. Phone #represents the phone numberof the police department of the corresponding Police Dept ID. In theexample described in Paragraph [0147], H29PD #1 is an identification ofthe police department of which the geographical location is H29LD #1 andof which the phone number is H29PN #1; H29PD #2 is an identification ofthe police department of which the geographical location is H29LD #2 andof which the phone number is H29PN #2; H29PD #3 is an identification ofthe police department of which the geographical location is H29LD #3 andof which the phone number is H29PN #3; and H29PD #4 is an identificationof the police department of which the geographical location is H29LD #4and of which the phone number is H29PN #4.

Paragraph [0148]—The data and/or the software programs necessary toimplement the present function on the side of Communication Device 200as described hereinafter may be downloaded from Host H (Paragraph[0025]) to Communication Device 200.

Paragraph [0149]—This Paragraph [0149] illustrates the storage areaincluded in RAM 206 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200. In thisembodiment, RAM 206 includes SOS Calling Information Storage Area 20629a of which the details are described in Paragraph [0150].

Paragraph [0150]—This Paragraph [0150] illustrates the storage areasincluded in SOS Calling Information Storage Area 20629 a (Paragraph[0149]). In this embodiment, SOS Calling Information Storage Area 20629a includes SOS Calling Data Storage Area 20629 b and SOS CallingSoftware Storage Area 20629 c. SOS Calling Data Storage Area 20629 bincludes data necessary to implement the present function, such as theones described in Paragraph [0151] and Paragraph [0152]. SOS CallingSoftware Storage Area 20629 c stores the software programs necessary toimplement the present function, such as the one described in Paragraph[0153].

Paragraph [0151]—This Paragraph [0151] illustrates storage areasincluded in SOS Calling Data Storage Area 20629 b (Paragraph [0150]). Inthis embodiment, SOS Calling Data Storage Area 20629 b includes GPS DataStorage Area 20629 b 1 and User Data Storage Area 20629 b 2. GPS DataStorage Area 20629 b 1 stores the data regarding the currentgeographical location produced by the method so-called GPS as describedhereinbefore. User Data Storage Area 20629 b 2 stores the data regardingthe personal information of the user of Communication Device 200 asdescribed in Paragraph [0152].

Paragraph [0152]—This Paragraph [0152] illustrates the data stored inUser Data Storage Area 20629 b 2 (Paragraph [0151]). In this embodiment,User Data Storage Area 20629 b 2 includes User Data 20629UD whichincludes data regarding the personal information of the user ofCommunication Device 200. In the example described in Paragraph [0152],User Data 20629UD comprises Name, Age, Sex, Race, Blood Type, HomeAddress, and SSN. Name represents the name of the user of CommunicationDevice 200; Age represents the age of the user of Communication Device200; Sex represents the sex of the user of Communication Device 200;Race represents the race of the user of Communication Device 200; BloodType represents the blood type of the user of Communication Device 200;Home Address represents the home address of the user of CommunicationDevice 200; and SSN represents the social security number of the user ofCommunication Device 200.

Paragraph [0153]—This Paragraph [0153] illustrates the software programstored in SOS Calling Software Storage Area 20629 c (Paragraph [0150]).In this embodiment, when the user of Communication Device 200 inputs 911by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system(S1), CPU 211 (FIG. 1) calculates the GPS data, i.e., the currentgeographical location data by utilizing the method so-called GPS asdescribed hereinbefore (S2), and stores the GPS data in GPS Data StorageArea 20629 b 1 (Paragraph [0151]) (S3). CPU 211 then retrieves User Data20629UD from User Data Storage Area 20629 b 2 (Paragraph [0152]) and theGPS data from GPS Data Storage Area 20629 b 1 (Paragraph [0151]) (S4),and composes SOS Data 20629SOS therefrom (S5), which is sent thereafterto Host H (Paragraph [0025]) (S6).

Paragraph [0154]—This Paragraph [0154] illustrates the elements of SOSData 20629SOS (Paragraph [0153]). In this embodiment, SOS Data 20629SOScomprises Connection Request 20629CR, GPS Data 20629GD, and User Data20629UD. Connection Request 20629CR represents a request to Host H(Paragraph [0025]) to forward the 911 call to a police department. GPSData 20629GD is a data retrieved from GPS Data Storage Area 20629 b 1(Paragraph [0152]) as described in S4 of Paragraph [0153]. User Data20629UD is a data retrieved from User Data Storage Area 20629 b 2(Paragraph [0152]) as described in S4 of Paragraph [0153].

Paragraph [0155]—This Paragraph [0155] illustrates the software programstored in SOS Calling Software Storage Area H29 c (Paragraph [0145]) ofHost H (Paragraph [0025]). In this embodiment, Host H periodicallychecks the incoming call (S1). If the incoming call is SOS Data 20629SOS(Paragraph [0154]) (S2), Host H initiates the SOS calling process asdescribed in Paragraph [0156] (S3).

Paragraph [0156]—This Paragraph [0156] illustrates the software programstored in SOS Calling Software Storage Area H29 c (Paragraph [0145]) ofHost H (Paragraph [0025]). In this embodiment, Host H retrieves GPS Data20629GD from SOS Data 20629SOS (Paragraph [0154]) (S1), and selects theclosest police department by comparing GPS Data 20629GD and the datastored in column Location Data of Police Department Location DataStorage Area H29 b 1 (Paragraph [0147]) of Host H (S2). Host H thenretrieves the corresponding phone number stored in column Phone # andconnects the line between the corresponding police department andCommunication Device 200 in order to initiate a voice communicationtherebetween (S3). Host H forwards to the police department thereafterGPS Data 20629GD and User Data 20629UD retrieved in S1 (S4).

Paragraph [0157]—As another embodiment, User Data 20629UD stored in UserData Storage Area 20629 b 2 (Paragraph [0152]) may be stored in SOSCalling Data Storage Area H29 b (Paragraph [0145]) of Host H (Paragraph[0025]). In this embodiment, SOS Data 20629SOS (Paragraph [0153])primarily comprises Connection Request 20629CR and GPS Data 20629GD, andUser Data 20629UD is retrieved from SOS Calling Data Storage Area H29 bof Host H, which is sent to the police department in S4 of Paragraph[0156].

Paragraph [0158]—<<Game Vibrating Function>>

Paragraph [0159]—Paragraph [0160] through Paragraph [0162] illustratethe game vibrating function which vibrates Communication Device 200 whena predetermined condition is met while Communication Device 200 isexecuting a video game software program.

Paragraph [0160]—This Paragraph [0160] illustrates another embodiment ofthe software program stored in Game Software Storage Area 2061 d(Paragraph [0033]) to implement the shooting video game function (notshown). When hit program is initiated (i.e., when User Controlled ObjectUCO (not shown) is hit by CPU Fired Bullet CFB (not shown)), CPU 211(FIG. 1), first of all, activates Vibrator 217 (FIG. 1) (S1). Then CPU211 displays an explosion image on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) by reading thethree-dimensional data of CPU Fired Bullet CFB from 3D Object DataStorage Area 2061 e (Paragraph [0033]) and by ‘pasting’ the relevanttextures thereto stored in Texture Data Storage Area 2061 f (Paragraph[0033]) (S2). Next, CPU 211 erases the image of User Controlled ObjectUCO from LCD 201 (S3), and also the explosion image (S4), and CPU 211deactivates Vibrator 217 thereafter (S5).

Paragraph [0161]—This Paragraph [0161] illustrates another embodiment ofthe software program stored in Game Software Storage Area 2061 d(Paragraph [0033]) to implement the driving game function (not shown).In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) performs the user controlled carprocess (S1), the CPU controlled car process for all CPU Controlled CarCCCs (not shown) displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2), the street imageprocess (S3), and the background image process (S4). Further, CPU 211performs the vibrator controlling process which is described inParagraph [0162] (S5).

Paragraph [0162]—This Paragraph [0162] illustrates the vibratorcontrolling process described in S5 of Paragraph [0161]. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) periodically checks the position of UserControlled Car UCC (not shown) (S1). If User Controlled Car UCC is offthe street or driving on a street of a bad condition (S2), CPU 211activates Vibrator 217 (FIG. 1) (S3). For purposes of implementing thepresent function to driving video game, CPU 211 periodically checks theposition of User Controlled Car UCC. CPU 211 also periodically checksthe street condition by retrieving the data regarding the streetcondition from Street Parameter Storage Area 2061 g 2 (not shown).

Paragraph [0163]—<<Digital Camera Function>>

Paragraph [0164]—Paragraph [0165] through Paragraph [0184] illustratethe digital camera function which enables Communication Device 200 totake digital photos by utilizing CCD Unit 214 (FIG. 1).

Paragraph [0165]—This Paragraph [0165] illustrates the storage areaincluded in RAM 206 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, RAM 206 includesDigital Camera Information Storage Area 20646 a of which the data andthe software programs stored therein are described in Paragraph [0167].

Paragraph [0166]—The data and software programs stored in Digital CameraInformation Storage Area 20646 a (Paragraph [0165]) may be downloadedfrom Host H (Paragraph [0025]).

Paragraph [0167]—This Paragraph [0167] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Digital Camera Information Storage Area 20646 a (Paragraph[0165]). In this embodiment, Digital Camera Information Storage Area20646 a includes Digital Camera Data Storage Area 20646 b and DigitalCamera Software Storage Area 20646 c. Digital Camera Data Storage Area20646 b stores the data necessary to implement the present function,such as the ones described in Paragraph through Paragraph [0170].Digital Camera Software Storage Area 20646 c stores the softwareprograms necessary to implement the present function, such as the onesdescribed in Paragraph [0171].

Paragraph [0168]—This Paragraph [0168] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Digital Camera Data Storage Area 20646 b (Paragraph [0167]).In this embodiment, Digital Camera Data Storage Area 20646 b includesPhoto Data Storage Area 20646 b 1 and Digital Camera Function DataStorage Area 20646 b 2. Photo Data Storage Area 20646 b 1 stores thedata described in Paragraph [0169]. Digital Camera Function Data StorageArea 20646 b 2 stores the data stored in Paragraph [0170].

Paragraph [0169]—This Paragraph [0169] illustrates the data stored inPhoto Data Storage Area 20646 b 1 (Paragraph [0168]). In thisembodiment, Photo Data Storage Area 20646 b 1 comprises two columns,i.e., ‘Photo ID’ and ‘Photo Data’. Column ‘Photo ID’ stores theidentifications of the photo data, and column ‘Photo Data’ stores aplurality of photo data taken by implementing the present function. Inthis embodiment, Photo Data Storage Area 20646 b 1 stores the followingdata: ‘Photo ID’ Photo #1 of which the ‘Photo Data’ is 46PD1; ‘Photo ID’Photo #2 of which the ‘Photo Data’ is 46PD2; ‘Photo ID’ Photo #3 ofwhich the ‘Photo Data’ is 46PD3; ‘Photo ID’ Photo #4 of which the ‘PhotoData’ is 46PD4; and ‘Photo ID’ Photo #5 of which the ‘Photo Data’ is46PD5.

Paragraph [0170]—This Paragraph [0170] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Digital Camera Function Data Storage Area 20646 b 2(Paragraph [0168]). In this embodiment, Digital Camera Function DataStorage Area 20646 b 2 includes Quality Data Storage Area 20646 b 2 a,Multiple Photo Shooting Number Data Storage Area 20646 b 2 b, and StrobeData Storage Area 20646 b 2 c. Quality Data Storage Area 20646 b 2 astores the data selected in S2 of Paragraph [0173]. Multiple PhotoShooting Number Data Storage Area 20646 b 2 b stores the data selectedin S2 of Paragraph [0174]. Strobe Data Storage Area 20646 b 2 c storesthe data selected in S2 of Paragraph [0175].

Paragraph [0171]—This Paragraph [0171] illustrates the software programsstored in Digital Camera Software Storage Area 20646 c (Paragraph[0167]). In this embodiment, Digital Camera Software Storage Area 20646c stores Quality Selecting Software 20646 c 1, Multiple Photo ShootingSoftware 20646 c 2, Trimming Software 20646 c 3, Digital ZoomingSoftware 20646 c 4, Strobe Software 20646 c 5, Digital Camera FunctionSelecting Software 20646 c 6, Multiple Photo Shooting Number SelectingSoftware 20646 c 7, Strobe On/Off Selecting Software 20646 c 8, PhotoData Shooting Software 20646 c 9, and Multiple Photo Shooting Software20646 c 10. Quality Selecting Software 20646 c 1 is the software programdescribed in Paragraph [0173]. Multiple Photo Shooting Software 20646 c2 is the software program described in Paragraph [0177]. TrimmingSoftware 20646 c 3 is the software program described in Paragraph[0184]. Digital Zooming Software 20646 c 4 is the software programdescribed in Paragraph [0181]. Strobe Software 20646 c 5 is the softwareprogram described in Paragraph [0178]. Digital Camera Function SelectingSoftware 20646 c 6 is the software program described in Paragraph[0172]. Multiple Photo Shooting Number Selecting Software 20646 c 7 isthe software program described in Paragraph [0174]. Strobe On/OffSelecting Software 20646 c 8 is the software program described inParagraph [0175]. Photo Data Shooting Software 20646 c 9 is the softwareprogram described in Paragraph [0176].

Paragraph [0172]—This Paragraph [0172] illustrates Digital CameraFunction Selecting Software 20646 c 6 stored in Digital Camera SoftwareStorage Area 20646 c (Paragraph [0171]) which administers the overallflow of displaying the functions and selecting the option for eachfunction. In this embodiment, a list of functions is displayed on LCD201 (FIG. 1) (S1). The items displayed on LCD 201 are ‘Quality’,‘Multiple Photo’, and ‘Strobe’. A function is selected by utilizingInput Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S2), and therelevant software program is activated thereafter (S3). In the presentembodiment, Quality Selecting Software 20646 c 1 described in Paragraph[0173] is activated when ‘Quality’ displayed on LCD 201 is selected inS2. Multiple Photo Shooting Number Selecting Software 20646 c 7described in Paragraph [0174] is activated when ‘Multiple Photo’ isselected in S2. Strobe On/Off Selecting Software 20646 c 8 described inParagraph [0175] is activated when ‘Strobe’ is selected in S2.

Paragraph [0173]—This Paragraph [0173] illustrates Quality SelectingSoftware 20646 c 1 stored in Digital Camera Software Storage Area 20646c (Paragraph [0171]) which selects the quality of the photo data takenby implementing the present function. In this embodiment, a list ofoptions is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). The options displayed onLCD 201 are ‘High’, ‘STD’, and ‘Low’ in the present embodiment. One ofthe options is selected by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or viavoice recognition system (S2). The resolution of the photo data taken ishigh if ‘High’ is selected; the resolution of the photo taken isstandard if ‘STD’ is selected; and the resolution of the photo taken islow if ‘Low’ is selected. The selected option is stored as the qualitydata in Quality Data Storage Area 20646 b 2 a (Paragraph [0170]) (S3).

Paragraph [0174]—This Paragraph [0174] illustrates Multiple PhotoShooting Number Selecting Software 20646 c 7 stored in Digital CameraSoftware Storage Area 20646 c (Paragraph [0171]) which selects thenumber of photos taken by a single photo shooting signal. In thisembodiment, a list of options is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). Theoptions displayed on LCD 201 are figures from ‘1’ through ‘10’. Only onephoto is taken by a photo shooting signal if ‘1’ is selected; two photosare taken by a photo shooting signal if ‘2’ is selected; three photosare taken by a photo shooting signal if ‘3’ is selected; four photos aretaken by a photo shooting signal if ‘4’ is selected; five photos aretaken by a photo shooting signal if ‘5’ is selected; six photos aretaken by a photo shooting signal if ‘6’ is selected; seven photos aretaken by a photo shooting signal if ‘7’ is selected; eight photos aretaken by a photo shooting signal if ‘8’ is selected; nine photos aretaken by a photo shooting signal if ‘9’ is selected; and ten photos aretaken by a photo shooting signal if ‘10’ is selected. A digit from ‘1’through ‘10’ is selected by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or viavoice recognition system (S2). The selected digital is stored as themultiple photo shooting number data in Multiple Photo Shooting NumberData Storage Area 20646 b 2 b (Paragraph [0170]) (S3).

Paragraph [0175]—This Paragraph [0175] illustrates Strobe On/OffSelecting Software 20646 c 8 stored in Digital Camera Software StorageArea 20646 c (Paragraph [0171]) which selects Flash Light Unit 220 (notshown) to be activated or not when a photo is taken. In this embodiment,a list of options is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). The optionsdisplayed on LCD 201 are ‘On’ and ‘Off’. Flash Light Unit 220 isactivated at the time photo is taken if ‘On’ is selected; and FlashLight Unit 220 is not activated at the time photo is taken if ‘Off’ isselected. One of the two options is selected by utilizing Input Device210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S2). The selected optionis stored as the strobe data in Strobe Data Storage Area 20646 b 2 c(Paragraph [0170]) (S3).

Paragraph [0176]—This Paragraph [0176] illustrates Photo Data ShootingSoftware 20646 c 9 stored in Digital Camera Software Storage Area 20646c (Paragraph [0171]) which takes photo(s) in accordance with the optionsselected in Paragraph [0173]. In this embodiment, a photo shootingsignal is input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system (S1). Here, the photo shooting signal indicates CPU211 (FIG. 1) to input photo data to CCD Unit 214 (FIG. 1) and store thedata in Photo Data Storage Area 20646 b 1 (Paragraph [0169]). CPU 211then retrieves the quality data from Quality Data Storage Area 20646 b 2a (Paragraph [0170]) (S2). The photo data is input via CCD Unit 214(S3), and the data is stored in Photo Data Storage Area 20646 b 1(Paragraph [0169]) with new photo ID in accordance with the quality dataretrieved in S2 (S4).

Paragraph [0177]—This Paragraph [0177] illustrates Multiple PhotoShooting Software 20646 c 2 stored in Digital Camera Software StorageArea 20646 c (Paragraph [0171]) which takes photo(s) in accordance withthe options selected in Paragraph [0174]. In this embodiment, a photoshooting signal is input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or viavoice recognition system (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) retrieves the multiplephoto shooting number data from Multiple Photo Shooting Number DataStorage Area 20646 b 2 b (Paragraph [0170]) (S2). CPU 211 then takesphotos in accordance with the multiple photo shooting number dataretrieved in S2 (S3). Namely, only one photo is taken by a photoshooting signal if the multiple photo shooting number data retrieved inS2 is ‘1’; two photos are taken by a photo shooting signal if themultiple photo shooting number data retrieved in S2 is ‘2’; three photosare taken by a photo shooting signal if the multiple photo shootingnumber data retrieved in S2 is ‘3’; four photos are taken by a photoshooting signal if the multiple photo shooting number data retrieved inS2 is ‘4’; five photos are taken by a photo shooting signal if themultiple photo shooting number data retrieved in S2 is ‘5’; six photosare taken by a photo shooting signal if the multiple photo shootingnumber data retrieved in S2 is ‘6’; seven photos are taken by a photoshooting signal if the multiple photo shooting number data retrieved inS2 is ‘7’; eight photos are taken by a photo shooting signal if themultiple photo shooting number data retrieved in S2 is ‘8’; nine photosare taken by a photo shooting signal if the multiple photo shootingnumber data retrieved in S2 is ‘9’; and ten photos are taken by a photoshooting signal if the multiple photo shooting number data retrieved inS2 is ‘10’.

Paragraph [0178]—This Paragraph [0178] illustrates Strobe Software 20646c 5 stored in Digital Camera Software Storage Area 20646 c (Paragraph[0171]) which takes photo(s) in accordance with the options selected inParagraph [0175]. In this embodiment, a photo shooting signal is inputby utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system(S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) retrieves the strobe data from Strobe DataStorage Area 20646 b 2 c (Paragraph [0170]) (S2). If the strobe data is‘On’ (S3), CPU 211 activates Flash Light Unit 220 (not shown) each timea photo is taken (S4). In other words, Strobe Software 20646 c 5 isharmonized with Multiple Photo Shooting Software 20646 c 2 described inParagraph [0177]. Namely, Flash Light Unit 220 is activated for one timeif one photo is taken by a single photo shooting signal. Flash LightUnit 220 is activated for two times if two photos are taken by a singlephoto shooting signal. Flash Light Unit 220 is activated for three timesif three photos are taken by a single photo shooting signal. Flash LightUnit 220 is activated for four times if four photos are taken by asingle photo shooting signal. Flash Light Unit 220 is activated for fivetimes if five photos are taken by a single photo shooting signal. FlashLight Unit 220 is activated for six times if six photos are taken by asingle photo shooting signal. Flash Light Unit 220 is activated forseven times if seven photos are taken by a single photo shooting signal.Flash Light Unit 220 is activated for eight times if eight photos aretaken by a single photo shooting signal. Flash Light Unit 220 isactivated for nine times if nine photos are taken by a single photoshooting signal. Flash Light Unit 220 is activated for ten times if tenphotos are taken by a single photo shooting signal.

Paragraph [0179]—This Paragraph [0179] illustrates one embodiment of thezooming function which zooms the photo data stored in Photo Data StorageArea 20646 b 1 (Paragraph [0169]). In this embodiment, a certain photoselected by the user of Communication Device 200 is displayed on LCD 201(FIG. 1). Assuming that the user intends to zoom Object 20646Obj, theobject displayed on LCD 201, to a larger size. The user selects Area46ARa which includes Object 20646Obj by utilizing Input Device 210(FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system, and the selected area iszoomed to fit the size of LCD 201. The zoomed photo is replaced with theoriginal photo.

Paragraph [0180]—This Paragraph [0180] illustrates the operationperformed in RAM 206 (FIG. 1) to implement the zooming functiondescribed in Paragraph [0179]. A certain photo data selected by the userof Communication Device 200 is stored in Area 20646ARa of RAM 206. Here,the size of the photo data is as same as that of Area 20646ARa. In thisembodiment, Display Area 20646DA is the area which is displayed on LCD201 (FIG. 1). Area 46ARa is the area which is selected by the user ofCommunication Device 200. Object 20646Obj is the object included in thephoto data. Area 46ARa which includes Object 20646Obj is selected byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system, andthe photo data stored in Area 20646ARa is zoomed to the size in whichthe size of Area 46ARa equals to that of Display Area 20646DA. Thezoomed photo data is replaced with the original photo data and stored inPhoto Data Storage Area 20646 b 1 (Paragraph [0169]). The portion of thephoto data which does not fit Area 20646ARa is cropped.

Paragraph [0181]—This Paragraph [0181] illustrates Digital ZoomingSoftware 20646 c 4 stored in Digital Camera Software Storage Area 20646c (Paragraph [0171]) which implements the operation described inParagraph [0180]. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) displays a listof the photo IDs representing the photo data stored in Photo DataStorage Area 20646 b 1 (Paragraph [0169]) as well as the thumbnails(S1). A certain photo data is selected by utilizing Input Device 210(FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S2), and the selected photodata is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) as described in Paragraph [0179](S3). Area 46ARa described in Paragraph [0179] is selected by utilizingInput Device 210 or via voice recognition system (S4). When a zoomingsignal is input by utilizing Input Device 210 or via voice recognitionsystem (S5), CPU 211 (FIG. 1) implements the process described inParagraph [0180] and replaces the original photo data with the zoomedphoto data, which is stored in Photo Data Storage Area 20646 b 1(Paragraph [0169]) (S6).

Paragraph [0182]—This Paragraph [0182] illustrates one embodiment of thetrimming function which trims the photo data stored in Photo DataStorage Area 20646 b 1 (Paragraph [0169]) and thereby moves the selectedobject to the center of the photo data. In this embodiment, a certainphoto selected by the user of Communication Device 200 is displayed onLCD 201 (FIG. 1). Point 20646PTa adjacent to Object 20646Obj is selectedby utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system,and the photo is centered at Point 20646PTa. The trimmed photo isreplaced with the original photo.

Paragraph [0183]—This Paragraph [0183] illustrates the operationperformed in RAM 206 (FIG. 1) to implement the trimming functiondescribed in Paragraph [0182]. In this embodiment, Display Area 20646DAis the portion of the photo data which is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1).Object 20646Obj is the object included in the photo data. Point 20646PTais the point selected by the user of Communication Device 200 adjacentto Object 20646Obj which is centered by the present function. In thisembodiment, a certain photo data selected by the user of CommunicationDevice 200 is stored in Area 20646ARb of RAM 206. Here, the size of thephoto data is as same as that of Area 20646ARb. Point 20646PTa isselected by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognitionsystem, and the photo data is centered at Point 20646PTa by sliding theentire photo data to the right. The trimmed photo data is replaced withthe original photo data and stored in Photo Data Storage Area 20646 b 1(Paragraph [0169]). The portion of the photo data which does not fitArea 20646ARa is cropped.

Paragraph [0184]—This Paragraph [0184] illustrates Trimming Software20646 c 3 stored in Digital Camera Software Storage Area 20646 c(Paragraph [0171]) which implements the operation described in Paragraph[0183]. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) displays a list of thephoto IDs representing the photo data stored in Photo Data Storage Area20646 b 1 (Paragraph [0169]) as well as the thumbnails (S1). A certainphoto data is selected by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or viavoice recognition system (S2), and the selected photo data is displayedon LCD 201 (FIG. 1) as described in Paragraph [0182] (S3). Point20646PTa described in Paragraph [0182] is selected by utilizing InputDevice 210 or via voice recognition system (S4). When a trimming signalis input by utilizing Input Device 210 or via voice recognition system(S5), CPU 211 (FIG. 1) centers the photo data at Point 20646PTa (notshown) and replaces the original photo data with the trimmed photo data,which is stored in Photo Data Storage Area 20646 b 1 (Paragraph [0169])(S6).

Paragraph [0185]—<<Multiple Window Displaying Function>>

Paragraph [0186]—Paragraph [0187] through Paragraph [0200] illustratethe multiple window displaying function which displays a plurality ofwindows on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200.

Paragraph [0187]—This Paragraph [0187] illustrates the concept of thepresent function. In this embodiment, the display area of LCD 201(FIG. 1) is primarily composed of two display areas, i.e., WindowsDisplay Area 20148WDA and Task Bar 20148TB. Windows Display Area20148WDA is the display area where a plurality of windows are displayed.Task Bar 20148TB is the display area located on the lower part of LCD201 (FIG. 1) where the icons corresponding to the windows displayed inWindows Display Area 20148WDA are displayed. In this embodiment, twowindows area displayed in Windows Display Area 20148WDA, i.e., Window Aand Window B. In this embodiment, Window A is displayed on top of WindowB which means that Window A has priority over Window B. Two icons, i.e.,Icon A which corresponds to Window A and Icon B are which corresponds toWindow B are displayed in Task Bar 20148TB.

Paragraph [0188]—This Paragraph [0188] illustrates the storage areaincluded in RAM 206 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, RAM 206 includesMultiple Window Displaying Information Storage Area 20648 a of which thedata and the software programs stored therein are described in Paragraph[0190].

Paragraph [0189]—The data and/or the software programs stored inMultiple Window Displaying Information Storage Area 20648 a (Paragraph[0188]) may be downloaded from Host H (Paragraph [0025]).

Paragraph [0190]—This Paragraph [0190] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Multiple Window Displaying Information Storage Area 20648 a(Paragraph [0188]). In this embodiment, Multiple Window DisplayingInformation Storage Area 20648 a includes Multiple Window DisplayingData Storage Area 20648 b and Multiple Window Displaying SoftwareStorage Area 20648 c. Multiple Window Displaying Data Storage Area 20648b stores the data necessary to implement the present function, such asthe ones described in Paragraph [0191] through Paragraph [0193].Multiple Window Displaying Software Storage Area 20648 c stores thesoftware programs necessary to implement the present function, such asthe ones described in Paragraph [0195].

Paragraph [0191]—This Paragraph [0191] illustrates the storage areaincluded in Multiple Window Displaying Data Storage Area 20648 b(Paragraph [0190]). In this embodiment, Multiple Window Displaying DataStorage Area 20648 b includes Window Data Storage Area 20648 b 1 whichis further explained in Paragraph [0192] and Paragraph [0193].

Paragraph [0192]—This Paragraph [0192] illustrates the method toidentify the location and the size of each window display in WindowsDisplay Area 20148WDA (Paragraph [0187]). In this embodiment, Base Point20148BP is the point of the upper-left corner of Windows Display Area20148WDA (Paragraph [0187]). Reference Point 20148RP is the point of theupper-left corner of each window displayed in Windows Display Area20148WDA. The location of Reference Point 20148RP in Windows DisplayArea 20148WDAis identified based on the distance from Base Point 20148BPin ‘x cm, y cm’ format. The size of each window is identified by thewidth and the height in centimeters.

Paragraph [0193]—This Paragraph [0193] illustrates the data stored inWindow Data Storage Area 20648 b 1 (Paragraph [0191]). In thisembodiment, Window Data Storage Area 20648 b 1 comprises six columns,i.e., ‘Window ID’, ‘Reference Point Data’, ‘Width Data’, ‘Height Data’,‘Priority Data’, and ‘Icon ID’. Column ‘Window ID’ stores theidentifications of the window data. Column ‘Reference Point Data’ storesReference Point 20148RP (Paragraph [0192]) of each window displayed inWindows Display Area 20148WDA (Paragraph [0192]). Column ‘Width Data’stores the width of each window in centimeters. Column ‘Height Data’stores the height of each window in centimeters. Column ‘Priority Data’stores the priority of each window displayed in Windows Display Area20148WDA. Column ‘Icon ID’ stores the identifications of the iconsdisplayed in Task Bar 20148TB (Paragraph [0187]). In this embodiment,the following data area stored in Window Data Storage Area 20648 b 1:the ‘Window ID’ Window #1′ of which the ‘Reference Point Data’, the‘Width Data’, the ‘Height Data’, the ‘Priority Data’, and the ‘Icon ID’are ‘2 cm, 3 cm’, ‘5 cm’, ‘2 cm’, ‘Priority #4’, and ‘Icon #1’; the‘Window ID’ ‘Window #2’ of which the ‘Reference Point Data’, the ‘WidthData’, the ‘Height Data’, the ‘Priority Data’, and the ‘Icon ID’ are ‘1cm, 2 cm’, ‘4 cm’, ‘4 cm’, ‘Priority #3’, and ‘Icon #2’; the ‘Window ID’‘Window #3’ of which the ‘Reference Point Data’, the ‘Width Data’, the‘Height Data’, the ‘Priority Data’, and the ‘Icon ID’ are ‘1 cm, 2 cm’,‘5 cm’, ‘6 cm’, ‘Priority #2’, and ‘Icon #3’; and the ‘Window ID’‘Window #4’ of which the ‘Reference Point Data’, the ‘Width Data’, the‘Height Data’, the ‘Priority Data’, and the ‘Icon ID’ are ‘2 cm, 3 cm’,‘4 cm’, ‘5 cm’, ‘Priority #1’, and ‘Icon #4’.

Paragraph [0194]—Referring to the ‘Priority Data’, ‘Window #4’ has thehighest priority over the rest of the windows in being displayed inWindows Display Area 20148WDA (i.e., ‘Priority #1’), ‘Window #3’ has thepriority over ‘Window #2’ and ‘Window #1’ in being displayed in WindowsDisplay Area 20148WDA (i.e., ‘Priority #2’), ‘Window #2’ has thepriority over ‘Window #1’ in being displayed in Windows Display Area20148WDA (i.e., ‘Priority #3’), and ‘Window #1’ has the lowest priorityover the rest of the windows in being displayed in Windows Display Area20148WDA (i.e., ‘Priority #4’).

Paragraph [0195]—This Paragraph [0195] illustrates the software programsstored in Multiple Window Displaying Software Storage Area 20648 c(Paragraph [0190]). In this embodiment, Multiple Window DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20648 c stores Window Generating Software 20648 c1, Window Closing Software 20648 c 2, Window Size Changing Software20648 c 3, Window Size Minimizing Software 20648 c 4, and Window SizeRestoring Software 20648 c 5. Window Generating Software 20648 c 1 isthe software program described in Paragraph [0196]. Window ClosingSoftware 20648 c 2 is the software program described in Paragraph[0197]. Window Size Changing Software 20648 c 3 is the software programdescribed in Paragraph [0198]. Window Size Minimizing Software 20648 c 4is the software program described in Paragraph [0199]. Window SizeRestoring Software 20648 c 5 is the software program described inParagraph [0200].

Paragraph [0196]—This Paragraph [0196] illustrates Window OpeningSoftware 20648 c 1 stored in Multiple Window Displaying Software StorageArea 20648 c (Paragraph [0195]) which opens a new window in WindowsDisplay Area 20148WDA (Paragraph [0187]) when a new software program(e.g., MS Word, MS Excel, MS Access, calculator, back-up softwareprogram, Windows Explorer, Outlook Express, image viewer, and InternetExplorer) is executed. In this embodiment, when a software program isexecuted (S1), CPU 211 (FIG. 1) generates a new window data (S2). Thesize (i.e., the width and the height thereof) may be of the defaultsettings. CPU 211 adds a new Window ID in Window Data Storage Area 20648b 1 (Paragraph [0193]) for the new window data (S3). CPU 211 furthersets the highest ‘Priority Data’ (i.e., ‘Priority #1’) for the newwindow (S4), and stores the new window data generated in S2 as well asthe ‘Priority Data’ set in S4 in Window Data Storage Area 20648 b 1(S5). CPU 211 updates the ‘Priority Data’ of the other windowsaccordingly, i.e., the ‘Priority Data’ of the other windows are shiftedto the one rank lower one and stores the updated ‘Priority Data’ inWindow Data Storage Area 20648 b 1 (S6). CPU 211 displays the new windowin Windows Display Area 20148WDA (Paragraph [0187]) (S7) and the newicon on Task Bar 20148TB (Paragraph [0187]) (S8).

Paragraph [0197]—This Paragraph [0197] illustrates Window ClosingSoftware 20648 c 2 stored in Multiple Window Displaying Software StorageArea 20648 c (Paragraph [0195]) which closes the window displayed inWindows Display Area 20148WDA (Paragraph [0187]) when the correspondingsoftware program is terminated. In this embodiment, when a softwareprogram is terminated (S1), CPU 211 (FIG. 1) deletes the correspondingwindow data from Window Data Storage Area 20648 b 1 (Paragraph [0193])(S2). CPU 211 then closes the corresponding window displayed on WindowsDisplay Area 20148WDA (Paragraph [0187]) (S3) and erases thecorresponding icon from Task Bar 20148TB (Paragraph [0187]) (S4). CPU211 updates the ‘Priority Data’ of the other windows accordingly, i.e.,the ‘Priority Data’ of the other windows are shifted to the one rankhigher one and stores the updated ‘Priority Data’ in Window Data StorageArea 20648 b 1 (S5).

Paragraph [0198]—This Paragraph [0198] illustrates Window Size ChangingSoftware 20648 c 3 stored in Multiple Window Displaying Software StorageArea 20648 c (Paragraph [0195]) which changes the size of the windowdisplayed in Windows Display Area 20148WDA (Paragraph [0187]). In thisembodiment, a certain window is selected by utilizing Input Device 210(FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). A window size changingsignal which indicates to change the size of the window displayed inWindows Display Area 20148WDA is input in the same manner (S2). CPU 211(FIG. 1), by identifying the information contained in the window sizechanging signal, updates and stores the renewed window data (with new‘Reference Point Data’, ‘Width Data’, and ‘Height Data’) in Window DataStorage Area 20648 b 1 (Paragraph [0193]) (S3). The window with therenewed size is displayed in Windows Display Area 20148WDA thereafer(S4).

Paragraph [0199]—This Paragraph [0199] illustrates Window SizeMinimizing Software 20648 c 4 stored in Multiple Window DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20648 c (Paragraph [0195]) which minimizes thesize of the window to zero displayed in Windows Display Area 20148WDA(Paragraph [0187]). In this embodiment, a certain window is selected byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system(S1). A window size minimizing signal which indicates to minimize thesize of the window displayed in Windows Display Area 20148WDA is inputin the same manner (S2). The window data of the corresponding windowremains unchanged except the ‘Priority Data’. The ‘Priority Data’ of theminimized window is shifted to the lowest one (S3). CPU 211 (FIG. 1)updates the ‘Priority Data’ of the other windows accordingly, i.e., the‘Priority Data’ of the other windows are shifted to the one rank higherone and stores the updated ‘Priority Data’ in Window Data Storage Area20648 b 1 (Paragraph [0193]) (S4). The size of the window displayed inWindows Display Area 20148WDA is minimized thereafter (S5).

Paragraph [0200]—This Paragraph [0200] illustrates Window Size RestoringSoftware 20648 c 5 stored in Multiple Window Displaying Software StorageArea 20648 c (Paragraph [0195]) which restores the size of the windowminimized by Window Size Minimizing Software 20648 c 4 (Paragraph[0199]) to its original size. In this embodiment, a certain window isselected by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognitionsystem (S1). A window size restoring signal which indicates to restorethe size of the window displayed in Windows Display Area 20148WDA isinput in the same manner (S2). CPU 211 (FIG. 1), by identifying theinformation contained in the window size restoring signal, retrieves thewindow data (i.e., ‘Reference Point Data’, ‘Width Data’, and ‘HeightData’) from Window Data Storage Area 20648 b 1 (Paragraph [0193]) (S3).CPU 211 sets the highest ‘Priority Data’ (i.e., ‘Priority #1’) for therestored window (S4), and stores the data in Window Data Storage Area20648 b 1 (S4). CPU 211 further updates the ‘Priority Data’ of the otherwindows accordingly, i.e., the ‘Priority Data’ of the other windows areshifted to the one rank lower one and stores the updated ‘Priority Data’in Window Data Storage Area 20648 b 1 (S5). The window size is restoredthereafter (S6).

Paragraph [0201]—<<Mouse Pointer Displaying Function>>

Paragraph [0202]—Paragraph [0203] through Paragraph [0231] illustratethe mouse pointer displaying function which displays on LCD 201 (FIG. 1)of Communication Device 200 a mouse pointer which is manipulated by theuser of Communication Device 200. The mouse pointer is primarilyutilized to select, open, close, drag & drop files, and its image issimilar to the one displayed on ordinary personal computers.

Paragraph [0203]—This Paragraph [0203] illustrates the storage areaincluded in RAM 206 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, RAM 206 includes MousePointer Displaying Information Storage Area 20649 a of which the dataand the software programs stored therein are described in Paragraph[0205].

Paragraph [0204]—The data and/or the software programs stored in MousePointer Displaying Information Storage Area 20649 a (Paragraph [0203])may be downloaded from Host H (Paragraph [0025]).

Paragraph [0205]—This Paragraph [0205] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Mouse Pointer Displaying Information Storage Area 20649 a(Paragraph [0203]). In this embodiment, Mouse Pointer DisplayingInformation Storage Area 20649 a includes Mouse Pointer Displaying DataStorage Area 20649 b and Mouse Pointer Displaying Software Storage Area20649 c. Mouse Pointer Displaying Data Storage Area 20649 b stores thedata necessary to implement the present function, such as the onesdescribed in Paragraph [0206] through Paragraph [0208]. Mouse PointerDisplaying Software Storage Area 20649 c stores the software programsnecessary to implement the present function, such as the ones describedin Paragraph [0209].

Paragraph [0206]—This Paragraph [0206] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Mouse Pointer Displaying Data Storage Area 20649 b(Paragraph [0205]). In this embodiment, Mouse Pointer Displaying DataStorage Area 20649 b includes Mouse Pointer Image Data Storage Area20649 b 1 and Current Pointer Data Storage Area 20649 b 2. Mouse PointerImage Data Storage Area 20649 b 1 stores the data described in Paragraph[0207]. Current Pointer Data Storage Area 20649 b 2 stores the datadescribed in Paragraph [0208].

Paragraph [0207]—This Paragraph [0207] illustrates the data stored inMouse Pointer Image Data Storage Area 20649 b 1 (Paragraph [0206]). Inthis embodiment, Mouse Pointer Image Data Storage Area 20649 b 1comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Pointer ID’ and ‘Pointer Image Data’.

Column ‘Pointer ID’ stores the pointer IDs, i.e., the identifications ofthe pointer image data stored in column ‘Pointer Image Data’, and column‘Pointer Image Data’ stores the pointer image data designed to bedisplayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1). The pointer image data stored in column‘Pointer Image Data’ in the present example are the following: PointerImage Data #1 which is a small white arrow, Pointer Image Data #2 whichis a large white arrow, Pointer Image Data #3 which is a small blackarrow, and Pointer Image Data #4 which is a large black arrow. Pointer#1 is the identification of Pointer Image Data #1, Pointer #2 is theidentification of Pointer Image Data #2, Pointer #3 is theidentification of Pointer Image Data #3, and Pointer #4 is theidentification of Pointer Image Data #4.

Paragraph [0208]—This Paragraph [0208] illustrates the data stored inCurrent Pointer Data Storage Area 20649 b 2 (Paragraph [0206]). In thisembodiment, Current Pointer Data Storage Area 20649 b 2 comprises twocolumns, i.e., ‘Selected Pointer ID’ and ‘Current Location Data’.‘Selected Pointer ID’ stores the pointer IDs of the pointer image dataselected in S3 of Paragraph [0210]. Column ‘Current Location Data’stores the current location data which represents the location of themouse pointer displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1). The current location datais stored in (x cm, y cm) format wherein ‘x cm’ represents the distancefrom the base point located on the upper left corner (not shown) of LCD201 on x axis in centimeters, and ‘y cm’ represents the distance fromthe base point on y axis in centimeters. In this embodiment, the pointerID ‘Pointer #1’ is stored in column ‘Selected Pointer ID’ and thecurrent location data (2 cm, 3 cm) is stored in column ‘Current LocationData’. In this embodiment, Pointer Image Data #1 (i.e., a small whitearrow) of which the pointer ID is ‘Pointer #1’ is displayed on LCD 201at the location of 2 cm from the base point on x axis and 3 cm from thebase point on y axis.

Paragraph [0209]—This Paragraph [0209] illustrates the software programsstored in Mouse Pointer Displaying Software Storage Area 20649 c(Paragraph [0205]). In this embodiment, Mouse Pointer DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20649 c stores Mouse Pointer Image Data SelectingSoftware 20649 c 1, Mouse Pointer Moving Software 20649 c 2, MousePointer Displaying Software 20649 c 3, VRS Pointer Moving SignalProducing Software 20649 c 4, Keypad Pointer Moving Signal ProducingSoftware 20649 c 5, Joystick Pointer Moving Signal Producing Software20649 c 6, and ETS Pointer Moving Signal Producing Software 20649 c 7.Mouse Pointer Image Data Selecting Software 20649 c 1 is the softwareprogram described in Paragraph [0210]. Mouse Pointer Moving Software20649 c 2 is the software program described in Paragraph [0211]. MousePointer Displaying Software 20649 c 3 is the software program describedin Paragraph [0212]. VRS Pointer Moving Signal Producing Software 20649c 4 is the software program described in Paragraph [0214] throughParagraph [0217]. Keypad Pointer Moving Signal Producing Software 20649c 5 is the software program described in Paragraph [0218] throughParagraph [0221]. Joystick Pointer Moving Signal Producing Software20649 c 6 is the software program described in Paragraph [0222] throughParagraph [0225]. ETS Pointer Moving Signal Producing Software 20649 c 7is the software program described in Paragraph [0226] through Paragraph[0230].

Paragraph [0210]—This Paragraph [0210] illustrates Mouse Pointer ImageData Selecting Software 20649 c 1 stored in Mouse Pointer DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20649 c (Paragraph [0209]) which selects the mousepointer image data from a list displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1). In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) retrieves all pointer image data from MousePointer Image Data Storage Area 20649 b 1 (Paragraph [0207]) (S1) anddisplays a list thereof on LCD 201 (S2). A mouse pointer image data isselected from the list by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or viavoice recognition system (S3), and CPU 211 stores the correspondingpointer ID in column ‘Selected Pointer ID’ of Current Pointer DataStorage Area 20649 b 2 (Paragraph [0208]) (S4).

Paragraph [0211]—This Paragraph [0211] illustrates Mouse Pointer MovingSoftware 20649 c 2 stored in Mouse Pointer Displaying Software StorageArea 20649 c (Paragraph [0209]) which updates the current location datastored in Current Pointer Data Storage Area 20649 b 2 (Paragraph [0208])when mouse pointer moving signal is input. In this embodiment, a mousepointer moving signal indicating to move the mouse pointer displayed onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) to a new location is input by the method describedhereinafter (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) then calculates the new locationwhere the mouse pointer is to be displayed (S2), and stores the newcurrent location data in ‘Current Location Data’ of Current Pointer DataStorage Area 20649 b 2 (Paragraph [0208]) (S3).

Paragraph [0212]—This Paragraph [0212] illustrates Mouse PointerDisplaying Software 20649 c 3 stored in Mouse Pointer DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20649 c (Paragraph [0209]) which displays themouse pointer on LCD 201 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1)retrieves the pointer ID from column ‘Selected Pointer ID’ of CurrentPointer Data Storage Area 20649 b 2 (Paragraph [0208]) (S1). CPU 211then retrieves the corresponding pointer image data from Mouse PointerImage Data Storage Area 20649 b 1 (Paragraph [0207]) (S2). CPU 211further retrieves the current location data from column ‘CurrentLocation Data’ of Current Pointer Data Storage Area 20649 b 2 (Paragraph[0208]) (S3). Based on the data retrieved in S1 through S3, CPU 211displays the pointer image data on LCD 201 in accordance with thecurrent location data (S4).

Paragraph [0213]—The software programs described in Paragraph [0211] andParagraph [0212] are repeated periodically, preferably sixty times everysecond.

Paragraph [0214]—This Paragraph [0214] illustrates VRS Pointer MovingSignal Producing Software 20649 c 4 stored in Mouse Pointer DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20649 c (Paragraph [0209]) which produces themouse pointer moving signal described in S1 of Paragraph indicating tomove up the mouse pointer by utilizing the voice recognition systemdescribed hereinbefore. In this embodiment, a voice command ‘move up’ isinput via Microphone 215 (FIG. 1) (S1). In response to the voicecommand, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) produces the mouse pointer moving signalindicating to move up the mouse pointer (S2).

Paragraph [0215]—This Paragraph [0215] illustrates VRS Pointer MovingSignal Producing Software 20649 c 4 stored in Mouse Pointer DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20649 c (Paragraph [0209]) which produces themouse pointer moving signal described in S1 of Paragraph indicating tomove down the mouse pointer by utilizing the voice recognition systemdescribed hereinbefore. In this embodiment, a voice command ‘move down’is input via Microphone 215 (FIG. 1) (S1). In response to the voicecommand, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) produces the mouse pointer moving signalindicating to move down the mouse pointer (S2).

Paragraph [0216]—This Paragraph [0216] illustrates VRS Pointer MovingSignal Producing Software 20649 c 4 stored in Mouse Pointer DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20649 c (Paragraph [0209]) which produces themouse pointer moving signal described in S1 of Paragraph indicating tomove left the mouse pointer by utilizing the voice recognition systemdescribed hereinbefore. In this embodiment, a voice command ‘move left’is input via Microphone 215 (FIG. 1) (S1). In response to the voicecommand, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) produces the mouse pointer moving signalindicating to move left the mouse pointer (S2).

Paragraph [0217]—This Paragraph [0217] illustrates VRS Pointer MovingSignal Producing Software 20649 c 4 stored in Mouse Pointer DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20649 c (Paragraph [0209]) which produces themouse pointer moving signal described in S1 of Paragraph indicating tomove right the mouse pointer by utilizing the voice recognition systemdescribed hereinbefore. In this embodiment, a voice command ‘move right’is input via Microphone 215 (FIG. 1) (S1). In response to the voicecommand, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) produces the mouse pointer moving signalindicating to move right the mouse pointer (S2).

Paragraph [0218]—This Paragraph [0218] illustrates Keypad Pointer MovingSignal Producing Software 20649 c 5 stored in Mouse Pointer DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20649 c(Paragraph [0209]) which produces the mousepointer moving signal described in S1 of Paragraph indicating to move upthe mouse pointer by utilizing the keypad, i.e., Numeric Data InputDevice 21000 a (not shown). In this embodiment, numeric data ‘8’ isinput via keypad, i.e., Numeric Data Input Device 21000 a (not shown)(S1). In response to the input numeric data, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) producesthe mouse pointer moving signal indicating to move up the mouse pointer(S2).

Paragraph [0219]—This Paragraph [0219] illustrates Keypad Pointer MovingSignal Producing Software 20649 c 5 stored in Mouse Pointer DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20649 c (Paragraph [0209]) which produces themouse pointer moving signal described in S1 of Paragraph indicating tomove down the mouse pointer by utilizing the keypad, i.e., Numeric DataInput Device 21000 a (not shown). In this embodiment, numeric data ‘2’is input via keypad, i.e., Numeric Data Input Device 21000 a (not shown)(S1). In response to the input numeric data, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) producesthe mouse pointer moving signal indicating to move down the mousepointer (S2).

Paragraph [0220]—This Paragraph [0220] illustrates Keypad Pointer MovingSignal Producing Software 20649 c 5 stored in Mouse Pointer DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20649 c (Paragraph [0209]) which produces themouse pointer moving signal described in S1 of Paragraph indicating tomove left the mouse pointer by utilizing the keypad, i.e., Numeric DataInput Device 21000 a (not shown). In this embodiment, numeric data ‘4’is input via keypad, i.e., Numeric Data Input Device 21000 a (not shown)(S1). In response to the input numeric data, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) producesthe mouse pointer moving signal indicating to move left the mousepointer (S2).

Paragraph [0221]—This Paragraph [0221] illustrates Keypad Pointer MovingSignal Producing Software 20649 c 5 stored in Mouse Pointer DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20649 c (Paragraph [0209]) which produces themouse pointer moving signal described in S1 of Paragraph indicating tomove right the mouse pointer by utilizing the keypad, i.e., Numeric DataInput Device 21000 a (not shown). In this embodiment, numeric data ‘6’is input via keypad, i.e., Numeric Data Input Device 21000 a (not shown)(S1). In response to the input numeric data, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) producesthe mouse pointer moving signal indicating to move right the mousepointer (S2).

Paragraph [0222]—This Paragraph [0222] illustrates Joystick PointerMoving Signal Producing Software 20649 c 6 stored in Mouse PointerDisplaying Software Storage Area 20649 c (Paragraph [0209]) whichproduces the mouse pointer moving signal described in S1 of Paragraphindicating to move up the mouse pointer by utilizing Joystick 21000 d(not shown). In this embodiment, Joystick 21000 d is shifted up (S1). Inresponse thereto, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) produces the mouse pointer movingsignal indicating to move up the mouse pointer (S2).

Paragraph [0223]—This Paragraph [0223] illustrates Joystick PointerMoving Signal Producing Software 20649 c 6 stored in Mouse PointerDisplaying Software Storage Area 20649 c (Paragraph [0209]) whichproduces the mouse pointer moving signal described in S1 of Paragraphindicating to move down the mouse pointer by utilizing Joystick 21000 d(not shown). In this embodiment, Joystick 21000 d is shifted down (S1).In response thereto, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) produces the mouse pointer movingsignal indicating to move down the mouse pointer (S2).

Paragraph [0224]—This Paragraph [0224] illustrates Joystick PointerMoving Signal Producing Software 20649 c 6 stored in Mouse PointerDisplaying Software Storage Area 20649 c (Paragraph [0209]) whichproduces the mouse pointer moving signal described in S1 of Paragraphindicating to move left the mouse pointer by utilizing Joystick 21000 d(not shown). In this embodiment, Joystick 21000 d is shifted left (S1).In response thereto, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) produces the mouse pointer movingsignal indicating to move left the mouse pointer (S2).

Paragraph [0225]—This Paragraph [0225] illustrates Joystick PointerMoving Signal Producing Software 20649 c 6 stored in Mouse PointerDisplaying Software Storage Area 20649 c (Paragraph [0209]) whichproduces the mouse pointer moving signal described in S1 of Paragraphindicating to move right the mouse pointer by utilizing Joystick 21000 d(not shown). In this embodiment, Joystick 21000 d is shifted right (S1).In response thereto, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) produces the mouse pointer movingsignal indicating to move right the mouse pointer (S2).

Paragraph [0226]—This Paragraph [0226] illustrates ETS Pointer MovingSignal Producing Software 20649 c 7 stored in Mouse Pointer DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20649 c (Paragraph [0209]) which produces themouse pointer moving signal described in S1 of Paragraph indicating tomove up the mouse pointer by utilizing the eye tracking system. Here,the eye tracking system is a system to move the mouse pointer displayedon LCD 201 (FIG. 1) by utilizing the eye of the user of CommunicationDevice 200. By utilizing this system, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) periodicallymonitors the movement of the eyes of the user of Communication Device200, and the mouse pointer automatically moves to the location at whichhe/she is currently gazing. The mechanism of the eye tracking system isintroduced in the following inventions and the references cited thereof:U.S. Pat. No. 6,459,446; U.S. Pat. No. 6,394,602; U.S. Pat. No.6,381,339; U.S. Pat. No. 6,373,961; U.S. Pat. No. 6,359,601; U.S. Pat.No. 5,926,251; U.S. Pat. No. 5,861,940; U.S. Pat. No. 5,859,686; U.S.Pat. No. 5,638,176; U.S. Pat. No. 5,635,947; U.S. Pat. No. 5,583,335;U.S. Pat. No. 5,491,492; U.S. Pat. No. 5,481,622; U.S. Pat. No.5,430,505; U.S. Pat. No. 5,410,376; U.S. Pat. No. 5,345,281; U.S. Pat.No. 5,331,149; U.S. Pat. No. 5,270,748; U.S. Pat. No. 5,231,674; andU.S. Pat. No. 4,376,309. The eye tracking system may be implemented byutilizing CCD Unit 214 (FIG. 1) or an eye tracking unit may be installedin Communication Device 200 to implement the system. For the avoidanceof doubt, the eye tracking system may be implemented by either ahardware unit or a software program.

Paragraph [0227]—In this embodiment, the user of Communication Device200 rolls up his/her eyes, which is detected by the eye tracking system(S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1), in response thereto, produces the mouse pointermoving signal indicating to move up the mouse pointer (S2).

Paragraph [0228]—This Paragraph [0228] illustrates ETS Pointer MovingSignal Producing Software 20649 c 7 stored in Mouse Pointer DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20649 c (Paragraph [0209]) which produces themouse pointer moving signal described in S1 of Paragraph indicating tomove down the mouse pointer by utilizing the eye tracking system. Inthis embodiment, the user of Communication Device 200 rolls down his/hereyes, which is detected by the eye tracking system (S1). CPU 211 (FIG.1), in response thereto, produces the mouse pointer moving signalindicating to move down the mouse pointer (S2).

Paragraph [0229]—This Paragraph [0229] illustrates ETS Pointer MovingSignal Producing Software 20649 c 7 stored in Mouse Pointer DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20649 c (Paragraph [0209]) which produces themouse pointer moving signal described in S1 of Paragraph indicating tomove left the mouse pointer by utilizing the eye tracking system. Inthis embodiment, the user of Communication Device 200 rolls left his/hereyes, which is detected by the eye tracking system (S1). CPU 211 (FIG.1), in response thereto, produces the mouse pointer moving signalindicating to move left the mouse pointer (S2).

Paragraph [0230]—This Paragraph [0230] illustrates ETS Pointer MovingSignal Producing Software 20649 c 7 stored in Mouse Pointer DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20649 c (Paragraph [0209]) which produces themouse pointer moving signal described in S1 of Paragraph indicating tomove right the mouse pointer by utilizing the eye tracking system. Inthis embodiment, the user of Communication Device 200 rolls righthis/her eyes, which is detected by the eye tracking system (S1). CPU 211(FIG. 1), in response thereto, produces the mouse pointer moving signalindicating to move right the mouse pointer (S2).

Paragraph [0231]—This Paragraph [0231] illustrates a differentembodiment of Mouse Pointer Moving Software 20649 c 2 stored in MousePointer Displaying Software Storage Area 20649 c (Paragraph [0209])which is executed in combination of eye tracking system explainedhereinbefore. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1), by utilizing the eyetracking system, determines the location on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) at whichthe user of Communication Device 200 is currently gazing (S1). CPU 211then determines the new location where the mouse pointer is to bedisplayed (S2), and stores the new and updated current location data in‘Current Location Data’ of Current Pointer Data Storage Area 20649 b 2(Paragraph [0208]) (S3).

Paragraph [0232]—<<Multiple Language Displaying Function>>

Paragraph [0233]—Paragraph [0234] through Paragraph [0264] illustratethe multiple language displaying function wherein a language is selectedfrom a plurality of languages, such as English, Japanese, French, andGerman, which is utilized to operate Communication Device 200.

Paragraph [0234]—This Paragraph [0234] illustrates the storage areaincluded in RAM 206 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, RAM 206 includesMultiple Language Displaying Info Storage Area 20654 a of which the dataand the software programs stored therein are described in Paragraph[0236].

Paragraph [0235]—The data and/or the software programs stored inMultiple Language Displaying Info Storage Area 20654 a (Paragraph[0234]) may be downloaded from Host H (Paragraph [0025]).

Paragraph [0236]—This Paragraph [0236] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Multiple Language Displaying Info Storage Area 20654 a(Paragraph [0234]). In this embodiment, Multiple Language DisplayingInfo Storage Area 20654 a includes Multiple Language Displaying DataStorage Area 20654 b and Multiple Language Displaying Software StorageArea 20654 c. Multiple Language Displaying Data Storage Area 20654 bstores the data necessary to implement the present function, such as theones described in Paragraph [0237] through Paragraph [0245]. MultipleLanguage Displaying Software Storage Area 20654 c stores the softwareprograms necessary to implement the present function, such as the onesdescribed in Paragraph [0246].

Paragraph [0237]—This Paragraph [0237] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Multiple Language Displaying Data Storage Area 20654 b(Paragraph [0236]). In this embodiment, Multiple Language DisplayingData Storage Area 20654 b includes Language Tables Storage Area 20654 b1, Language Type Data Storage Area 20654 b 2, Language Item Data StorageArea 20654 b 3, and Selected Language Table ID Storage Area 20654 b 4.Language Tables Storage Area 20654 b 1 stores the data described inParagraph [0238]. Language Type Data Storage Area 20654 b 2 stores thedata described in Paragraph [0244]. Language Item Data Storage Area20654 b 3 stores the data described in Paragraph [0245]. SelectedLanguage Table ID Storage Area 20654 b 4 stores the language table IDselected in S4 s of Paragraph [0248] and Paragraph [0257].

Paragraph [0238]—This Paragraph [0238] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Language Tables Storage Area 20654 b 1 (Paragraph [0237]).In this embodiment, Language Tables Storage Area 20654 b 1 includesLanguage Table#1 Storage Area 20654 b 1 a, Language Table#2 Storage Area20654 b 1 b, Language Table#3 Storage Area 20654 b 1 C, and LanguageTable#4 Storage Area 20654 b 1 d. Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654 b1 a stores the data described in Paragraph [0239]. Language Table#2Storage Area 20654 b 1 b stores the data described in Paragraph [0241].Language Table#3 Storage Area 20654 b 1 c stores the data described inParagraph [0242]. Language Table#4 Storage Area 20654 b 1 d stores thedata described in Paragraph [0243].

Paragraph [0239]—This Paragraph [0239] illustrates the data stored inLanguage Table#1 Storage Area 20654 b 1 a (Paragraph [0238]). In thisembodiment, Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654 b 1 a comprises twocolumns, i.e., ‘Language Item ID’ and ‘Language Text Data’. Column‘Language Item ID’ stores the language item IDs, and each language itemID represents the identification of the corresponding language textdata.

Paragraph [0240]—Column ‘Language Text Data’ stores the language textdata, and each language text data represents the English text datadisplayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, Language Table#1Storage Area 20654 b 1 a stores the following data: the language item ID‘Language Item#1’ and the corresponding language text data ‘Open file’;the language item ID ‘Language Item#2’ and the corresponding languagetext data ‘Close file’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#3’ and thecorresponding language text data ‘Delete’; the language item ID‘Language Item#4’ and the corresponding language text data ‘Copy’; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item#5’ and the corresponding language textdata ‘Cut’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#6’ and the correspondinglanguage text data ‘Paste’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#7’ andthe corresponding language text data ‘Insert’; the language item ID‘Language Item#8’ and the corresponding language text data ‘File’; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item#9’ and the corresponding language textdata ‘Edit’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#10’ and thecorresponding language text data ‘View’; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#11’ and the corresponding language text data ‘Format’; the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#12’ and the corresponding language text data‘Tools’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#13’ and the correspondinglanguage text data ‘Window’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#14’ andthe corresponding language text data ‘Help’; the language item ID‘Language Item#15’ and the corresponding language text data ‘MyNetwork’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#16’ and the correspondinglanguage text data ‘Trash’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#17’ andthe corresponding language text data ‘Local Disk’; the language item ID‘Language Item#18’ and the corresponding language text data ‘Save’; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item#19’ and the corresponding language textdata ‘Yes’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#20’ and thecorresponding language text data ‘No’; and the language item ID‘Language Item#21’ and the corresponding language text data ‘Cancel’.

Paragraph [0241]—This Paragraph [0241] illustrates the data stored inLanguage Table#1 Storage Area 20654 b 1 b (Paragraph [0238]). In thisembodiment, Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654 b 1 b comprises twocolumns, i.e., ‘Language Item ID’ and ‘Language Text Data’. Column‘Language Item ID’ stores the language item IDs, and each language itemID represents the identification of the corresponding language textdata. Column ‘Language Text Data’ stores the language text data, andeach language text data represents the Japanese text data displayed onLCD 201 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, Language Table#1 Storage Area20654 b 1 b stores the following data: the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#1’ and the corresponding language text data meaning ‘Open file’ inJapanese; the language item ID ‘Language Item#2’ and the correspondinglanguage text data meaning ‘Close file’ in Japanese; the language itemID ‘Language Item#3’ and the corresponding language text data meaning‘Delete’ in Japanese; the language item ID ‘Language Item#4’ and thecorresponding language text data meaning ‘Copy’ in Japanese; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item#5’ and the corresponding language textdata meaning ‘Cut’ in Japanese; the language item ID ‘Language Item#6’and the corresponding language text data meaning ‘Paste’ in Japanese;the language item ID ‘Language Item#7’ and the corresponding languagetext data meaning ‘Insert’ in Japanese; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#8’ and the corresponding language text data meaning ‘File’ inJapanese; the language item ID ‘Language Item#9’ and the correspondinglanguage text data meaning ‘Edit’ in Japanese; the language item ID‘Language Item#10’ and the corresponding language text data meaning‘View’ in Japanese; the language item ID ‘Language Item#11’ and thecorresponding language text data meaning ‘Format’ in Japanese; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item#12’ and the corresponding language textdata meaning ‘Tools’ in Japanese; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#13’ and the corresponding language text data meaning ‘Window’ inJapanese; the language item ID ‘Language Item#14’ and the correspondinglanguage text data meaning ‘Help’ in Japanese; the language item ID‘Language Item#15’ and the corresponding language text data meaning ‘MyNetwork’ in Japanese; the language item ID ‘Language Item#16’ and thecorresponding language text data meaning ‘Trash’ in Japanese; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item#17’ and the corresponding language textdata meaning ‘Local Disk’ in Japanese; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#18’ and the corresponding language text data meaning ‘Save’ inJapanese; the language item ID ‘Language Item#19’ and the correspondinglanguage text data meaning ‘Yes’ in Japanese; the language item ID‘Language Item#20’ and the corresponding language text data meaning ‘No’in Japanese; and the language item ID ‘Language Item#21’ and thecorresponding language text data meaning ‘Cancel’ in Japanese.

Paragraph [0242]—This Paragraph [0242] illustrates the data stored inLanguage Table#1 Storage Area 20654 b 1 c (Paragraph [0238]). In thisembodiment, Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654 b 1 c comprises twocolumns, i.e., ‘Language Item ID’ and ‘Language Text Data’. Column‘Language Item ID’ stores the language item IDs, and each language itemID represents the identification of the corresponding language textdata. Column ‘Language Text Data’ stores the language text data, andeach language text data represents the French text data displayed on LCD201 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654 b1 c stores the following data: the language item ID ‘Language Item#1’and the corresponding language text data ‘French#1’ meaning ‘Open file’in French; the language item ID ‘Language Item#2’ and the correspondinglanguage text data ‘French#2’ meaning ‘Close file’ in French; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item#3’ and the corresponding language textdata ‘French#3’ meaning ‘Delete’ in French; the language item ID‘Language Item#4’ and the corresponding language text data ‘French#4’meaning ‘Copy’ in French; the language item ID ‘Language Item#5’ and thecorresponding language text data ‘French#5’ meaning ‘Cut’ in French; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item#6’ and the corresponding language textdata ‘French#6’ meaning ‘Paste’ in French; the language item ID‘Language Item#7’ and the corresponding language text data ‘French#7’meaning ‘Insert’ in French; the language item ID ‘Language Item#8’ andthe corresponding language text data ‘French#8’ meaning ‘File’ inFrench; the language item ID ‘Language Item#9’ and the correspondinglanguage text data ‘French#9’ meaning ‘Edit’ in French; the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#10’ and the corresponding language text data‘French#10’ meaning ‘View’ in French; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#11’ and the corresponding language text data ‘French#11’ meaning‘Format’ in French; the language item ID ‘Language Item#12’ and thecorresponding language text data ‘French#12’ meaning ‘Tools’ in French;the language item ID ‘Language Item#13’ and the corresponding languagetext data ‘French#13’ meaning ‘Window’ in French; the language item ID‘Language Item#14’ and the corresponding language text data ‘French#14’meaning ‘Help’ in French; the language item ID ‘Language Item#15’ andthe corresponding language text data ‘French#15’ meaning ‘My Network’ inFrench; the language item ID ‘Language Item#16’ and the correspondinglanguage text data ‘French#16’ meaning ‘Trash’ in French; the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#17’ and the corresponding language text data‘French#17’ meaning ‘Local Disk’ in French; the language item ID‘Language Item#18’ and the corresponding language text data ‘French#18’meaning ‘Save’ in French; the language item ID ‘Language Item#19’ andthe corresponding language text data ‘French#19’ meaning ‘Yes’ inFrench; the language item ID ‘Language Item#20’ and the correspondinglanguage text data ‘French#20’ meaning ‘No’ in French; and the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#21’ and the corresponding language text data‘French#21’ meaning ‘Cancel’ in French.

Paragraph [0243]—This Paragraph [0243] illustrates the data stored inLanguage Table#1 Storage Area 20654 b 1 d (Paragraph [0238]). In thisembodiment, Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654 b 1 d comprises twocolumns, i.e., ‘Language Item ID’ and ‘Language Text Data’. Column‘Language Item ID’ stores the language item IDs, and each language itemID represents the identification of the corresponding language textdata. Column ‘Language Text Data’ stores the language text data, andeach language text data represents the German text data displayed on LCD201 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654 b1 d stores the following data: the language item ID ‘Language Item#1’and the corresponding language text data ‘German#1’ meaning ‘Open file’in German; the language item ID ‘Language Item#2’ and the correspondinglanguage text data ‘German#2’ meaning ‘Close file’ in German; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item#3’ and the corresponding language textdata ‘German#3’ meaning ‘Delete’ in German; the language item ID‘Language Item#4’ and the corresponding language text data ‘German#4’meaning ‘Copy’ in German; the language item ID ‘Language Item#5’ and thecorresponding language text data ‘German#5’ meaning ‘Cut’ in German; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item#6’ and the corresponding language textdata ‘German#6’ meaning ‘Paste’ in German; the language item ID‘Language Item#7’ and the corresponding language text data ‘German#7’meaning ‘Insert’ in German; the language item ID ‘Language Item#8’ andthe corresponding language text data ‘German#8’ meaning ‘File’ inGerman; the language item ID ‘Language Item#9’ and the correspondinglanguage text data ‘German#9’ meaning ‘Edit’ in German; the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#10’ and the corresponding language text data‘German#10’ meaning ‘View’ in German; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#11’ and the corresponding language text data ‘German#11’ meaning‘Format’ in German; the language item ID ‘Language Item#12’ and thecorresponding language text data ‘German#12’ meaning ‘Tools’ in German;the language item ID ‘Language Item#13’ and the corresponding languagetext data ‘German#13’ meaning ‘Window’ in German; the language item ID‘Language Item#14’ and the corresponding language text data ‘German#14’meaning ‘Help’ in German; the language item ID ‘Language Item#15’ andthe corresponding language text data ‘German#15’ meaning ‘My Network’ inGerman; the language item ID ‘Language Item#16’ and the correspondinglanguage text data ‘German#16’ meaning ‘Trash’ in German; the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#17’ and the corresponding language text data‘German#17’ meaning ‘Local Disk’ in German; the language item ID‘Language Item#18’ and the corresponding language text data ‘German#18’meaning ‘Save’ in German; the language item ID ‘Language Item#19’ andthe corresponding language text data ‘German#19’ meaning ‘Yes’ inGerman; the language item ID ‘Language Item#20’ and the correspondinglanguage text data ‘German#20’ meaning ‘No’ in German; and the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#21’ and the corresponding language text data‘German#21’ meaning ‘Cancel’ in German.

Paragraph [0244]—This Paragraph [0244] illustrates data stored inLanguage Type Data Storage Area 20654 b 2 (Paragraph [0237]). In thisembodiment, Language Type Data Storage Area 20654 b 2 comprises twocolumns, i.e., ‘Language Table ID’ and ‘Language Type Data’. Column‘Language Table ID’ stores the language table ID, and each languagetable ID represents the identification of the storage areas included inLanguage Tables Storage Area 20654 b 1 (Paragraph [0238]). Column‘Language Type Data’ stores the language type data, and each languagetype data represents the type of the language utilized in the languagetable of the corresponding language table ID. In this embodiment,Language Type Data Storage Area 20654 b 2 stores the following data: thelanguage table ID ‘Language Table#1’ and the corresponding language typedata ‘English’; the language table ID ‘Language Table#2’ and thecorresponding language type data ‘Japanese’; the language table ID‘Language Table#3’ and the corresponding language type data ‘French’;and the language table ID ‘Language Table#4’ and the correspondinglanguage type data ‘German’. Here, the language table ID ‘LanguageTable#1’ is an identification of Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654 b 1a (Paragraph [0239]); the language table ID ‘Language Table#2’ is anidentification of Language Table#2 Storage Area 20654 b 1 b (Paragraph[0241]); the language table ID ‘Language Table#3’ is an identificationof Language Table#3 Storage Area 20654 b 1 c (Paragraph [0242]); and thelanguage table ID ‘Language Table#4’ is an identification of LanguageTable#4 Storage Area 20654 b 1 d (Paragraph [0243]).

Paragraph [0245]—This Paragraph [0245] illustrates the data stored inLanguage Item Data Storage Area 20654 b 3 (Paragraph [0237]). In thisembodiment, Language Item Data Storage Area 20654 b 3 comprises twocolumns, i.e., ‘Language Item ID’ and ‘Language Item Data’. Column‘Language Item ID’ stores the language item IDs, and each language itemID represents the identification of the corresponding language itemdata. Column ‘Language Item Data’ stores the language item data, andeach language item data represents the content and/or the meaning of thelanguage text data displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment,Language Item Data Storage Area 20654 b 3 stores the following data: thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item#1’ and the corresponding language itemdata ‘Open file’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#2’ and thecorresponding language item data ‘Close file’; the language item ID‘Language Item#3’ and the corresponding language item data ‘Delete’; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item#4’ and the corresponding language itemdata ‘Copy’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#5’ and thecorresponding language item data ‘Cut’; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#6’ and the corresponding language item data ‘Paste’; the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#7’ and the corresponding language item data‘Insert’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#8’ and the correspondinglanguage item data ‘File’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#9’ andthe corresponding language item data ‘Edit’; the language item ID‘Language Item#10’ and the corresponding language item data ‘View’; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item#11’ and the corresponding language itemdata ‘Format’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#12’ and thecorresponding language item data ‘Tools’; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#13’ and the corresponding language item data ‘Window’; the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#14’ and the corresponding language item data‘Help’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#15’ and the correspondinglanguage item data ‘My Network’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#16’and the corresponding language item data ‘Trash’; the language item ID‘Language Item#17’ and the corresponding language item data ‘LocalDisk’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#18’ and the correspondinglanguage item data ‘Save’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#19’ andthe corresponding language item data ‘Yes’; the language item ID‘Language Item#20’ and the corresponding language item data ‘No’; andthe language item ID ‘Language Item#21’ and the corresponding languageitem data ‘Cancel’. Primarily, the data stored in column ‘Language ItemData’ are same as the ones stored in column ‘Language Text Data’ ofLanguage Table#1 Storage Area 20654 b 1 a (Paragraph [0239]).

Paragraph [0246]—This Paragraph [0246] illustrates the software programstored in Multiple Language Displaying Software Storage Area 20654 c(Paragraph [0236]). In this embodiment, Multiple Language DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20654 c stores Language Selecting Software 20654 c1, Selected Language Displaying Software 20654 c 2, Language Text DataDisplaying Software For Word Processor 20654 c 3 a, Language Text DataDisplaying Software For Word Processor 20654 c 3 b, and Language TextData Displaying Software For Explorer 20654 c 4. Language SelectingSoftware 20654 c 1 is the software program described in Paragraph [0248]and Paragraph [0257]. Selected Language Displaying Software 20654 c 2 isthe software program described in Paragraph [0249] and Paragraph [0258].Language Text Data Displaying Software For Word Processor 20654 c 3 a isthe software program described in Paragraph [0250] and Paragraph [0259].Language Text Data Displaying Software For Word Processor 20654 c 3 b isthe software program described in Paragraph [0253] and Paragraph [0261].Language Text Data Displaying Software For Explorer 20654 c 4 is thesoftware program described in Paragraph [0254] and Paragraph [0263].

Paragraph [0247]—<<Multiple Language Displaying Function—UtilizingEnglish>>

Paragraph [0248]—Paragraph [0248] illustrates Language SelectingSoftware 20654 c 1 stored in Multiple Language Displaying SoftwareStorage Area 20654 c (Paragraph [0246]) which selects the languageutilized to operate Communication Device 200 from a plurality oflanguages. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device200 retrieves the language type data from Language Type Data StorageArea 20654 b 2 (Paragraph [0244]) (S1), and Displays a list of availablelanguages on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). In the present example, thefollowing languages are displayed on LCD 201: English, Japanese, French,and German. A certain language is selected therefrom by utilizing InputDevice 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S3). Assume that‘English’ is selected in S3. CPU 211 then identifies the language tableID corresponding to the language type data in Language Type Data StorageArea 20654 b 2 (Paragraph [0244]), and stores the language table ID(Language Table#1) in Selected Language Table ID Storage Area 20654 b 4(Paragraph [0237]) (S4).

Paragraph [0249]—This Paragraph [0249] illustrates Selected LanguageDisplaying Software 20654 c 2 stored in Multiple Language DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20654 c (Paragraph [0246]) which displays andoperates with the language selected in S3 of Paragraph (i.e., English).In this embodiment, when Communication Device 200 is powered on (S1),CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrieves the selectedlanguage table ID (Language Table#1) from Selected Language Table IDStorage Area 20654 b 4 (Paragraph [0237]) (S2). CPU 211 then identifiesthe storage area corresponding to the language table ID selected in S2(Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654 b 1 a (Paragraph [0239])) inLanguage Tables Storage Area 20654 b 1 (Paragraph [0238]) (S3). Languagetext data displaying process is initiated thereafter of which thedetails are described hereinafter (S4).

Paragraph [0250]—This Paragraph [0250] illustrates Language Text DataDisplaying Software For Word Processor 20654 c 3 a stored in MultipleLanguage Displaying Software Storage Area 20654 c (Paragraph [0246])which displays the language text data at the time a word processor, suchas MS Word and WordPerfect is executed. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 executes a word processor inresponse to the signal input by the user of Communication Device 200indicating to activate and execute the word processor (S1). In theprocess of displaying the word processor on LCD 201 (FIG. 1), thefollowing steps of S2 through S8 are implemented. Namely, CPU 211identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#8’ in Language Table#1Storage Area 20654 b 1 a (Paragraph [0239]) and displays thecorresponding language text data ‘File’ at the predetermined location inthe word processor (S2). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID‘Language Item#9’ in Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654 b 1 a(Paragraph [0239]) and displays the corresponding language text data‘Edit’ at the predetermined location in the word processor (S3). CPU 211identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#10’ in Language Table#1Storage Area 20654 b 1 a (Paragraph [0239]) and displays thecorresponding language text data ‘View’ at the predetermined location inthe word processor (S4). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID‘Language Item#11’ in Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654 b 1 a(Paragraph [0239]) and displays the corresponding language text data‘Format’ at the predetermined location in the word processor (S5). CPU211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#12’ in LanguageTable#1 Storage Area 20654 b 1 a (Paragraph [0239]) and displays thecorresponding language text data ‘Tools’ at the predetermined locationin the word processor (S6). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID‘Language Item#13’ in Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654 b 1 a(Paragraph [0239]) and displays the corresponding language text data‘Window’ at the predetermined location in the word processor (S7). CPU211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#14’ in LanguageTable#1 Storage Area 20654 b 1 a (Paragraph [0239]) and displays thecorresponding language text data ‘Help’ at the predetermined location inthe word processor (S8). Alphanumeric data is input to the wordprocessor by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system thereafter (S9).

Paragraph [0251]—This Paragraph [0251] illustrates the data displayed onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 at the time Language TextData Displaying Software For Word Processor 20654 c 3 a (Paragraph[0250]) is implemented. In this embodiment, the word processor describedin Paragraph [0250] is primarily composed of Menu Bar 20154 MB andAlphanumeric Data Input Area 20154ADIA wherein the language text datadescribed in S2 through S8 of Paragraph [0250] are displayed on Menu Bar20154 MB and alphanumeric data are input in Alphanumeric Data Input Area20154ADIA. In this embodiment, 20154 MBF is the language text dataprocessed in S2 of the previous paragraph; 20154 MBE is the languagetext data processed in S3 of the previous paragraph; 20154 MBV is thelanguage text data processed in S4 of the previous paragraph; 20154 MBFis the language text data processed in S5 of the previous paragraph;20154 MBT is the language text data processed in S6 of the previousparagraph; 20154 MBW is the language text data processed in S7 of theprevious paragraph; and 20154 MBH is the language text data processed inS8 of the previous paragraph.

Paragraph [0252]—This Paragraph [0253] illustrates Language Text DataDisplaying Software For Word Processor 20654 c 3 b stored in MultipleLanguage Displaying Software Storage Area 20654 c (Paragraph [0246])which displays a prompt on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) at the time a word processoris closed. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device200 initiates the closing process of the word processor in response tothe signal input by the user of Communication Device 200 indicating toclose the word processor (S1). In the process of closing the wordprocessor, the following steps of S2 through S5 are implemented. Namely,CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#18’ in LanguageTable#1 Storage Area 20654 b 1 a (Paragraph [0239]) and displays thecorresponding language text data ‘Save’ at the predetermined location inthe word processor (S2). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID‘Language Item#19’ in Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654 b 1 a(Paragraph [0239]) and displays the corresponding language text data‘Yes’ at the predetermined location in the word processor (S3). CPU 211identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#20’ in Language Table#1Storage Area 20654 b 1 a (Paragraph [0239]) and displays thecorresponding language text data ‘No’ at the predetermined location inthe word processor (S4). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID‘Language Item#21’ in Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654 b 1 a(Paragraph [0239]) and displays the corresponding language text data‘Cancel’ at the predetermined location in the word processor (S5). Thesave signal indicating to save the alphanumeric data input in S9 ofParagraph [0250] is input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or viavoice recognition system, assuming that the user of Communication Device200 intends to save the data (S6), and the data are saved in apredetermined location in RAM 206 (FIG. 1) (S7). The word processor isclosed thereafter (S8).

Paragraph [0253]—This Paragraph [0253] illustrates the data displayed onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 at the time Language TextData Displaying Software For Word Processor 20654 c 3 b (Paragraph[0253]) is implemented. In this embodiment, Prompt 20154Pr is displayedon LCD 201 (FIG. 1) at the time Language Text Data Displaying SoftwareFor Word Processor 20654 c 3 a (Paragraph [0250]) is closed. In thisembodiment, Prompt 20154Pr is primarily composed of 20154PrS, 20154PrY,20154PrN, and 20154PrC. In this embodiment, 20154PrS is the languagetext data processed in S2 of the previous paragraph; 20154PrY is thelanguage text data processed in S3 of the previous paragraph; 20154PrNis the language text data processed in S4 of the previous paragraph; and20154PrC is the language text data processed in S5 of the previousparagraph.

Paragraph [0254]—This Paragraph [0254] illustrates Language Text DataDisplaying Software For Explorer 20654 c 4 stored in Multiple LanguageDisplaying Software Storage Area 20654 c (Paragraph [0246]) whichdisplays the language text data at the time a Windows Explorer likesoftware program which displays folders and/or directories and thestructures thereof is executed. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 executes Windows Explorer like software programin response to the signal input by the user of Communication Device 200indicating to activate and execute the software program (S1). In theprocess of displaying the Windows Explorer like software program on LCD201 (FIG. 1), the steps of S2 through S4 are implemented. Namely, CPU211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#15’ in LanguageTable#1 Storage Area 20654 b 1 a (Paragraph [0239]) and displays thecorresponding language text data ‘My Network’ at the predeterminedlocation in the Windows Explorer like software program (S2). CPU 211identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#16’ in Language Table#1Storage Area 20654 b 1 a (Paragraph [0239]) and displays thecorresponding language text data ‘Trash’ at the predetermined locationin the Windows Explorer like software program (S3). CPU 211 identifiesthe language item ID ‘Language Item#17’ in Language Table#1 Storage Area20654 b 1 a (Paragraph [0239]) and displays the corresponding languagetext data ‘Local Disk’ at the predetermined location in the WindowsExplorer like software program (S4).

Paragraph [0255]—This Paragraph [0255] illustrates the data displayed onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 at the time Language TextData Displaying Software For Explorer 20654 c 4 (Paragraph [0254]) isexecuted. In this embodiment, 20154LD, 20154MN, and 20154Tr aredisplayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) at the time Language Text Data DisplayingSoftware For Explorer 20654 c 4 is executed. In this embodiment, 20154LDis the language text data processed in S4 of the previous paragraph;20154MN is the language text data processed in S2 of the previousparagraph; and 20154Tr is the language text data processed in S3 of theprevious paragraph.

Paragraph [0256]—<<Multiple Language Displaying Function—UtilizingJapanese>>

Paragraph [0257]—Paragraph [0257] illustrates Language SelectingSoftware 20654 c 1 stored in Multiple Language Displaying SoftwareStorage Area 20654 c (Paragraph [0246]) which selects the languageutilized to operate Communication Device 200 from a plurality oflanguages. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device200 retrieves the language type data from Language Type Data StorageArea 20654 b 2 (Paragraph [0244]) (S1), and Displays a list of availablelanguages on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). In the present example, thefollowing languages are displayed on LCD 201: English, Japanese, French,and German. A certain language is selected therefrom by utilizing InputDevice 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S3). Assume that‘Japanese’ is selected in S3. CPU 211 then identifies the language tableID corresponding to the language type data in Language Type Data StorageArea 20654 b 2 (Paragraph [0244]), and stores the language table ID(Language Table#2) in Selected Language Table ID Storage Area 20654 b 4(Paragraph [0237]) (S4).

Paragraph [0258]—This Paragraph [0258] illustrates Selected LanguageDisplaying Software 20654 c 2 stored in Multiple Language DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20654 c (Paragraph [0246]) which displays andoperates with the language selected in S3 of Paragraph (i.e., Japanese).In this embodiment, when Communication Device 200 is powered on (S1),CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrieves the selectedlanguage table ID (Language Table#2) from Selected Language Table IDStorage Area 20654 b 4 (Paragraph [0237]) (S2). CPU 211 then identifiesthe storage area corresponding to the language table ID selected in S2(Language Table#2 Storage Area 20654 b 1 b (Paragraph [0241])) inLanguage Tables Storage Area 20654 b 1 (Paragraph [0238]) (S3). Languagetext data displaying process is initiated thereafter of which thedetails are described hereinafter (S4).

Paragraph [0259]—This Paragraph [0259] illustrates Language Text DataDisplaying Software For Word Processor 20654 c 3 a stored in MultipleLanguage Displaying Software Storage Area 20654 c (Paragraph [0246])which displays the language text data at the time a word processor, suchas MS Word and WordPerfect is executed. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 executes a word processor inresponse to the signal input by the user of Communication Device 200indicating to activate and execute the word processor (S1). In theprocess of displaying the word processor on LCD 201 (FIG. 1), thefollowing steps of S2 through S8 are implemented. Namely, CPU 211identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#8’ in Language Table#2Storage Area 20654 b 1 b (Paragraph [0241]) and displays thecorresponding language text data indicating ‘File’ in Japanese at thepredetermined location in the word processor (S2). CPU 211 identifiesthe language item ID ‘Language Item#9’ in Language Table#2 Storage Area20654 b 1 b (Paragraph [0241]) and displays the corresponding languagetext data indicating ‘Edit’ in Japanese at the predetermined location inthe word processor (S3). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID‘Language Item#10’ in Language Table#2 Storage Area 20654 b 1 b(Paragraph [0241]) and displays the corresponding language text dataindicating ‘View’ in Japanese at the predetermined location in the wordprocessor (S4). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#11’ in Language Table#2 Storage Area 20654 b 1 b (Paragraph [0241])and displays the corresponding language text data indicating ‘Format’ inJapanese at the predetermined location in the word processor (S5). CPU211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#12’ in LanguageTable#2 Storage Area 20654 b 1 b (Paragraph [0241]) and displays thecorresponding language text data indicating ‘Tools’ in Japanese at thepredetermined location in the word processor (S6). CPU 211 identifiesthe language item ID ‘Language Item#13’ in Language Table#2 Storage Area20654 b 1 b (Paragraph [0241]) and displays the corresponding languagetext data indicating ‘Window’ in Japanese at the predetermined locationin the word processor (S7). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID‘Language Item#14’ in Language Table#2 Storage Area 20654 b 1 b(Paragraph [0241]) and displays the corresponding language text dataindicating ‘Help’ in Japanese at the predetermined location in the wordprocessor (S8). Alphanumeric data is input to the word processor byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition systemthereafter (S9).

Paragraph [0260]—This Paragraph [0260] illustrates the data displayed onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 at the time Language TextData Displaying Software For Word Processor 20654 c 3 a (Paragraph[0259]) is implemented. In this embodiment, the word processor describedin Paragraph [0259] is primarily composed of Menu Bar 20154 MB andAlphanumeric Data Input Area 20154ADIA wherein the language text datadescribed in S2 through S8 of Paragraph [0259] are displayed on Menu Bar20154 MB and alphanumeric data are input in Alphanumeric Data Input Area20154ADIA. In this embodiment, 20154 MBF is the language text dataprocessed in S2 of the previous paragraph; 20154 MBE is the languagetext data processed in S3 of the previous paragraph; 20154 MBV is thelanguage text data processed in S4 of the previous paragraph; 20154 MBFis the language text data processed in S5 of the previous paragraph;20154 MBT is the language text data processed in S6 of the previousparagraph; 20154 MBW is the language text data processed in S7 of theprevious paragraph; and 20154 MBH is the language text data processed inS8 of the previous paragraph.

Paragraph [0261]—This Paragraph [0261] illustrates Language Text DataDisplaying Software For Word Processor 20654 c 3 b stored in MultipleLanguage Displaying Software Storage Area 20654 c (Paragraph [0246])which displays a prompt on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) at the time a word processoris closed. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device200 initiates the closing process of the word processor in response tothe signal input by the user of Communication Device 200 indicating toclose the word processor (S1). In the process of closing the wordprocessor, the following steps of S2 through S5 are implemented. Namely,CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#18’ in LanguageTable#2 Storage Area 20654 b 1 b (Paragraph [0241]) and displays thecorresponding language text data indicating ‘Save’ in Japanese at thepredetermined location in the word processor (S2). CPU 211 identifiesthe language item ID ‘Language Item#19’ in Language Table#2 Storage Area20654 b 1 b (Paragraph [0241]) and displays the corresponding languagetext data indicating ‘Yes’ in Japanese at the predetermined location inthe word processor (S3). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID‘Language Item#20’ in Language Table#2 Storage Area 20654 b 1 b(Paragraph [0241]) and displays the corresponding language text dataindicating ‘No’ in Japanese at the predetermined location in the wordprocessor (S4). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#21’ in Language Table#2 Storage Area 20654 b 1 b (Paragraph [0241])and displays the corresponding language text data indicating ‘Cancel’ inJapanese at the predetermined location in the word processor (S5). Thesave signal indicating to save the alphanumeric data input in S9 ofParagraph is input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system, assuming that the user of Communication Device 200intends to save the data (S6), and the data are saved in a predeterminedlocation in RAM 206 (FIG. 1) (S7). The word processor is closedthereafter (S8).

Paragraph [0262]—This Paragraph [0262] illustrates the data displayed onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 at the time Language TextData Displaying Software For Word Processor 20654 c 3 b (Paragraph[0261]) is implemented. In this embodiment, Prompt 20154Pr is displayedon LCD 201 (FIG. 1) at the time Language Text Data Displaying SoftwareFor Word Processor 20654 c 3 a (Paragraph [0259]) is closed. In thisembodiment, Prompt 20154Pr is primarily composed of 20154PrS, 20154PrY,20154PrN, and 20154PrC. In this embodiment, 20154PrS is the languagetext data processed in S2 of the previous paragraph; 20154PrY is thelanguage text data processed in S3 of the previous paragraph; 20154PrNis the language text data processed in S4 of the previous paragraph; and20154PrC is the language text data processed in S5 of the previousparagraph.

Paragraph [0263]—This Paragraph [0263] illustrates Language Text DataDisplaying Software For Explorer 20654 c 4 stored in Multiple LanguageDisplaying Software Storage Area 20654 c (Paragraph [0246]) whichdisplays the language text data at the time a Windows Explorer likesoftware program which displays folders and/or directories and thestructures thereof is executed. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 executes Windows Explorer like software programin response to the signal input by the user of Communication Device 200indicating to activate and execute the software program (S1). In theprocess of displaying the Windows Explorer like software program on LCD201 (FIG. 1), the following steps of S2 through S4 are implemented.Namely, CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#15’ inLanguage Table#2 Storage Area 20654 b 1 b (Paragraph [0241]) anddisplays the corresponding language text data indicating ‘My Network’ inJapanese at the predetermined location in the Windows Explorer likesoftware program (S2). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#16’ in Language Table#2 Storage Area 20654 b 1 b (Paragraph [0241])and displays the corresponding language text data indicating ‘Trash’ inJapanese at the predetermined location in the Windows Explorer likesoftware program (S3). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#17’ in Language Table#2 Storage Area 20654 b 1 b (Paragraph [0241])and displays the corresponding language text data indicating ‘LocalDisk’ in Japanese at the predetermined location in the Windows Explorerlike software program (S4).

Paragraph [0264]—This Paragraph [0264] illustrates the data displayed onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 at the time Language TextData Displaying Software For Explorer 20654 c 4 (Paragraph [0263]) isexecuted. In this embodiment, 20154LD, 20154MN, and 20154Tr aredisplayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) at the time Language Text Data DisplayingSoftware For Explorer 20654 c 4 is executed. In this embodiment, 20154LDis the language text data processed in S4 of the previous paragraph;20154MN is the language text data processed in S2 of the previousparagraph; and 20154Tr is the language text data processed in S3 of theprevious paragraph.

Paragraph [0265]—<<Caller's Information Displaying Function>>

Paragraph [0266]—Paragraph [0270] through Paragraph [0315] illustratethe Caller's Information displaying function which displays theInformation regarding the caller (e.g., name, phone number, emailaddress, and home address, etc.) on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) when CommunicationDevice 200 is utilized as a ‘TV phone’.

Paragraph [0267]—Paragraph [0270] through Paragraph [0277] illustratethe data and software programs stored in RAM 206 (FIG. 1) of Caller'sDevice, a Communication Device 200, utilized by the caller.

Paragraph [0268]—Paragraph [0278] through Paragraph [0285] illustratethe data and software programs stored in RAM 206 (FIG. 1) of Callee'sDevice, a Communication Device 200, utilized by the callee.

Paragraph [0269]—Paragraph [0286] through Paragraph [0289] illustratethe data and software programs stored in Host H (Paragraph [0025]).

Paragraph [0270]—This Paragraph [0270] illustrates the storage areaincluded in RAM 206 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device. In this embodiment, RAM206 of Caller's Device includes Caller's Information DisplayingInformation Storage Area 20655 a of which the data and the softwareprograms stored therein are described in Paragraph [0271].

Paragraph [0271]—This Paragraph [0271] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Caller's Information Displaying Information Storage Area20655 a (Paragraph [0270]). In this embodiment, Caller's InformationDisplaying Information Storage Area 20655 a includes Caller'sInformation Displaying Data Storage Area 20655 b and Caller'sInformation Displaying Software Storage Area 20655 c. Caller'sInformation Displaying Data Storage Area 20655 b stores the datanecessary to implement the present function on the side of Caller'sDevice, such as the ones described in Paragraph [0272] through Paragraph[0276]. Caller's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655 cstores the software programs necessary to implement the present functionon the side of Caller's Device, such as the ones described in Paragraph[0277].

Paragraph [0272]—This Paragraph [0272] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Caller's Information Displaying Data Storage Area 20655 b.In this embodiment, Caller's Information Displaying Data Storage Area20655 b includes Caller's Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20655 b 1,Callee's Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20655 b 2, Caller's Personal DataStorage Area 20655 b 3, Callee's Personal Data Storage Area 20655 b 4,Caller's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655 b 5, Callee's CalculatedGPS Data Storage Area 20655 b 6, Caller's Map Data Storage Area 20655 b7, Callee's Map Data Storage Area 20655 b 8, and Work Area 20655 b 9.Caller's Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20655 b 1 stores the datadescribed in Paragraph [0273]. Callee's Audiovisual Data Storage Area20655 b 2 stores the data described in Paragraph [0274]. Caller'sPersonal Data Storage Area 20655 b 3 stores the data described inParagraph [0275]. Callee's Personal Data Storage Area 20655 b 4 storesthe data described in Paragraph [0276]. Caller's Calculated GPS DataStorage Area 20655 b 5 stores the caller's calculated GPS data whichrepresents the current geographic location of Caller's Device in (x, y,z) format. Callee's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655 b 6 storesthe callee's calculated GPS data which represents the current geographiclocation of Callee's Device in (x, y, z) format. Caller's Map DataStorage Area 20655 b 7 stores the map data representing the surroundingarea of the location indicated by the caller's calculated GPS data.Callee's Map Data Storage Area 20655 b 8 stores the map datarepresenting the surrounding area of the location indicated by thecallee's calculated GPS data. Work Area 20655 b 9 is a storage areautilized to perform calculation and to temporarily store data.

Paragraph [0273]—This Paragraph [0273] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Caller's Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20655 b 1 (Paragraph[0272]). In this embodiment, Caller's Audiovisual Data Storage Area20655 b 1 includes Caller's Audio Data Storage Area 20655 b 1 a andCaller's Visual Data Storage Area 20655 b 1 b. Caller's Audio DataStorage Area 20655 b 1 a stores the caller's audio data which representsthe audio data input via Microphone 215 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device.Caller's Visual Data Storage Area 20655 b 1 b stores the caller's visualdata which represents the visual data input via CCD Unit 214 (FIG. 1) ofCaller's Device.

Paragraph [0274]—This Paragraph [0274] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Callee's Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20655 b 2 (Paragraph[0272]). In this embodiment, Callee's Audiovisual Data Storage Area20655 b 2 includes Callee's Audio Data Storage Area 20655 b 2 a andCallee's Visual Data Storage Area 20655 b 2 b. Callee's Audio DataStorage Area 20655 b 2 a stores the callee's audio data which representsthe audio data sent from Callee's Device. Callee's Visual Data StorageArea 20655 b 2 b stores the callee's visual data which represents thevisual data sent from Callee's Device.

Paragraph [0275]—This Paragraph [0275] illustrates the data stored inCaller's Personal Data Storage Area 20655 b 3 (Paragraph [0272]). Inthis embodiment, Caller's Personal Data Storage Area 20655 b 3 comprisestwo columns, i.e., ‘Caller's Personal Data’ and ‘Permitted Caller'sPersonal Data Flag’. Column ‘Caller's Personal Data’ stores the caller'spersonal data which represent the personal data of the caller. Column‘Permitted Caller's Personal Data Flag’ stores the permitted caller'spersonal data flag and each permitted caller's personal data flagrepresents whether the corresponding caller's personal data is permittedto be displayed on Callee's Device. The permitted caller's personal dataflag is represented by either ‘1’ or ‘0’ wherein ‘1’ indicates that thecorresponding caller's personal data is permitted to be displayed onCallee's Device, and ‘0’ indicates that the corresponding caller'spersonal data is not permitted to be displayed on Callee's Device. Inthis embodiment, Caller's Personal Data Storage Area 20655 b 3 storesthe following data: the caller's name and the corresponding permittedcaller's personal data flag ‘1’; the caller's phone number and thecorresponding permitted caller's personal data flag ‘1’; the caller'semail address and the corresponding permitted caller's personal dataflag ‘1’; the caller's home address and the corresponding permittedcaller's personal data flag ‘1’; the caller's business address and thecorresponding permitted caller's personal data flag ‘0’; the caller'stitle and the corresponding permitted caller's personal data flag ‘0’;the caller's hobby and the corresponding permitted caller's personaldata flag ‘0’; the caller's blood type and the corresponding permittedcaller's personal data flag ‘0’; the caller's gender and thecorresponding permitted caller's personal data flag ‘0’; the caller'sage and the corresponding permitted caller's personal data flag ‘0’; andcaller's date of birth and the corresponding permitted caller's personaldata flag ‘0’.

Paragraph [0276]—This Paragraph [0276] illustrates the data stored inCallee's Personal Data Storage Area 20655 b 4 (Paragraph [0272]). Inthis embodiment, Callee's Personal Data Storage Area 20655 b 4 storesthe callee's personal data which represent the personal data of thecallee which are displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device. Inthis embodiment, Callee's Personal Data Storage Area 20655 b 4 storesthe callee's name and phone number.

Paragraph [0277]—This Paragraph [0277] illustrates the software programsstored in Caller's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655 c(Paragraph [0271]). In this embodiment, Caller's Information DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20655 c stores Permitted Caller's Personal DataSelecting Software 20655 c 1, Dialing Software 20655 c 2, Caller'sDevice Pin-pointing Software 20655 c 3, Map Data Sending/ReceivingSoftware 20655 c 4, Caller's Audiovisual Data Collecting Software 20655c 5, Caller's Information Sending/Receiving Software 20655 c 6, Callee'sInformation Sending/Receiving Software 20655 c 6 a, Permitted Callee'sPersonal Data Displaying Software 20655 c 7, Map Displaying Software20655 c 8, Callee's Audio Data Outputting Software 20655 c 9, andCallee's Visual Data Displaying Software 20655 c 10. Permitted Caller'sPersonal Data Selecting Software 20655 c 1 is the software programdescribed in Paragraph [0291]. Dialing Software 20655 c 2 is thesoftware program described in Paragraph [0292]. Caller's DevicePin-pointing Software 20655 c 3 is the software program described inParagraph [0293] and Paragraph [0294]. Map Data Sending/ReceivingSoftware 20655 c 4 is the software program described in Paragraph[0295]. Caller's Audiovisual Data Collecting Software 20655 c 5 is thesoftware program described in Paragraph [0296]. Caller's InformationSending/Receiving Software 20655 c 6 is the software program describedin Paragraph [0297]. Callee's Information Sending/Receiving Software20655 c 6 a is the software program described in Paragraph [0311].Permitted Callee's Personal Data Displaying Software 20655 c 7 is thesoftware program described in Paragraph [0312]. Map Displaying Software20655 c 8 is the software program described in Paragraph [0313].Callee's Audio Data Outputting Software 20655 c 9 is the softwareprogram described in Paragraph [0314]. Callee's Visual Data DisplayingSoftware 20655 c 10 is the software program described in Paragraph[0315].

Paragraph [0278]—This Paragraph [0278] illustrates the storage areaincluded in RAM 206A (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device. In this embodiment,RAM 206A of Callee's Device includes Callee's Information DisplayingInformation Storage Area 20655 aA of which the data and the softwareprograms stored therein are described in Paragraph [0279].

Paragraph [0279]—This Paragraph [0279] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Callee's Information Displaying Information Storage Area20655 aA (Paragraph [0278]). In this embodiment, Callee's InformationDisplaying Information Storage Area 20655 aA includes Callee'sInformation Displaying Data Storage Area 20655 bA and Callee'sInformation Displaying Software Storage Area 20655 cA. Callee'sInformation Displaying Data Storage Area 20655 bA stores the datanecessary to implement the present function on the side of Callee'sDevice, such as the ones described in Paragraph [0280] through Paragraph[0284]. Callee's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655 cAstores the software programs necessary to implement the present functionon the side of Callee's Device, such as the ones described in Paragraph[0285].

Paragraph [0280]—This Paragraph [0280] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Callee's Information Displaying Data Storage Area 20655 bA.In this embodiment, Callee's Information Displaying Data Storage Area20655 bA includes Caller's Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20655 b 1A,Callee's Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20655 b 2A, Caller's PersonalData Storage Area 20655 b 3A, Callee's Personal Data Storage Area 20655b 4A, Caller's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655 b 5A, Callee'sCalculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655 b 6A, Caller's Map Data StorageArea 20655 b 7A, Callee's Map Data Storage Area 20655 b 8A, and WorkArea 20655 b 9A. Caller's Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20655 b 1Astores the data described in Paragraph [0281]. Callee's Audiovisual DataStorage Area 20655 b 2A stores the data described in Paragraph [0282].Caller's Personal Data Storage Area 20655 b 3A stores the data describedin Paragraph [0283]. Callee's Personal Data Storage Area 20655 b 4Astores the data described in Paragraph [0284]. Caller's Calculated GPSData Storage Area 20655 b 5A stores the caller's calculated GPS datawhich represents the current geographic location of Caller's Device in(x, y, z) format. Callee's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655 b 6Astores the callee's calculated GPS data which represents the currentgeographic location of Callee's Device in (x, y, z) format. Caller's MapData Storage Area 20655 b 7A stores the map data representing thesurrounding area of the location indicated by the caller's calculatedGPS data. Callee's Map Data Storage Area 20655 b 8A stores the map datarepresenting the surrounding area of the location indicated by thecallee's calculated GPS data. Work Area 20655 b 9A is a storage areautilized to perform calculation and to temporarily store data.

Paragraph [0281]—This Paragraph [0281] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Caller's Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20655 b 1A (Paragraph[0280]). In this embodiment, Caller's Audiovisual Data Storage Area20655 b 1A includes Caller's Audio Data Storage Area 20655 b 1 aA andCaller's Visual Data Storage Area 20655 b 1 bA. Caller's Audio DataStorage Area 20655 b 1 aA stores the caller's audio data whichrepresents the audio data sent from Caller's Device in a wirelessfashion. Caller's Visual Data Storage Area 20655 b 1 bA stores thecaller's visual data which represents the visual data input sent fromCaller's Device in a wireless fashion.

Paragraph [0282]—This Paragraph [0282] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Callee's Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20655 b 2A (Paragraph[0280]). In this embodiment, Callee's Audiovisual Data Storage Area20655 b 2A includes Callee's Audio Data Storage Area 20655 b 2 aA andCallee's Visual Data Storage Area 20655 b 2 bA. Callee's Audio DataStorage Area 20655 b 2 aA stores the callee's audio data whichrepresents the audio data input via Microphone 215 (FIG. 1) of Callee'sDevice. Callee's Visual Data Storage Area 20655 b 2 bA stores thecallee's visual data which represents the visual data input via CCD Unit214 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device.

Paragraph [0283]—This Paragraph [0283] illustrates the data stored inCaller's Personal Data Storage Area 20655 b 3A (Paragraph [0280]). Inthis embodiment, Caller's Personal Data Storage Area 20655 b 3A storesthe caller's personal data which represent the personal data of thecaller which are displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device. Inthis embodiment, Caller's Personal Data Storage Area 20655 b 3A storesthe caller's name, phone number, email address, and home address.

Paragraph [0284]—This Paragraph [0284] illustrates the data stored inCallee's Personal Data Storage Area 20655 b 4A (Paragraph [0280]). Inthis embodiment, Callee's Personal Data Storage Area 20655 b 4Acomprises two columns, i.e., ‘Callee's Personal Data’ and ‘PermittedCallee's Personal Data Flag’. Column ‘Callee's Personal Data’ stores thecallee's personal data which represent the personal data of the callee.Column ‘Permitted Callee's Personal Data Flag’ stores the permittedcallee's personal data flag and each permitted callee's personal dataflag represents whether the corresponding callee's personal data ispermitted to be displayed on Caller's Device. The permitted callee'spersonal data flag is represented by either ‘1’ or ‘0’ wherein ‘1’indicates that the corresponding callee's personal data is permitted tobe displayed on Caller's Device, and ‘0’ indicates that thecorresponding callee's personal data is not permitted to be displayed onCaller's Device. In this embodiment, Callee's Personal Data Storage Area20655 b 4A stores the following data: callee's name and thecorresponding permitted callee's personal data flag ‘1’; the callee'sphone number and the corresponding permitted callee's personal data flag‘1’; the callee's email address and the corresponding permitted caller'spersonal data flag ‘0’; the callee's home address and the correspondingpermitted callee's personal data flag ‘0’; the callee's business addressand the corresponding permitted callee's personal data flag ‘0’; thecallee's title and the corresponding permitted callee's personal dataflag ‘0’; the callee's hobby and the corresponding permitted callee'spersonal data flag ‘0’; the callee's blood type and the correspondingpermitted callee's personal data flag ‘0’; the callee's gender and thecorresponding permitted callee's personal data flag ‘0’; the callee'sage and the corresponding permitted callee's personal data flag ‘0’; andcallee's date of birth and the corresponding permitted callee's personaldata flag ‘0’.

Paragraph [0285]—This Paragraph [0285] illustrates the software programsstored in Callee's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655 cA(Paragraph [0279]). In this embodiment, Callee's Information DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20655 cA stores Permitted Callee's Personal DataSelecting Software 20655 c 1A, Dialing Software 20655 c 2A, Callee'sDevice Pin-pointing Software 20655 c 3A, Map Data Sending/ReceivingSoftware 20655 c 4A, Callee's Audiovisual Data Collecting Software 20655c 5A, Callee's Information Sending/Receiving Software 20655 c 6A,Caller's Information Sending/Receiving Software 20655 c 6 aA, PermittedCaller's Personal Data Displaying Software 20655 c 7A, Map DisplayingSoftware 20655 c 8A, Caller's Audio Data Outputting Software 20655 c 9A,and Caller's Visual Data Displaying Software 20655 c 10A. PermittedCallee's Personal Data Selecting Software 20655 c 1A is the softwareprogram described in Paragraph [0304]. Dialing Software 20655 c 2A isthe software program described in Paragraph [0305]. Callee's DevicePin-pointing Software 20655 c 3A is the software program described inParagraph [0306] and Paragraph [0307]. Map Data Sending/ReceivingSoftware 20655 c 4A is the software program described in Paragraph[0308]. Callee's Audiovisual Data Collecting Software 20655 c 5A is thesoftware program described in Paragraph [0309]. Callee's InformationSending/Receiving Software 20655 c 6A is the software program describedin Paragraph [0310]. Caller's Information Sending/Receiving Software20655 c 6 aA is the software program described in Paragraph [0298].Permitted Caller's Personal Data Displaying Software 20655 c 7A is thesoftware program described in Paragraph [0299]. Map Displaying Software20655 c 8A is the software program described in Paragraph [0300].Caller's Audio Data Outputting Software 20655 c 9A is the softwareprogram described in Paragraph [0301]. Caller's Visual Data DisplayingSoftware 20655 c 10A is the software program described in Paragraph[0302].

Paragraph [0286]—This Paragraph [0286] illustrates the storage areaincluded in Host H (Paragraph [0025]). In this embodiment, Host Hincludes Caller/Callee Information Storage Area H55 a of which the dataand the software programs stored therein are described hereinafter.

Paragraph [0287]—This Paragraph [0287] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Caller/Callee Information Storage Area H55 a. In thisembodiment, Caller/Callee Information Storage Area H55 a includesCaller/Callee Data Storage Area H55 b and Caller/Callee Software StorageArea H55 c. Caller/Callee Data Storage Area H55 b stores the datanecessary to implement the present function on the side of Host H(Paragraph [0025]), such as the ones described in Paragraph [0288].Caller/Callee Software Storage Area H55 c stores the software programsnecessary to implement the present function on the side of Host H, suchas the ones described in Paragraph [0289].

Paragraph [0288]—This Paragraph [0288] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Caller/Callee Data Storage Area H55 b. In this embodiment,Caller/Callee Data Storage Area H55 b includes Caller's InformationStorage Area H55 b 1, Callee's Information Storage Area H55 b 2, MapData Storage Area H55 b 3, Work Area h55 b 4, Caller's Calculated GPSData Storage Area H55 b 5, and Callee's Calculated GPS Data Storage AreaH55 b 6. Caller's Information Storage Area H55 b 1 stores the Caller'sInformation received Caller's Device. Callee's Information Storage AreaH55 b 2 stores the Callee's Information received Callee's Device. MapData Storage Area H55 b 3 stores the map data received from Caller'sDevice and Callee's Device. Work Area H55 b 4 is a storage area utilizedto perform calculation and to temporarily store data. Caller'sCalculated GPS Data Storage Area H55 b 5 stores the caller's calculatedGPS data. Callee's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area H55 b 6 stores thecallee's calculated GPS data.

Paragraph [0289]—This Paragraph [0289] illustrates the software programsstored in Caller/Callee Software Storage Area H55 c (Paragraph [0289]).In this embodiment, Caller/Callee Software Storage Area H55 c storesDialing Software H55 c 2, Caller's Device Pin-pointing Software H55 c 3,Callee's Device Pin-pointing Software H55 c 3 a, Map DataSending/Receiving Software H55 c 4, Caller's InformationSending/Receiving Software H55 c 6, and Callee's InformationSending/Receiving Software H55 c 6 a. Dialing Software H55 c 2 is thesoftware program described in Paragraph [0292] and Paragraph [0305].Caller's Device Pin-pointing Software H55 c 3 is the software programdescribed in Paragraph [0293]. Callee's Device Pin-pointing Software H55c 3 a is the software program described in Paragraph [0306]. Map DataSending/Receiving Software H55 c 4 is the software program described inParagraph [0295] and Paragraph [0308]. Caller's InformationSending/Receiving Software H55 c 6 is the software program described inParagraph [0297]. Callee's Information Sending/Receiving Software H55 c6 a is the software program described in Paragraph [0310] and Paragraph[0311].

Paragraph [0290]—Paragraph [0291] through Paragraph [0302] primarilyillustrate the sequence to output the Caller's Information (which isdefined hereinafter) from Callee's Device.

Paragraph [0291]—This Paragraph [0291] illustrates Permitted Caller'sPersonal Data Selecting Software 20655 c 1 stored in Caller'sInformation Displaying Software Storage Area 20655 c (Paragraph [0277])of Caller's Device, which selects the permitted caller's personal datato be displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device retrieves all of thecaller's personal data from Caller's Personal Data Storage Area 20655 b3 (Paragraph [0275]) (S1). CPU 211 then displays a list of caller'spersonal data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). The caller selects, by utilizingInput Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system, the caller'spersonal data permitted to be displayed on Callee's Device (S3). Thepermitted caller's personal data flag of the data selected in S3 isregistered as ‘1’ (S4).

Paragraph [0292]—This Paragraph [0292] illustrates Dialing Software H55c 2 stored in Caller/Callee Software Storage Area H55 c (Paragraph[0289]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025]), Dialing Software 20655 c 2 storedin Caller's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655 c(Paragraph [0277]) of Caller's Device, and Dialing Software 20655 c 2Astored in Callee's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655 cA(Paragraph [0285]) of Callee's Device, which enables to connect betweenCaller's Device and Callee's Device via Host H (Paragraph [0025]) in awireless fashion. In this embodiment, a connection is establishedbetween Caller's Device and Host H (S1). Next, a connection isestablished between Host H and Callee's Device (S2). As a result,Caller's Device and Callee's Device are able to exchange audiovisualdata, text data, and various types of data with each other. Theconnection is maintained until Caller's Device, Host H, or Callee'sDevice terminates the connection.

Paragraph [0293]—This Paragraph [0293] illustrates Caller's DevicePin-pointing Software H55 c 3 (Paragraph [0289]) stored in Caller/CalleeSoftware Storage Area H55 c (Paragraph [0289]) of Host H (Paragraph[0025]) and Caller's Device Pin-pointing Software 20655 c 3 stored inCaller's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655 c (Paragraph[0277]) of Caller's Device, which identifies the current geographiclocation of Caller's Device. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCaller's Device collects the GPS raw data from the near base stations(S1). CPU 211 sends the raw GPS data to Host H (S2). Upon receiving theraw GPS data (S3), Host H produces the caller's calculated GPS data byreferring to the raw GPS data (S4). Host H stores the caller'scalculated GPS data in Caller's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area H55 b 5(Paragraph [0288]) (S5). Host H then retrieves the caller's calculatedGPS data from Caller's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area H55 b 5(Paragraph [0288]) (S6), and sends the data to Caller's Device (S7).Upon receiving the caller's calculated GPS data from Host H (S8), CPU211 stores the data in Caller's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655 b5 (Paragraph [0272]) (S9). Here, the GPS raw data are the primitive datautilized to produce the caller's calculated GPS data, and the caller'scalculated GPS data is the data representing the location of Caller'sDevice in (x, y, z) format. The sequence described in the presentparagraph is repeated periodically.

Paragraph [0294]—This Paragraph [0294] illustrates another embodiment ofthe sequence described in Paragraph [0293] in which the entire processis performed solely by Caller's Device Pin-pointing Software 20655 c 3stored in Caller's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655 c(Paragraph [0277]) of Caller's Device. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Caller's Device collects the raw GPS data from the near basestations (S1). CPU 211 then produces the caller's calculated GPS data byreferring to the raw GPS data (S2), and stores the caller's calculatedGPS data in Caller's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655 b 5(Paragraph [0272]) (S3). The sequence described in the present paragraphis repeated periodically.

Paragraph [0295]—This Paragraph [0295] illustrates Map DataSending/Receiving Software H55 c 4 stored in Caller/Callee SoftwareStorage Area H55 c (Paragraph [0289]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) andMap Data Sending/Receiving Software 20655 c 4 stored in Caller'sInformation Displaying Software Storage Area 20655 c (Paragraph [0277])of Caller's Device, which sends and receives the map data. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device retrieves the caller'scalculated GPS data from Caller's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655b 5 (Paragraph [0272]) (S1), and sends the data to Host H (S2). Uponreceiving the calculated GPS data from Caller's Device (S3), Host Hidentifies the map data in Map Data Storage Area H55 b 3 (Paragraph[0288]) (S4). Here, the map data represents the surrounding area of thelocation indicated by the caller's calculated GPS data. Host H retrievesthe map data from Map Data Storage Area H55 b 3 (Paragraph [0288]) (S5),and sends the data to Caller's Device (S6). Upon receiving the map datafrom Host H (S7), Caller's Device stores the data in Caller's Map DataStorage Area 20655 b 7 (Paragraph [0272]) (S8). The sequence describedin the present paragraph is repeated periodically.

Paragraph [0296]—This Paragraph [0296] illustrates Caller's AudiovisualData Collecting Software 20655 c 5 stored in Caller's InformationDisplaying Software Storage Area 20655 c (Paragraph [0277]) of Caller'sDevice, which collects the audiovisual data of the caller to be sent toCallee's Device via Antenna 218 (FIG. 1) thereof. CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCaller's Device retrieves the caller's audiovisual data from CCD Unit214 and Microphone 215 (S1). CPU 211 then stores the caller's audio datain Caller's Audio Data Storage Area 20655 b 1 a (Paragraph [0273]) (S2),and the caller's visual data in Caller's Visual Data Storage Area 20655b 1 b (Paragraph [0273]) (S3). The sequence described in the presentparagraph is repeated periodically.

Paragraph [0297]—This Paragraph [0297] illustrates Caller's InformationSending/Receiving Software H55 c 6 stored in Caller/Callee SoftwareStorage Area H55 c (Paragraph [0289]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) andCaller's Information Sending/Receiving Software 20655 c 6 stored inCaller's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655 c (Paragraph[0277]) of Caller's Device, which sends and receives the Caller'sInformation (which is defined hereinafter) between Caller's Device andHost H. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Deviceretrieves the permitted caller's personal data from Caller's PersonalData Storage Area 20655 b 3 (Paragraph [0275]) (S1). CPU 211 retrievesthe caller's calculated GPS data from Caller's Calculated GPS DataStorage Area 20655 b 5 (Paragraph [0272]) (S2). CPU 211 retrieves themap data from Caller's Map Data Storage Area 20655 b 7 (Paragraph[0272]) (S3). CPU 211 retrieves the caller's audio data from Caller'sAudio Data Storage Area 20655 b 1 a (Paragraph [0273]) (S4). CPU 211retrieves the caller's visual data from Caller's Visual Data StorageArea 20655 b 1 b (Paragraph [0273]) (S5). CPU 211 then sends the dataretrieved in S1 through S5 (collectively defined as the ‘Caller'sInformation’ hereinafter) to Host H (S6). Upon receiving the Caller'sInformation from Caller's Device (S7), Host H stores the Caller'sInformation in Caller's Information Storage Area H55 b 1 (Paragraph[0288]) (S8). The sequence described in the present paragraph isrepeated periodically.

Paragraph [0298]—This Paragraph [0298] illustrates Caller's InformationSending/Receiving Software H55 c 6 stored in Caller/Callee SoftwareStorage Area H55 c (Paragraph [0289]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) andCaller's Information Sending/Receiving Software 20655 c 6 aA (Paragraph[0285]) stored in Caller's Information Displaying Software Storage Area20655 c (Paragraph [0277]) of Caller's Device, which sends and receivesthe Caller's Information between Host H and Callee's Device. In thisembodiment, Host H retrieves the Caller's Information from Caller'sInformation Storage Area H55 b 1 (Paragraph [0288]) (S1), and sends theCaller's Information to Callee's Device (S2). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCallee's Device receives the Caller's Information from Host H (S3). CPU211 stores the permitted caller's personal data in Caller's PersonalData Storage Area 20655 b 3A (Paragraph [0283]) (S4). CPU 211 stores thecaller's calculated GPS data in Caller's Calculated GPS Data StorageArea 20655 b 5A (Paragraph [0280]) (S5). CPU 211 stores the map data inCaller's Map Data Storage Area 20655 b 7A (Paragraph [0280]) (S6). CPU211 stores the caller's audio data in Caller's Audio Data Storage Area20655 b 1 aA (Paragraph [0281]) (S7). CPU 211 stores the caller's visualdata in Caller's Visual Data Storage Area 20655 b 1 bA (Paragraph[0281]) (S8). The sequence described in the present paragraph isrepeated periodically.

Paragraph [0299]—This Paragraph [0299] illustrates Permitted Caller'sPersonal Data Displaying Software 20655 c 7A stored in Callee'sInformation Displaying Software Storage Area 20655 cA (Paragraph [0285])of Callee's Device, which displays the permitted caller's personal dataon LCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Callee's Device retrieves the permitted caller's personaldata from Caller's Personal Data Storage Area 20655 b 3A (Paragraph[0283]) (S1). CPU 211 then displays the permitted caller's personal dataon LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). The sequence described in the presentparagraph is repeated periodically.

Paragraph [0300]—This Paragraph [0300] illustrates Map DisplayingSoftware 20655 c 8A stored in Callee's Information Displaying SoftwareStorage Area 20655 cA (Paragraph [0285]) of Callee's Device, whichdisplays the map representing the surrounding area of the locationindicated by the caller's calculated GPS data. In this embodiment, CPU211 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device retrieves the caller's calculated GPSdata from Caller's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655 b 5A(Paragraph [0280]) (S1). CPU 211 then retrieves the map data fromCaller's Map Data Storage Area 20655 b 7A (Paragraph [0280]) (S2), andarranges on the map data the caller's current location icon inaccordance with the caller's calculated GPS data (S3). Here, thecaller's current location icon is an icon which represents the locationof Caller's Device in the map data. The map with the caller's currentlocation icon is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S4). The sequencedescribed in the present paragraph is repeated periodically.

Paragraph [0301]—This Paragraph [0301] illustrates Caller's Audio DataOutputting Software 20655 c 9A stored in Caller's Information DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20655 c (Paragraph [0277]) of Caller's Device,which outputs the caller's audio data from Speaker 216 (FIG. 1) ofCallee's Device. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Deviceretrieves the caller's audio data from Caller's Audio Data Storage Area20655 b 1 aA (Paragraph [0281]) (S1). CPU 211 then outputs the caller'saudio data from Speaker 216 (FIG. 1) (S2). The sequence described in thepresent paragraph is repeated periodically.

Paragraph [0302]—This Paragraph [0302] illustrates Caller's Visual DataDisplaying Software 20655 c 10A stored in Callee's InformationDisplaying Software Storage Area 20655 cA (Paragraph [0285]) of Callee'sDevice, which displays the caller's visual data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) ofCallee's Device. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Deviceretrieves the caller's visual data from Caller's Visual Data StorageArea 20655 b 1 bA (Paragraph [0281]) (S1). CPU 211 then displays thecaller's visual data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). The sequence described inthe present paragraph is repeated periodically.

Paragraph [0303]—Paragraph [0304] through Paragraph [0315] primarilyillustrate the sequence to output the Callee's Information (which isdefined hereinafter) from Caller's Device.

Paragraph [0304]—This Paragraph [0304] illustrates Permitted Callee'sPersonal Data Selecting Software 20655 c 1A stored in Callee'sInformation Displaying Software Storage Area 20655 cA (Paragraph [0285])of Callee's Device, which selects the permitted callee's personal datato be displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device retrieves all of thecallee's personal data from Callee's Personal Data Storage Area 20655 b4A (Paragraph [0284]) (S1). CPU 211 then displays a list of callee'spersonal data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). The callee selects, by utilizingInput Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system, the callee'spersonal data permitted to be displayed on Caller's Device (S3). Thepermitted callee's personal data flag of the data selected in S3 isregistered as ‘1’ (S4).

Paragraph [0305]—This Paragraph [0305] illustrates Dialing Software H55c 2 stored in Caller/Callee Software Storage Area H55 c (Paragraph[0289]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025]), Dialing Software 20655 c 2A storedin Callee's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655 cA(Paragraph [0285]) of Callee's Device, and Dialing Software 20655 c 2stored in Caller's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655 c(Paragraph [0277]) of Caller's Device, which enables to connect betweenCallee's Device and Caller's Device via Host H (Paragraph [0025]) in awireless fashion. In this embodiment, a connection is establishedbetween Callee's Device and Host H (S1). Next, a connection isestablished between Host H and Caller's Device (S2). As a result,Callee's Device and Caller's Device are able to exchange audiovisualdata, text data, and various types of data with each other. The sequencedescribed in the present paragraph is not necessarily implemented if theconnection between Caller's Device and Callee's Device is established asdescribed in Paragraph [0292]. The sequence described in the presentparagraph may be implemented if the connection is accidentallyterminated by Callee's Device and the connection process is initiated byCallee's Device.

Paragraph [0306]—This Paragraph [0306] illustrates Callee's DevicePin-pointing Software H55 c 3 a stored in Caller/Callee Software StorageArea H55 c (Paragraph [0289]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) and Callee'sDevice Pin-pointing Software 20655 c 3A stored in Callee's InformationDisplaying Software Storage Area 20655 cA of Callee's Device, whichidentifies the current geographic location of Callee's Device. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device collects the GPS rawdata from the near base stations (S1). CPU 211 sends the raw GPS data toHost H (S2). Upon receiving the raw GPS data (S3), Host H produces thecallee's calculated GPS data by referring to the raw GPS data (S4). HostH stores the callee's calculated GPS data in Callee's Calculated GPSData Storage Area H55 b 6 (Paragraph [0288]) (S5). Host H then retrievesthe callee's calculated GPS data from Callee's Calculated GPS DataStorage Area H55 b 6 (Paragraph [0288]) (S6), and sends the data toCallee's Device (S7). Upon receiving the callee's calculated GPS datafrom Host H (S8), CPU 211 stores the data in Callee's Calculated GPSData Storage Area 20655 b 6A (Paragraph [0280]) (S9). Here, the GPS rawdata are the primitive data utilized to produce the callee's calculatedGPS data, and the callee's calculated GPS data is the data representingthe location of Callee's Device in (x, y, z) format. The sequencedescribed in the present paragraph is repeated periodically.

Paragraph [0307]—This Paragraph [0307] illustrates another embodiment ofthe sequence described in Paragraph [0306] in which the entire processis performed solely by Callee's Device Pin-pointing Software 20655 c 3Astored in Callee's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655 cA(Paragraph [0285]) of Callee's Device. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Callee's Device collects the raw GPS data from the near basestations (S1). CPU 211 then produces the callee's calculated GPS data byreferring to the raw GPS data (S2), and stores the callee's calculatedGPS data in Callee's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655 b 6A(Paragraph [0280]) (S3). The sequence described in the present paragraphis repeated periodically.

Paragraph [0308]—This Paragraph [0308] illustrates Map DataSending/Receiving Software H55 c 4 stored in Caller/Callee SoftwareStorage Area H55 c (Paragraph [0289]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) andMap Data Sending/Receiving Software 20655 c 4A stored in Callee'sInformation Displaying Software Storage Area 20655 cA (Paragraph [0285])of Callee's Device, which sends and receives the map data. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device retrieves the callee'scalculated GPS data from Callee's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655b 6A (Paragraph [0280]) (S1), and sends the data to Host H (S2). Uponreceiving the calculated GPS data from Callee's Device (S3), Host Hidentifies the map data in Map Data Storage Area H55 b 3 (Paragraph[0288]) (S4). Here, the map data represents the surrounding area of thelocation indicated by the callee's calculated GPS data. Host H retrievesthe map data from Map Data Storage Area H55 b 3 (Paragraph [0288]) (S5),and sends the data to Callee's Device (S6). Upon receiving the map datafrom Host H (S7), Callee's Device stores the data in Callee's Map DataStorage Area 20655 b 8A (Paragraph [0280]) (S8). The sequence describedin the present paragraph is repeated periodically.

Paragraph [0309]—This Paragraph [0309] illustrates Callee's AudiovisualData Collecting Software 20655 c 5A stored in Callee's InformationDisplaying Software Storage Area 20655 cA (Paragraph [0285]) of Callee'sDevice, which collects the audiovisual data of the callee to be sent toCaller's Device via Antenna 218 (FIG. 1) thereof CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCallee's Device retrieves the callee's audiovisual data from CCD Unit214 and Microphone 215 (S1). CPU 211 then stores the callee's audio datain Callee's Audio Data Storage Area 20655 b 2 aA (Paragraph [0282])(S2), and the callee's visual data in Callee's Visual Data Storage Area20655 b 2 bA (Paragraph [0282]) (S3). The sequence described in thepresent paragraph is repeated periodically.

Paragraph [0310]—This Paragraph [0310] illustrates Callee's InformationSending/Receiving Software H55 c 6 a (Paragraph [0289]) stored inCaller/Callee Software Storage Area H55 c (Paragraph [0289]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and Callee's Information Sending/Receiving Software20655 c 6A (Paragraph [0285]) stored in Callee's Information DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20655 cA of Callee's Device, which sends andreceives the Callee's Information (which is defined hereinafter) betweenCallee's Device and Host H. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCallee's Device retrieves the permitted callee's personal data fromCallee's Personal Data Storage Area 20655 b 4A (Paragraph [0284]) (S1).CPU 211 retrieves the callee's calculated GPS data from Callee'sCalculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655 b 6A (Paragraph [0280]) (S2). CPU211 retrieves the map data from Callee's Map Data Storage Area 20655 b8A (Paragraph [0280]) (S3). CPU 211 retrieves the callee's audio datafrom Callee's Audio Data Storage Area 20655 b 2 aA (Paragraph [0282])(S4). CPU 211 retrieves the callee's visual data from Callee's VisualData Storage Area 20655 b 2 bA (Paragraph [0282]) (S5). CPU 211 thensends the data retrieved in S1 through S5 (collectively defined as the‘Callee's Information’ hereinafter) to Host H (S6). Upon receiving theCallee's Information from Callee's Device (S7), Host H stores theCallee's Information in Callee's Information Storage Area H55 b 2(Paragraph [0288]) (S8). The sequence described in the present paragraphis repeated periodically.

Paragraph [0311]—This Paragraph [0311] illustrates Callee's InformationSending/Receiving Software H55 c 6 a stored in Caller/Callee SoftwareStorage Area H55 c (Paragraph [0289]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) andCallee's Information Sending/Receiving Software 20655 c 6 a stored inCaller's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655 c (Paragraph[0277]) of Caller's Device, which sends and receives the Callee'sInformation between Host H and Caller's Device. In this embodiment, HostH retrieves the Callee's Information from Callee's Information StorageArea H55 b 2 (Paragraph [0288]) (S1), and sends the Callee's Informationto Caller's Device (S2). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device receivesthe Callee's Information from Host H (S3). CPU 211 stores the permittedcallee's personal data in Callee's Personal Data Storage Area 20655 b 4(Paragraph [0276]) (S4). CPU 211 stores the callee's calculated GPS datain Callee's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655 b 6 (Paragraph[0272]) (S5). CPU 211 stores the map data in Callee's Map Data StorageArea 20655 b 8 (Paragraph [0272]) (S6). CPU 211 stores the callee'saudio data in Callee's Audio Data Storage Area 20655 b 2 a (Paragraph[0274]) (S7). CPU 211 stores the callee's visual data in Callee's VisualData Storage Area 20655 b 2 b (Paragraph [0274]) (S8). The sequencedescribed in the present paragraph is repeated periodically.

Paragraph [0312]—This Paragraph [0312] illustrates Permitted Callee'sPersonal Data Displaying Software 20655 c 7 stored in Caller'sInformation Displaying Software Storage Area 20655 c (Paragraph [0277])of Caller's Device, which displays the permitted callee's personal dataon LCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Caller's Device retrieves the permitted callee's personaldata from Callee's Personal Data Storage Area 20655 b 4 (Paragraph[0276]) (S1). CPU 211 then displays the permitted callee's personal dataon LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). The sequence described in the presentparagraph is repeated periodically.

Paragraph [0313]—This Paragraph [0313] illustrates Map DisplayingSoftware 20655 c 8 stored in Caller's Information Displaying SoftwareStorage Area 20655 c (Paragraph [0277]) of Caller's Device, whichdisplays the map representing the surrounding area of the locationindicated by the callee's calculated GPS data. In this embodiment, CPU211 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device retrieves the callee's calculated GPSdata from Callee's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655 b 6 (Paragraph[0272]) (S1). CPU 211 then retrieves the map data from Callee's Map DataStorage Area 20655 b 8 (Paragraph [0272]) (S2), and arranges on the mapdata the callee's current location icon in accordance with the callee'scalculated GPS data (S3). Here, the callee's current location icon is anicon which represents the location of Callee's Device in the map data.The map with the callee's current location icon is displayed on LCD 201(FIG. 1) (S4). The sequence described in the present paragraph isrepeated periodically.

Paragraph [0314]—This Paragraph [0314] illustrates Callee's Audio DataOutputting Software 20655 c 9 stored in Caller's Information DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20655 c (Paragraph [0277]) of Caller's Device,which outputs the callee's audio data from Speaker 216 (FIG. 1) ofCaller's Device. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Deviceretrieves the callee's audio data from Callee's Audio Data Storage Area20655 b 2 a (Paragraph [0274]) (S1). CPU 211 then outputs the caller'saudio data from Speaker 216 (FIG. 1) (S2). The sequence described in thepresent paragraph is repeated periodically.

Paragraph [0315]—This Paragraph [0315] illustrates Callee's Visual DataDisplaying Software 20655 c 10 stored in Caller's Information DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20655 c (Paragraph [0277]) of Caller's Device,which displays the callee's visual data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Caller'sDevice. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Deviceretrieves the callee's visual data from Callee's Visual Data StorageArea 20655 b 2 b (Paragraph [0274]) (S1). CPU 211 then displays thecallee's visual data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). The sequence described inthe present paragraph is repeated periodically.

Paragraph [0316]—<<Shortcut Icon Displaying Function>>

Paragraph [0317]—Paragraph [0318] through Paragraph [0330] illustratethe shortcut icon displaying function which displays one or more ofshortcut icons on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200. The userof Communication Device 200 can execute the software programs in aconvenient manner by selecting (e.g., clicking or double clicking) theshortcut icons. The foregoing software programs may be any softwareprograms described in this specification.

Paragraph [0318]—This Paragraph [0318] illustrates the shortcut iconsdisplayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 byimplementing the present function. In this embodiment, three shortcuticons are displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1), i.e., Shortcut Icon#1, ShortcutIcon#2, and Shortcut Icon#3. The user of Communication Device 200 canexecute the software programs by selecting (e.g., clicking or doubleclicking) one of the shortcut icons. For example, assume that ShortcutIcon#1 represents MS Word 97. By selecting (e.g., clicking or doubleclicking) Shortcut Icon#1, the user can execute MS Word 97 installed inCommunication Device 200 or Host H. Three shortcut icons are illustratedin the present paragraph, however, only for purposes of simplifying theexplanation of the present function. Therefore, as many shortcut iconsequivalent to the number of the software programs described in thisspecification may be displayed on LCD 201, and the correspondingsoftware programs may be executed by implementing the present function.

Paragraph [0319]—Paragraph [0319] illustrates the storage area includedin RAM 206 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, RAM 206 includes Shortcut IconDisplaying Information Storage Area 20659 a of which the data and thesoftware programs stored therein are described in Paragraph [0320].

Paragraph [0320]—This Paragraph [0320] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Shortcut Icon Displaying Information Storage Area 20659 a(Paragraph [0319]). In this embodiment, Shortcut Icon DisplayingInformation Storage Area 20659 a includes Shortcut Icon Displaying DataStorage Area 20659 b and Shortcut Icon Displaying Software Storage Area20659 c. Shortcut Icon Displaying Data Storage Area 20659 b stores thedata necessary to implement the present function, such as the onesdescribed in Paragraph [0322]. Shortcut Icon Displaying Software StorageArea 20659 c stores the software programs necessary to implement thepresent function, such as the ones described in Paragraph [0328].

Paragraph [0321]—The data and/or the software programs stored inShortcut Icon Displaying Software Storage Area 20659 c (Paragraph[0320]) may be downloaded from Host H (Paragraph [0025]).

Paragraph [0322]—This Paragraph [0322] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Shortcut Icon Displaying Data Storage Area 20659 b(Paragraph [0320]). In this embodiment, Shortcut Icon Displaying DataStorage Area 20659 b includes Shortcut Icon Image Data Storage Area20659 b 1, Shortcut Icon Location Data Storage Area 20659 b 2, ShortcutIcon Link Data Storage Area 20659 b 3, and Selected Shortcut Icon DataStorage Area 20659 b 4. Shortcut Icon Image Data Storage Area 20659 b 1stores the data described in Paragraph [0323]. Shortcut Icon LocationData Storage Area 20659 b 2 stores the data described in Paragraph[0324]. Shortcut Icon Link Data Storage Area 20659 b 3 stores the datadescribed in Paragraph [0325]. Selected Shortcut Icon Data Storage Area20659 b 4 stores the data described in Paragraph [0326].

Paragraph [0323]—This Paragraph [0323] illustrates the data stored inShortcut Icon Image Data Storage Area 20659 b 1 (Paragraph [0322]). Inthis embodiment, Shortcut Icon Image Data Storage Area 20659 b 1comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Shortcut Icon ID’ and ‘Shortcut Icon ImageData’. Column ‘Shortcut Icon ID’ stores the shortcut icon IDs, and eachshortcut icon ID is the identification of the corresponding shortcuticon image data stored in column ‘Shortcut Icon Image Data’. Column‘Shortcut Icon Image Data’ stores the shortcut icon image data, and eachshortcut icon image data is the image data of the shortcut icondisplayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) as described in Paragraph [0318]. In thisembodiment, Shortcut Icon Image Data Storage Area 20659 b 1 stores thefollowing data: the shortcut icon ID ‘Shortcut Icon#1’ and thecorresponding shortcut icon image data ‘Shortcut Icon Image Data#1’; theshortcut icon ID ‘Shortcut Icon#2’ and the corresponding shortcut iconimage data ‘Shortcut Icon Image Data#2’; the shortcut icon ID ‘ShortcutIcon#3’ and the corresponding shortcut icon image data ‘Shortcut IconImage Data#3’; and the shortcut icon ID ‘Shortcut Icon#4’ and thecorresponding shortcut icon image data ‘Shortcut Icon Image Data#4’.

Paragraph [0324]—This Paragraph [0324] illustrates the data stored inShortcut Icon Location Data Storage Area 20659 b 2 (Paragraph [0322]).In this embodiment, Shortcut Icon Location Data Storage Area 20659 b 2comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Shortcut Icon ID’ and ‘Shortcut IconLocation Data’. Column ‘Shortcut Icon ID’ stores the shortcut icon IDsdescribed hereinbefore. Column ‘Shortcut Icon Location Data’ stores theshortcut icon location data, and each shortcut icon location dataindicates the location displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) in (x,y) format ofthe shortcut icon image data of the corresponding shortcut icon ID. Inthis embodiment, Shortcut Icon Location Data Storage Area 20659 b 2stores the following data: the shortcut icon ID ‘Shortcut Icon#1’ andthe corresponding shortcut icon location data ‘Shortcut Icon LocationData#1’; the shortcut icon ID ‘Shortcut Icon#2’ and the correspondingshortcut icon location data ‘Shortcut Icon Location Data#2’; theshortcut icon ID ‘Shortcut Icon#3’ and the corresponding shortcut iconlocation data ‘Shortcut Icon Location Data#3’; and the shortcut icon ID‘Shortcut Icon#4’ and the corresponding shortcut icon location data‘Shortcut Icon Location Data#4’.

Paragraph [0325]—This Paragraph [0325] illustrates the data stored inShortcut Icon Link Data Storage Area 20659 b 3 (Paragraph [0322]). Inthis embodiment, Shortcut Icon Link Data Storage Area 20659 b 3comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Shortcut Icon ID’ and ‘Shortcut Icon LinkData’. Column ‘Shortcut Icon ID’ stores the shortcut icon IDs describedhereinbefore. Column ‘Shortcut Icon Link Data’ stores the shortcut iconlink data, and each shortcut icon link data represents the location inCommunication Device 200 of the software program stored thereinrepresented by the shortcut icon of the corresponding shortcut icon ID.In this embodiment, Shortcut Icon Link Data Storage Area 20659 b 3stores the following data: the shortcut icon ID′ Shortcut Icon#1′ andthe corresponding shortcut icon link data ‘Shortcut Icon Link Data#1;the shortcut icon ID’ Shortcut Icon#2′ and the corresponding shortcuticon link data ‘Shortcut Icon Link Data#2; the shortcut icon ID’Shortcut Icon#3′ and the corresponding shortcut icon link data ‘ShortcutIcon Link Data#3; and the shortcut icon ID’ Shortcut Icon#4′ and thecorresponding shortcut icon link data ‘Shortcut Icon Link Data#4’. Theforegoing software program may be any software program described in thisspecification.

Paragraph [0326]—This Paragraph [0326] illustrates the data stored inSelected Shortcut Icon Data Storage Area 20659 b 4 (Paragraph [0322]).In this embodiment, Selected Shortcut Icon Data Storage Area 20659 b 4stores one or more of shortcut icon IDs. Only the shortcut icon imagedata of the shortcut icon IDs stored in Selected Shortcut Icon DataStorage Area 20659 b 4 are displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1). In thisembodiment, Selected Shortcut Icon Data Storage Area 20659 b 4 storesthe following data: the shortcut icon IDs ‘Shortcut Icon#1’, ‘ShortcutIcon#2’, and ‘Shortcut Icon#3’, which means that only the shortcut iconimage data corresponding to ‘Shortcut Icon#1’, ‘Shortcut Icon#2’, and‘Shortcut Icon#3’ are displayed on LCD 201.

Paragraph [0327]—This Paragraph [0328] illustrates the software programsstored in Shortcut Icon Displaying Software Storage Area 20659 c(Paragraph [0320]). In this embodiment, Shortcut Icon DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20659 c stores Shortcut Icon Displaying Software20659 c 1, Software Executing Software 20659 c 2, Shortcut Icon LocationData Changing Software 20659 c 3, and Software Executing Software 20659c 4. Shortcut Icon Displaying Software 20659 c 1 is the software programdescribed in Paragraph [0328]. Software Executing Software 20659 c 2 isthe software program described in Paragraph [0329]. Shortcut IconLocation Data Changing Software 20659 c 3 is the software programdescribed in Paragraph [0330]. Software Executing Software 20659 c 4 isthe software program described in Paragraph [0330].

Paragraph [0328]—This Paragraph [0328] illustrates Shortcut IconDisplaying Software 20659 c 1 stored in Shortcut Icon DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20659 c of Communication Device 200, whichdisplays the shortcut icon image data displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) refers tothe shortcut icon IDs stored in Selected Shortcut Icon Data Storage Area20659 b 4 (Paragraph [0326]) to identify the shortcut icon image data tobe displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). CPU 211 then retrieves theshortcut icon image data of the corresponding shortcut icon IDsidentified in S1 from Shortcut Icon Image Data Storage Area 20659 b 1(Paragraph [0323]) (S2). CPU 211 further retrieves the shortcut iconlocation data of the corresponding shortcut icon IDs identified in S1from Shortcut Icon Location Data Storage Area 20659 b 2 (Paragraph[0324]) (S3). CPU 211 displays on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) the shortcut iconimage data thereafter (S4).

Paragraph [0329]—This Paragraph [0329] illustrates Software ExecutingSoftware 20659 c 2 stored in Shortcut Icon Displaying Software StorageArea 20659 c of Communication Device 200, which executes thecorresponding software program upon selecting the shortcut icon imagedata displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200. In thisembodiment, the user of Communication Device 200 selects the shortcuticon image data displayed on LCD 201 by utilizing Input Device 210(FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) thenidentifies the shortcut icon ID of the shortcut icon image data selectedin S1 (S2). CPU 211 identifies the shortcut icon link data stored inShortcut Icon Link Data Storage Area 20659 b 3 (Paragraph [0325]) fromthe shortcut icon ID identified in S2 (S3), and executes thecorresponding software program (S4).

Paragraph [0330]—This Paragraph [0330] illustrates Shortcut IconLocation Data Changing Software 20659 c 3 stored in Shortcut IconDisplaying Software Storage Area 20659 c of Communication Device 200,which enables the user of Communication Device 200 to change thelocation of the shortcut icon image data displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1).In this embodiment, the user of Communication Device 200 selects theshortcut icon image data displayed on LCD 201 (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1)then identifies the shortcut icon ID of the shortcut icon image dataselected in S1 (S2). The user moves the shortcut icon selected in S1 byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system(S3). CPU 211 then identifies the new location thereof (S4), and updatesthe shortcut icon location data stored in Shortcut Icon Location DataStorage Area 20659 b 2 (Paragraph [0324]) (S5).

Paragraph [0331]—<<Task Tray Icon Displaying Function>>

Paragraph [0332]—Paragraph [0333] through Paragraph [0341] illustratethe task tray icon displaying function which displays one or more oftask tray icons on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200. Theuser of Communication Device 200 can identify the software programsexecuted in background in a convenient manner. The foregoing softwareprograms may be any software programs described in this specification.

Paragraph [0333]—This Paragraph [0333] illustrates the task tray iconsdisplayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 byimplementing the present function. In this embodiment, Display Area20160DA includes Task Tray Icons Display Area 20660DA1 which isdisplayed at the lower right portion of LCD 201. Three task tray iconsare displayed Task Tray Icons Display Area 20660DA1, i.e., Task TrayIcon#1, Task Tray Icon#2, and Task Tray Icon#3, by which the user ofCommunication Device 200 can identify the software programs executed inbackground in a convenient manner, i.e., by observing Task Tray IconsDisplay Area 20660DA1. Three task tray icons are illustrated in thepresent paragraph, however, only for purposes of simplifying theexplanation of the present function. Therefore, as many task tray iconsequivalent to the number of the software programs described in thisspecification may be displayed in Task Tray Icons Display Area 20660DA1,and the corresponding software programs executed in background byimplementing the present function.

Paragraph [0334]—This Paragraph [0334] illustrates the storage areaincluded in RAM 206 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, RAM 206 includes TaskTray Icon Displaying Information Storage Area 20660 a of which the dataand the software programs stored therein are described in Paragraph[0335].

Paragraph [0335]—This Paragraph [0335] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Task Tray Icon Displaying Information Storage Area 20660 a(Paragraph [0334]). In this embodiment, Task Tray Icon DisplayingInformation Storage Area 20660 a includes Task Tray Icon Displaying DataStorage Area 20660 b and Task Tray Icon Displaying Software Storage Area20660 c. Task Tray Icon Displaying Data Storage Area 20660 b stores thedata necessary to implement the present function, such as the onesdescribed in Paragraph [0336]. Task Tray Icon Displaying SoftwareStorage Area 20660 c stores the software programs necessary to implementthe present function, such as the ones described in Paragraph [0340].

Paragraph [0336]—This Paragraph [0336] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Task Tray Icon Displaying Data Storage Area 20660 b(Paragraph [0335]). In this embodiment, Task Tray Icon Displaying DataStorage Area 20660 b includes Task Tray Icon Image Data Storage Area20660 b 1, Task Tray Icon Link Data Storage Area 20660 b 3, and SelectedTask Tray Icon Data Storage Area 20660 b 4. Task Tray Icon Image DataStorage Area 20660 b 1 stores the data described in Paragraph [0337].Task Tray Icon Link Data Storage Area 20660 b 3 stores the datadescribed in Paragraph [0338]. Selected Task Tray Icon Data Storage Area20660 b 4 stores the data described in Paragraph [0339].

Paragraph [0337]—This Paragraph [0337] illustrates the data stored inTask Tray Icon Image Data Storage Area 20660 b 1 (Paragraph [0336]). Inthis embodiment, Task Tray Icon Image Data Storage Area 20660 b 1comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Task Tray Icon ID’ and ‘Task Tray IconImage Data’. Column ‘Task Tray Icon ID’ stores the task tray icon IDs,and each task tray icon ID is the identification of the correspondingtask tray icon image data stored in column ‘Task Tray Icon Image Data’.Column ‘Task Tray Icon Image Data’ stores the task tray icon image data,and each task tray icon image data is the image data of the task trayicon displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) as described in Paragraph [0333]. Inthis embodiment, Task Tray Icon Image Data Storage Area 20660 b 1 storesthe following data: the task tray icon ID ‘Task Tray Icon#1’ and thecorresponding task tray icon image data ‘Task Tray Icon Image Data#1’;the task tray icon ID ‘Task Tray Icon#2’ and the corresponding task trayicon image data ‘Task Tray Icon Image Data#2’; the task tray icon ID‘Task Tray Icon#3’ and the corresponding task tray icon image data ‘TaskTray Icon Image Data#3’; and the task tray icon ID ‘Task Tray Icon#4’and the corresponding task tray icon image data ‘Task Tray Icon ImageData#4’.

Paragraph [0338]—This Paragraph [0338] illustrates the data stored inTask Tray Icon Link Data Storage Area 20660 b 3 (Paragraph [0336]). Inthis embodiment, Task Tray Icon Link Data Storage Area 20660 b 3comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Task Tray Icon ID’ and ‘Task Tray IconLink Data’. Column ‘Task Tray Icon ID’ stores the task tray icon IDsdescribed hereinbefore. Column ‘Task Tray Icon Link Data’ stores thetask tray icon link data, and each task tray icon link data representsthe location in Communication Device 200 of the software program storedtherein represented by the task tray icon of the corresponding task trayicon ID. In this embodiment, Task Tray Icon Link Data Storage Area 20660b 3 stores the following data: the task tray icon ID ‘Task Tray Icon#1’and the corresponding task tray icon link data ‘Task Tray Icon LinkData#1; the task tray icon ID’ Task Tray Icon#2′ and the correspondingtask tray icon link data ‘Task Tray Icon Link Data#2; the task tray iconID’ Task Tray Icon#3′ and the corresponding task tray icon link data‘Task Tray Icon Link Data#3; and the task tray icon ID’ Task TrayIcon#4′ and the corresponding task tray icon link data ‘Task Tray IconLink Data#4’. The foregoing software programs may be of any softwareprograms described in this specification.

Paragraph [0339]—This Paragraph [0339] illustrates the data stored inSelected Task Tray Icon Data Storage Area 20660 b 4 (Paragraph [0336]).In this embodiment, Selected Task Tray Icon Data Storage Area 20660 b 4stores one or more of task tray icon IDs. Only the task tray icon imagedata of the task tray icon IDs stored in Selected Task Tray Icon DataStorage Area 20660 b 4 are displayed in Task Tray Icons Display Area20660DA1 (Paragraph [0333]). In this embodiment, Selected Task Tray IconData Storage Area 20660 b 4 stores the following data: the task trayicon IDs ‘Task Tray Icon#1’, ‘Task Tray Icon#2’, and ‘Task Tray Icon#3’,which means that only the task tray icon image data corresponding to‘Task Tray Icon#1’, ‘Task Tray Icon#2’, and ‘Task Tray Icon#3’ aredisplayed in Task Tray Icons Display Area 20660DA1.

Paragraph [0340]—This Paragraph [0340] illustrates the software programsstored in Task Tray Icon Displaying Software Storage Area 20660 c(Paragraph [0335]). In this embodiment, Task Tray Icon DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20660 c stores Software Executing Software 20660 c2 and Software Executing Software 20660 c 4. Software Executing Software20660 c 2 is the software program described in Paragraph [0341].Software Executing Software 20660 c 4 is the software program describedin Paragraph [0341].

Paragraph [0341]—This Paragraph [0341] illustrates Software ExecutingSoftware 20660 c 2 stored in Task Tray Icon Displaying Software StorageArea 20660 c of Communication Device 200, which executes thecorresponding software program in background and displays thecorresponding task tray icon image data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) refers toSelected Task Tray Icon Data Storage Area 20660 b 4 (Paragraph [0339])(S1) to identify the task tray IDs stored therein (S2). CPU 211identifies the task tray icon link data stored in Task Tray Icon LinkData Storage Area 20660 b 3 (Paragraph [0338]) of the corresponding tasktray icon IDs identified in S2 (S3), and executes the correspondingsoftware program (S4). CPU 211 then retrieves the task tray icon imagedata of the corresponding task tray icon IDs identified in S2 from TaskTray Icon Image Data Storage Area 20660 b 1 (Paragraph [0337]) (S5). CPU211 displays the task tray icon image data in Task Tray Icons DisplayArea 20660DA1 (Paragraph [0333]) thereafter (S6).

Paragraph [0342]—<<OS Updating Function>>

Paragraph [0343]—Paragraph [0344] through Paragraph [0404] illustratethe OS updating function which updates the operating system ofCommunication Device 200 in a wireless fashion. In other words,Communication Device 200 downloads the portion of the operating systemof the latest version from Host H (Paragraph [0025]) via Antenna 218(FIG. 1).

Paragraph [0344]—This Paragraph [0344] illustrates the storage areasincluded in RAM 206 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, RAM 206 includesOperating System 20663OS of which the data stored therein are describedin Paragraph [0345] and Paragraph [0345], and OS Updating InformationStorage Area 20663 a of which the data and the software programs storedtherein are described in Paragraph [0346].

Paragraph [0345]—This Paragraph [0345] illustrates the data stored inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0344]). In this embodiment,Operating System 20663OS includes Battery Controller 20663OSa, CCD UnitController 20663OSb, Flash Light Unit Controller 20663OSc, IndicatorController 20663OSd, Input Device Controller 20663OSe, LCD Controller20663OSf, LED Controller 20663OSg, Memory Card Interface Controller20663OSh, Microphone Controller 20663OSi, Photometer Controller20663OSj, RAM Controller 20663OSk, ROM Controller 20663OSl, SignalProcessor Controller 20663OSm, Signal Processor Controller 20663OSn,Solar Panel Controller 20663OSo, Speaker Controller 20663OSp, VibratorController 20663OSq, Video Processor Controller 20663OSr, WirelessReceiver Controller 20663OSs, Wireless Receiver Controller 20663OSt,Wireless Receiver Controller 20663OSu, Wireless Transmitter Controller20663OSv, Wireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSw, and WirelessTransmitter Controller 20663OSx. Battery Controller 20663OSa is acontroller which controls Battery 230 (not shown). CCD Unit Controller20663OSb is a controller which controls CCD Unit 214 (not shown). FlashLight Unit Controller 20663OSc is a controller which controls FlashLight Unit 220 (not shown). Indicator Controller 20663OSd is acontroller which controls Indicator 212 (not shown). Input DeviceController 20663OSe is a controller which controls Input Device 210 (notshown). LCD Controller 20663OSf is a controller which controls LCD 201(not shown). LED Controller 20663OSg is a controller which controls LED219 (not shown). Memory Card Interface Controller 20663OSh is acontroller which controls Memory Card Interface 221 (not shown).Microphone Controller 20663OSi is a controller which controls Microphone215 (not shown). Photometer Controller 20663OSj is a controller whichcontrols Photometer 232 (not shown). RAM Controller 20663OSk is acontroller which controls RAM 206 (not shown). ROM Controller 20663OSlis a controller which controls ROM 207 (not shown). Signal ProcessorController 20663OSm is a controller which controls Signal Processor 205(not shown). Signal Processor Controller 20663OSn is a controller whichcontrols Signal Processor 208 (not shown). Solar Panel Controller20663OSo is a controller which controls Solar Panel 229 (not shown).

Speaker Controller 20663OSp is a controller which controls Speaker 216L(not shown). Vibrator Controller 20663OSq is a controller which controlsVibrator 217 (not shown). Video Processor Controller 20663OSr is acontroller which controls Video Processor 202 (not shown). WirelessReceiver Controller 20663OSs is a controller which controls WirelessReceiver 224 (not shown). Wireless Receiver Controller 20663OSt is acontroller which controls Wireless Receiver 225 (not shown). WirelessReceiver Controller 20663OSu is a controller which controls WirelessReceiver 226 (not shown). Wireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSv is acontroller which controls Wireless Transmitter 222 (not shown). WirelessTransmitter Controller 20663OSw is a controller which controls WirelessTransmitter 223 (not shown). Wireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSx isa controller which controls Wireless Transmitter 227 (not shown). Forthe avoidance of doubt, the data stored in Operating System 20663OS areillustrative, and other types of data, which are updated by implementingthe present function, are also stored therein, such as DLLs, drivers,security implementing program.

Paragraph [0346]—This Paragraph [0346] illustrates the storage areasincluded in OS Updating Information Storage Area 20663 a (Paragraph[0344]). In this embodiment, OS Updating Information Storage Area 20663a includes OS Updating Data Storage Area 20663 b and OS UpdatingSoftware Storage Area 20663 c. OS Updating Data Storage Area 20663 bstores the data necessary to implement the present function on the sideof Communication Device 200, such as the ones described in Paragraph[0348]. OS Updating Software Storage Area 20663 c stores the softwareprograms necessary to implement the present function on the side ofCommunication Device 200, such as the ones described in Paragraph [0350]and Paragraph [0350].

Paragraph [0347]—The data and/or the software programs stored in OSUpdating Software Storage Area 20663 c (Paragraph [0346]) may bedownloaded from Host H (Paragraph [0025]).

Paragraph [0348]—This Paragraph [0348] illustrates the storage areaincluded in OS Updating Data Storage Area 20663 b (Paragraph [0346]). Inthis embodiment, OS Updating Data Storage Area 20663 b includes OSVersion Data Storage Area 20663 b 1. OS Version Data Storage Area 20663b 1 stores the data described in Paragraph [0349] and Paragraph [0349].

Paragraph [0349]—This Paragraph [0349] illustrates the data stored in OSVersion Data Storage Area 20663 b 1 (Paragraph [0348]). In thisembodiment, OS Version Data Storage Area 20663 b 1 includes BatteryController Version Data 20663 b 1 a, CCD Unit Controller Version Data20663 b 1 b, Flash Light Unit Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 c,Indicator Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 d, Input Device ControllerVersion Data 20663 b 1 e, LCD Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 f, LEDController Version Data 20663 b 1 g, Memory Card Interface ControllerVersion Data 20663 b 1 h, Microphone Controller Version Data 20663 b 1i, Photometer Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 j, RAM ControllerVersion Data 20663 b 1 k, ROM Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 l,Signal Processor Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 m, Signal ProcessorController Version Data 20663 b 1 n, Solar Panel Controller Version Data20663 b 1 o, Speaker Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 p, VibratorController Version Data 20663 b 1 q, Video Processor Controller VersionData 20663 b 1 r, Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 s,Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 t, Wireless ReceiverController Version Data 20663 b 1 u, Wireless Transmitter ControllerVersion Data 20663 b 1 v, Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data20663 b 1 w, and Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data 20663 b 1x. Battery Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 a is the version datarepresenting the current version of Battery Controller 20663OSa(Paragraph [0345]). CCD Unit Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 b is theversion data representing the current version of CCD Unit Controller20663OSb (Paragraph [0345]). Flash Light Unit Controller Version Data20663 b 1 c is the version data representing the current version ofFlash Light Unit Controller 20663OSc (Paragraph [0345]). IndicatorController Version Data 20663 b 1 d is the version data representing thecurrent version of Indicator Controller 20663OSd (Paragraph [0345]).Input Device Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 e is the version datarepresenting the current version of Input Device Controller 20663OSe(Paragraph [0345]). LCD Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 f is theversion data representing the current version of LCD Controller 20663OSf(Paragraph [0345]). LED Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 g is theversion data representing the current version of LED Controller 20663OSg(Paragraph [0345]). Memory Card Interface Controller Version Data 20663b 1 h is the version data representing the current version of MemoryCard Interface Controller 20663OSh (Paragraph [0345]). MicrophoneController Version Data 20663 b 1 i is the version data representing thecurrent version of Microphone Controller 20663OSi (Paragraph [0345]).Photometer Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 j is the version datarepresenting the current version of Photometer Controller 20663OSj(Paragraph [0345]). RAM Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 k is theversion data representing the current version of RAM Controller 20663OSk(Paragraph [0345]). ROM Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 l is theversion data representing the current version of ROM Controller 20663OSl(Paragraph [0345]). Signal Processor Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 mis the version data representing the current version of Signal ProcessorController 20663OSm (Paragraph [0345]). Signal Processor ControllerVersion Data 20663 b 1 n is the version data representing the currentversion of Signal Processor Controller 20663OSn (Paragraph [0345]).Solar Panel Controller Version Data 20663 b 10 is the version datarepresenting the current version of Solar Panel Controller 20663OSo(Paragraph [0345]). Speaker Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 p is theversion data representing the current version of Speaker Controller20663OSp (Paragraph [0345]). Vibrator Controller Version Data 20663 b 1q is the version data representing the current version of VibratorController 20663OSq (Paragraph [0345]). Video Processor ControllerVersion Data 20663 b 1 r is the version data representing the currentversion of Video Processor Controller 20663OSr (Paragraph [0345]).Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 s is the versiondata representing the current version of Wireless Receiver Controller20663OSs (Paragraph [0345]). Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data20663 b 1 t is the version data representing the current version ofWireless Receiver Controller 20663OSt (Paragraph [0345]). WirelessReceiver Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 u is the version datarepresenting the current version of Wireless Receiver Controller20663OSu (Paragraph [0345]). Wireless Transmitter Controller VersionData 20663 b 1 y is the version data representing the current version ofWireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSy (Paragraph [0345]). WirelessTransmitter Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 w is the version datarepresenting the current version of Wireless Transmitter Controller20663OSw (Paragraph [0345]). Wireless Transmitter Controller VersionData 20663 b 1 x is the version data representing the current version ofWireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSx (Paragraph [0345]). Here, theversion data is composed of numeric data, such as ‘1’, ‘2’, and ‘3’,wherein ‘1’ represents version ‘1.0’, ‘2’ represents version ‘2.0’, and‘3’ represents version ‘3.0’.

Paragraph [0350]—This Paragraph [0350] illustrates the software programsstored in OS Updating Software Storage Area 20663 c (Paragraph [0346]).In this embodiment, OS Updating Software Storage Area 20663 c storesBattery Controller Updating Software 20663 c 1 a, CCD Unit ControllerUpdating Software 20663 c 1 b, Flash Light Unit Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663 c 1 c, Indicator Controller Updating Software 20663 c 1d, Input Device Controller Updating Software 20663 c 1 e, LCD ControllerUpdating Software 20663 c 1 f, LED Controller Updating Software 20663 c1 g, Memory Card Interface Controller Updating Software 20663 c 1 h,Microphone Controller Updating Software 20663 c 1 i, PhotometerController Updating Software 20663 c 1 j, RAM Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663 c 1 k, ROM Controller Updating Software 20663 c 1 l,Signal Processor Controller Updating Software 20663 c 1 m, SignalProcessor Controller Updating Software 20663 c 1 n, Solar PanelController Updating Software 20663 c 1 o, Speaker Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663 c 1 p, Vibrator Controller Updating Software 20663 c 1 q,Video Processor Controller Updating Software 20663 c 1 r, WirelessReceiver Controller Updating Software 20663 c 1 s, Wireless ReceiverController Updating Software 20663 c 1 t, Wireless Receiver ControllerUpdating Software 20663 c 1 u, Wireless Transmitter Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663 c 1 v, Wireless Transmitter Controller Updating Software20663 c 1 w, and Wireless Transmitter Controller Updating Software 20663c 1 x. Battery Controller Updating Software 20663 c 1 a is the softwareprogram described in Paragraph [0357] and Paragraph [0358]. CCD UnitController Updating Software 20663 c 1 b is the software programdescribed in Paragraph [0359] and Paragraph [0360]. Flash Light UnitController Updating Software 20663 c 1 c is the software programdescribed in Paragraph [0361] and Paragraph [0362]. Indicator ControllerUpdating Software 20663 c 1 d is the software program described inParagraph [0363] and Paragraph [0364]. Input Device Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663 c 1 e is the software program described in Paragraph[0365] and Paragraph [0366]. LCD Controller Updating Software 20663 c 1f is the software program described in Paragraph [0367] and Paragraph[0368]. LED Controller Updating Software 20663 c 1 g is the softwareprogram described in Paragraph [0369] and Paragraph [0370]. Memory CardInterface Controller Updating Software 20663 c 1 h is the softwareprogram described in Paragraph [0371] and Paragraph [0372]. MicrophoneController Updating Software 20663 c 1 i is the software programdescribed in Paragraph [0373] and Paragraph [0374]. PhotometerController Updating Software 20663 c 1 j is the software programdescribed in Paragraph [0375] and Paragraph [0376]. RAM ControllerUpdating Software 20663 c 1 k is the software program described inParagraph [0377] and Paragraph [0378]. ROM Controller Updating Software20663 c 1 l is the software program described in Paragraph [0379] andParagraph [0380]. Signal Processor Controller Updating Software 20663 c1 m is the software program described in Paragraph [0381] and Paragraph[0382]. Signal Processor Controller Updating Software 20663 c 1 n is thesoftware program described in Paragraph [0383] and Paragraph [0384].Solar Panel Controller Updating Software 20663 c 10 is the softwareprogram described in Paragraph and Paragraph [0386]. Speaker ControllerUpdating Software 20663 c 1 p is the software program described inParagraph [0387] and Paragraph [0388]. Vibrator Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663 c 1 q is the software program described in Paragraph[0389] and Paragraph [0390]. Video Processor Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663 c 1 r is the software program described in Paragraph[0391] and Paragraph [0392]. Wireless Receiver Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663 c 1 s is the software program described in Paragraph[0393] and Paragraph [0394]. Wireless Receiver Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663 c 1 t is the software program described in Paragraph andParagraph [0396]. Wireless Receiver Controller Updating Software 20663 c1 u is the software program described in Paragraph [0397] and Paragraph[0398]. Wireless Transmitter Controller Updating Software 20663 c 1 v isthe software program described in Paragraph [0399]and Paragraph [0400].Wireless Transmitter Controller Updating Software 20663 c 1 w is thesoftware program described in Paragraph [0401] and Paragraph [0402].Wireless Transmitter Controller Updating Software 20663 c 1 x is thesoftware program described in Paragraph [0403] and Paragraph [0404].

Paragraph [0351]—This Paragraph [0351] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Host H (Paragraph [0025]). In this embodiment, Host Hincludes Operating System H63OS of which the data stored therein aredescribed in Paragraph [0352] and Paragraph [0352], and OS UpdatingInformation Storage Area H63 a of which the data and the softwareprograms stored therein are described in Paragraph [0353].

Paragraph [0352]—This Paragraph [0352] illustrates the data stored inOperating System H63OS (Paragraph [0351]). In this embodiment, OperatingSystem H63OS includes Battery Controller H63OSa, CCD Unit ControllerH63OSb, Flash Light Unit Controller H63OSc, Indicator Controller H63OSd,Input Device Controller H63OSe, LCD Controller H63OSf, LED ControllerH63OSg, Memory Card Interface Controller H63OSh, Microphone ControllerH63OSi, Photometer Controller H63OSj, RAM Controller H63OSk, ROMController H63051, Signal Processor Controller H63OSm, Signal ProcessorController H63OSn, Solar Panel Controller H63OSo, Speaker ControllerH63OSp, Vibrator Controller H63OSq, Video Processor Controller H63OSr,Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSs, Wireless Receiver ControllerH63OSt, Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSu, Wireless TransmitterController H63OSv, Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSw, and WirelessTransmitter Controller H63OSx. Battery Controller H63OSa is thecontroller of the latest version which controls Battery 230 (not shown).CCD Unit Controller H63OSb is the controller of the latest version whichcontrols CCD Unit 214 (not shown). Flash Light Unit Controller H63OSc isthe controller of the latest version which controls Flash Light Unit 220(not shown). Indicator Controller H63OSd is the controller of the latestversion which controls Indicator 212 (not shown). Input DeviceController H63OSe is the controller of the latest version which controlsInput Device 210 (not shown). LCD Controller H63OSf is the controller ofthe latest version which controls LCD 201 (not shown). LED ControllerH63OSg is the controller of the latest version which controls LED 219(not shown). Memory Card Interface Controller H63OSh is the controllerof the latest version which controls Memory Card Interface 221 (notshown). Microphone Controller H63OSi is the controller of the latestversion which controls Microphone 215 (not shown). Photometer ControllerH63OSj is the controller of the latest version which controls Photometer232 (not shown). RAM Controller H63OSk is the controller of the latestversion which controls Host H (not shown). ROM Controller H63OS1 is thecontroller of the latest version which controls ROM 207 (not shown).Signal Processor Controller H63OSm is the controller of the latestversion which controls Signal Processor 205 (not shown). SignalProcessor Controller H63OSn is the controller of the latest versionwhich controls Signal Processor 208 (not shown). Solar Panel ControllerH63OSo is the controller of the latest version which controls SolarPanel 229 (not shown). Speaker Controller H63OSp is the controller ofthe latest version which controls Speaker 216L (not shown). VibratorController H63OSq is the controller of the latest version which controlsVibrator 217 (not shown). Video Processor Controller H63OSr is thecontroller of the latest version which controls Video Processor 202 (notshown). Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSs is the controller of thelatest version which controls Wireless Receiver 224 (not shown).Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSt is the controller of the latestversion which controls Wireless Receiver 225 (not shown). WirelessReceiver Controller H63OSu is the controller of the latest version whichcontrols Wireless Receiver 226 (not shown). Wireless TransmitterController H63OSv is the controller of the latest version which controlsWireless Transmitter 222 (not shown). Wireless Transmitter ControllerH63OSw is the controller of the latest version which controls WirelessTransmitter 223 (not shown). Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSx isthe controller of the latest version which controls Wireless Transmitter227 (not shown). The data stored in Operating System Storage Area H63OSare updated periodically. For the avoidance of doubt, the data stored inOperating System H63OS are illustrative, and other types of data, whichare utilized to update Operating System H63OS of Communication Device200 by implementing the present function, are also stored therein, suchas DLLs, drivers, security implementing program. The data stored inOperating System H63OS are updated periodically thereby the data arealways of the latest version.

Paragraph [0353]—This Paragraph [0353] illustrates the storage areasincluded in OS Updating Information Storage Area H63 a (Paragraph[0351]). In this embodiment, OS Updating Information Storage Area H63 aincludes OS Updating Data Storage Area H63 b and OS Updating SoftwareStorage Area H63 c. OS Updating Data Storage Area H63 b stores the datanecessary to implement the present function on the side of Host H(Paragraph [0025]), such as the ones described in Paragraph [0354]. OSUpdating Software Storage Area H63 c stores the software programsnecessary to implement the present function on the side of Host H, suchas the ones described in Paragraph [0356] and Paragraph [0356].

Paragraph [0354]—This Paragraph [0354] illustrates the storage areaincluded in OS Updating Data Storage Area H63 b (Paragraph [0353]). Inthis embodiment, OS Updating Data Storage Area H63 b includes OS VersionData Storage Area H63 b 1. OS Version Data Storage Area H63 b 1 storesthe data described in Paragraph [0355] and Paragraph [0355].

Paragraph [0355]—This Paragraph [0355] illustrates the data stored in OSVersion Data Storage Area H63 b 1 (Paragraph [0354]). In thisembodiment, OS Version Data Storage Area H63 b 1 includes BatteryController Version Data H63 b 1 a, CCD Unit Controller Version Data H63b 1 b, Flash Light Unit Controller Version Data H63 b 1 c, IndicatorController Version Data H63 b 1 d, Input Device Controller Version DataH63 b 1 e, LCD Controller Version Data H63 b 1 f, LED Controller VersionData H63 b 1 g, Memory Card Interface Controller Version Data H63 b 1 h,Microphone Controller Version Data H63 b 1 i, Photometer ControllerVersion Data H63 b 1 j, RAM Controller Version Data H63 b 1 k, ROMController Version Data H63 b 1 l, Signal Processor Controller VersionData H63 b 1 m, Signal Processor Controller Version Data H63 b 1 n,Solar Panel Controller Version Data H63 b 1 o, Speaker ControllerVersion Data H63 b 1 p, Vibrator Controller Version Data H63 b 1 q,Video Processor Controller Version Data H63 b 1 r, Wireless ReceiverController Version Data H63 b 1 s, Wireless Receiver Controller VersionData H63 b 1 t, Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data H63 b 1 u,Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data H63 b 1 v, WirelessTransmitter Controller Version Data H63 b 1 w, and Wireless TransmitterController Version Data H63 b 1 x. Battery Controller Version Data H63 b1 a is the version data representing the latest version of BatteryController H63OSa (Paragraph [0352]). CCD Unit Controller Version DataH63 b 1 b is the version data representing the latest version of CCDUnit Controller H63OSb (Paragraph [0352]). Flash Light Unit ControllerVersion Data H63 b 1 c is the version data representing the latestversion of Flash Light Unit Controller H63OSc (Paragraph [0352]).Indicator Controller Version Data H63 b 1 d is the version datarepresenting the latest version of Indicator Controller H63OSd(Paragraph [0352]). Input Device Controller Version Data H63 b 1 e isthe version data representing the latest version of Input DeviceController H63OSe (Paragraph [0352]). LCD Controller Version Data H63 b1 f is the version data representing the latest version of LCDController H63OSf (Paragraph [0352]). LED Controller Version Data H63 b1 g is the version data representing the latest version of LEDController H63OSg (Paragraph [0352]). Memory Card Interface ControllerVersion Data H63 b 1 h is the version data representing the latestversion of Memory Card Interface Controller H63OSh (Paragraph [0352]).Microphone Controller Version Data H63 b 1 i is the version datarepresenting the latest version of Microphone Controller H63OSi(Paragraph [0352]). Photometer Controller Version Data H63 b 1 j is theversion data representing the latest version of Photometer ControllerH63OSj (Paragraph [0352]). RAM Controller Version Data H63 b 1 k is theversion data representing the latest version of RAM Controller H63OSk(Paragraph [0352]). ROM Controller Version Data H63 b 1 l is the versiondata representing the latest version of ROM Controller H63OS1 (Paragraph[0352]). Signal Processor Controller Version Data H63 b 1 m is theversion data representing the latest version of Signal ProcessorController H63OSm (Paragraph [0352]). Signal Processor ControllerVersion Data H63 b 1 n is the version data representing the latestversion of Signal Processor Controller H63OSn (Paragraph [0352]). SolarPanel Controller Version Data H63 b 1 o is the version data representingthe latest version of Solar Panel Controller H63OSo (Paragraph [0352]).Speaker Controller Version Data H63 b 1 p is the version datarepresenting the latest version of Speaker Controller H63OSp (Paragraph[0352]). Vibrator Controller Version Data H63 b 1 q is the version datarepresenting the latest version of Vibrator Controller H63OSq (Paragraph[0352]). Video Processor Controller Version Data H63 b 1 r is theversion data representing the latest version of Video ProcessorController H63OSr (Paragraph [0352]). Wireless Receiver ControllerVersion Data H63 b 1 s is the version data representing the latestversion of Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSs (Paragraph [0352]).Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data H63 b 1 t is the version datarepresenting the latest version of Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSt(Paragraph [0352]). Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data H63 b 1 uis the version data representing the latest version of Wireless ReceiverController H63OSu (Paragraph [0352]). Wireless Transmitter ControllerVersion Data H63 b 1 v is the version data representing the latestversion of Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSv (Paragraph [0352]).Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data H63 b 1 w is the versiondata representing the latest version of Wireless Transmitter ControllerH63OSw (Paragraph [0352]). Wireless Transmitter Controller Version DataH63 b 1 x is the version data representing the latest version ofWireless Transmitter Controller H63OSx (Paragraph [0352]). Here, theversion data is composed of numeric data, such as ‘1’, ‘2’, and ‘3’,wherein ‘1’ represents version ‘1.0’, ‘2’ represents version ‘2.0’, and‘3’ represents version ‘3.0’. The data stored in OS Version Data StorageArea H63 b 1 are updated periodically.

Paragraph [0356]—This Paragraph [0356] illustrates the software programsstored in OS Updating Software Storage Area H63 c (Paragraph [0353]). Inthis embodiment, OS Updating Software Storage Area H63 c stores BatteryController Updating Software H63 c 1 a, CCD Unit Controller UpdatingSoftware H63 c 1 b, Flash Light Unit Controller Updating Software H63 c1 c, Indicator Controller Updating Software H63 c 1 d, Input DeviceController Updating Software H63 c 1 e, LCD Controller Updating SoftwareH63 c 1 f, LED Controller Updating Software H63 c 1 g, Memory CardInterface Controller Updating Software H63 c 1 h, Microphone ControllerUpdating Software H63 c 1 i, Photometer Controller Updating Software H63c 1 j, RAM Controller Updating Software H63 c 1 k, ROM ControllerUpdating Software H63 c 1 l, Signal Processor Controller UpdatingSoftware H63 c 1 m, Signal Processor Controller Updating Software H63 c1 n, Solar Panel Controller Updating Software H63 c 1 o, SpeakerController Updating Software H63 c 1 p, Vibrator Controller UpdatingSoftware H63 c 1 q, Video Processor Controller Updating Software H63 c 1r, Wireless Receiver Controller Updating Software H63 c 1 s, WirelessReceiver Controller Updating Software H63 c 1 t, Wireless ReceiverController Updating Software H63 c 1 u, Wireless Transmitter ControllerUpdating Software H63 c 1 v, Wireless Transmitter Controller UpdatingSoftware H63 c 1 w, and Wireless Transmitter Controller UpdatingSoftware H63 c 1 x. Battery Controller Updating Software H63 c 1 a isthe software program described in Paragraph [0357] and Paragraph [0358].CCD Unit Controller Updating Software H63 c 1 b is the software programdescribed in Paragraph [0359] and Paragraph [0360]. Flash Light UnitController Updating Software H63 c 1 c is the software program describedin Paragraph [0361] and Paragraph [0362]. Indicator Controller UpdatingSoftware H63 c 1 d is the software program described in Paragraph [0363]and Paragraph [0364]. Input Device Controller Updating Software H63 c 1e is the software program described in Paragraph [0365] and Paragraph[0366]. LCD Controller Updating Software H63 c 1 f is the softwareprogram described in Paragraph [0367] and Paragraph [0368]. LEDController Updating Software H63 c 1 g is the software program describedin Paragraph [0369] and Paragraph [0370]. Memory Card InterfaceController Updating Software H63 c 1 h is the software program describedin Paragraph [0371] and Paragraph [0372]. Microphone Controller UpdatingSoftware H63 c 1 i is the software program described in Paragraph [0373]and Paragraph [0374]. Photometer Controller Updating Software H63 c 1 jis the software program described in Paragraph [0375] and Paragraph[0376]. RAM Controller Updating Software H63 c 1 k is the softwareprogram described in Paragraph [0377] and Paragraph [0378]. ROMController Updating Software H63 c 1 l is the software program describedin Paragraph [0379] and Paragraph [0380]. Signal Processor ControllerUpdating Software H63 c 1 m is the software program described inParagraph [0381] and Paragraph [0382]. Signal Processor ControllerUpdating Software H63 c 1 n is the software program described inParagraph [0383] and Paragraph [0384]. Solar Panel Controller UpdatingSoftware H63 c 1 o is the software program described in Paragraph [0385]and Paragraph [0386]. Speaker Controller Updating Software H63 c 1 p isthe software program described in Paragraph and Paragraph [0388].Vibrator Controller Updating Software H63 c 1 q is the software programdescribed in Paragraph [0389] and Paragraph [0390]. Video ProcessorController Updating Software H63 c 1 r is the software program describedin Paragraph [0391] and Paragraph [0392]. Wireless Receiver ControllerUpdating Software H63 c 1 s is the software program described inParagraph [0393] and Paragraph [0394]. Wireless Receiver ControllerUpdating Software H63 c 1 t is the software program described inParagraph [0395] and Paragraph [0396]. Wireless Receiver ControllerUpdating Software H63 c 1 u is the software program described inParagraph [0397] and Paragraph [0398]. Wireless Transmitter ControllerUpdating Software H63 c 1 v is the software program described inParagraph [0399] and Paragraph [0400]. Wireless Transmitter ControllerUpdating Software H63 c 1 w is the software program described inParagraph [0401] and Paragraph [0402]. Wireless Transmitter ControllerUpdating Software H63 c 1 x is the software program described inParagraph [0403] and Paragraph [0404]. The foregoing software programsare automatically implemented periodically or implemented manually byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system.

Paragraph [0357]—This Paragraph [0357] illustrates Battery ControllerUpdating Software H63 c 1 a (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H (Paragraph[0025]) and Battery Controller Updating Software 20663 c 1 a (Paragraph[0350]) of Communication Device 200, which update Battery Controller20663OSa stored in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) ofCommunication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 retrieves Battery Controller Version Data 20663b 1 a from OS Version Data Storage Area 20663 b 1 (Paragraph [0349]) andsends the data to Host H (S1). Upon receiving Battery Controller VersionData 20663 b 1 a (Paragraph [0349]) from Communication Device 200 (S2),Host H compares Battery Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 a (Paragraph[0349]) with Battery Controller Version Data H63 b 1 a stored in OSVersion Data Storage Area H63 b 1 (Paragraph [0355]) of Host H (S3).Assuming that Host H detects in S3 that Battery Controller Version Data20663 b 1 a of Communication Device 200 is of an old version. Host Hretrieves Battery Controller H63OSa, which is of the latest version,from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0352]), and sendsthe controller to Communication Device 200 (S4). Upon receiving BatteryController H63OSa from Host H (S5), CPU 211 stores Battery ControllerH63OSa as Battery Controller 20663OSa in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0345]) (S6). The old version of Battery Controller 20663OSa(Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0358]—This Paragraph [0358] illustrates another embodiment ofBattery Controller Updating Software H63 c 1 a (Paragraph [0356]) ofHost H (Paragraph [0025]) and Battery Controller Updating Software 20663c 1 a (Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, which updateBattery Controller 20663OSa stored in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a Battery ControllerUpdate Request, which is received by Host H (S1). Here, the BatteryController Update Request is a request to send Battery ControllerVersion Data H63 b 1 a (Paragraph [0355]) stored in Host H toCommunication Device 200. In response to the request, Host H retrievesBattery Controller Version Data H63 b 1 a from OS Version Data StorageArea H63 b 1 (Paragraph [0355]), and sends the data to CommunicationDevice 200 (S2). Upon receiving Battery Controller Version Data H63 b 1a from Host H (S3), CPU 211 compares Battery Controller Version Data H63b 1 a with Battery Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 a stored in OSVersion Data Storage Area 20663 b 1 (Paragraph [0349]) of CommunicationDevice 200 (S4). Assuming that CPU211 detects in S4 that BatteryController Version Data 20663 b 1 a of Communication Device 200 is of anold version. CPU 211 sends a New Battery Controller Sending Request,which is received by Host H (S5). Here, the New Battery ControllerSending Request is a request to send Battery Controller H63OSa(Paragraph [0352]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Host Hretrieves Battery Controller H63OSa (Paragraph [0352]), which is of thelatest version, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph[0352]), and sends the controller to Communication Device 200 (S6). Uponreceiving Battery Controller H63OSa from Host H (S7), CPU 211 storesBattery Controller H63OSa as Battery Controller 20663OSa in OperatingSystem 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) (S8). The old version of BatteryController 20663OSa (Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0359]—This Paragraph [0359] illustrates CCD Unit ControllerUpdating Software H63 c 1 b (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H (Paragraph[0025]) and CCD Unit Controller Updating Software 20663 c 1 b (Paragraph[0350]) of Communication Device 200, which update CCD Unit Controller20663OSb stored in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) ofCommunication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 retrieves CCD Unit Controller Version Data20663 b 1 b from OS Version Data Storage Area 20663 b 1 (Paragraph[0349]) and sends the data to Host H (S1). Upon receiving CCD UnitController Version Data 20663 b 1 b (Paragraph [0349]) fromCommunication Device 200 (S2), Host H compares CCD Unit ControllerVersion Data 20663 b 1 b (Paragraph [0349]) with CCD Unit ControllerVersion Data H63 b 1 b stored in OS Version Data Storage Area H63 b 1(Paragraph [0355]) of Host H (S3). Assuming that Host H detects in S3that CCD Unit Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 b of CommunicationDevice 200 is of an old version. Host H retrieves CCD Unit ControllerH63OSb, which is of the latest version, from Operating System StorageArea H63OS (Paragraph [0352]), and sends the controller to CommunicationDevice 200 (S4). Upon receiving CCD Unit Controller H63OSb from Host H(S5), CPU 211 stores CCD Unit Controller H63OSb as CCD Unit Controller20663OSb in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) (S6). The oldversion of CCD Unit Controller 20663OSb (Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0360]—This Paragraph [0360] illustrates another embodiment ofCCD Unit Controller Updating Software H63 c 1 b (Paragraph [0356]) ofHost H (Paragraph [0025]) and CCD Unit Controller Updating Software20663 c 1 b (Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, which updateCCD Unit Controller 20663OSb stored in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a CCD Unit ControllerUpdate Request, which is received by Host H (S1). Here, the CCD UnitController Update Request is a request to send CCD Unit ControllerVersion Data H63 b 1 b (Paragraph [0355]) stored in Host H toCommunication Device 200. In response to the request, Host H retrievesCCD Unit Controller Version Data H63 b 1 b from OS Version Data StorageArea H63 b 1 (Paragraph [0355]), and sends the data to CommunicationDevice 200 (S2). Upon receiving CCD Unit Controller Version Data H63 b 1b from Host H (S3), CPU 211 compares CCD Unit Controller Version DataH63 b 1 b with CCD Unit Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 b stored in OSVersion Data Storage Area 20663 b 1 (Paragraph [0349]) of CommunicationDevice 200 (S4). Assuming that CPU211 detects in S4 that CCD UnitController Version Data 20663 b 1 b of Communication Device 200 is of anold version. CPU 211 sends a New CCD Unit Controller Sending Request,which is received by Host H (S5). Here, the New CCD Unit ControllerSending Request is a request to send CCD Unit Controller H63OSb(Paragraph [0352]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Host Hretrieves CCD Unit Controller H63OSb (Paragraph [0352]), which is of thelatest version, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph[0352]), and sends the controller to Communication Device 200 (S6). Uponreceiving CCD Unit Controller H63OSb from Host H (S7), CPU 211 storesCCD Unit Controller H63OSb as CCD Unit Controller 20663OSb in OperatingSystem 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) (S8). The old version of CCD UnitController 20663OSb (Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0361]—This Paragraph [0361] illustrates Flash Light UnitController Updating Software H63 c 1 c (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and Flash Light Unit Controller Updating Software20663 c 1 c (Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, which updateFlash Light Unit Controller 20663OSc stored in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrieves Flash Light UnitController Version Data 20663 b 1 c from OS Version Data Storage Area20663 b 1 (Paragraph [0349]) and sends the data to Host H (S1). Uponreceiving Flash Light Unit Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 c(Paragraph [0349]) from Communication Device 200 (S2), Host H comparesFlash Light Unit Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 c (Paragraph [0349])with Flash Light Unit Controller Version Data H63 b 1 c stored in OSVersion Data Storage Area H63 b 1 (Paragraph [0355]) of Host H (S3).Assuming that Host H detects in S3 that Flash Light Unit ControllerVersion Data 20663 b 1 c of Communication Device 200 is of an oldversion. Host H retrieves Flash Light Unit Controller H63OSc, which isof the latest version, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS(Paragraph [0352]), and sends the controller to Communication Device 200(S4). Upon receiving Flash Light Unit Controller H63OSc from Host H(S5), CPU 211 stores Flash Light Unit Controller H63OSc as Flash LightUnit Controller 20663OSc in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345])(S6). The old version of Flash Light Unit Controller 20663OSc (Paragraph[0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0362]—This Paragraph [0362] illustrates another embodiment ofFlash Light Unit Controller Updating Software H63 c 1 c (Paragraph[0356]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) and Flash Light Unit ControllerUpdating Software 20663 c 1 c (Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device200, which update Flash Light Unit Controller 20663OSc stored inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200.In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends aFlash Light Unit Controller Update Request, which is received by Host H(S1). Here, the Flash Light Unit Controller Update Request is a requestto send Flash Light Unit Controller Version Data H63 b 1 c (Paragraph[0355]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. In response to therequest, Host H retrieves Flash Light Unit Controller Version Data H63 b1 c from OS Version Data Storage Area H63 b 1 (Paragraph [0355]), andsends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2). Upon receiving FlashLight Unit Controller Version Data H63 b 1 c from Host H (S3), CPU 211compares Flash Light Unit Controller Version Data H63 b 1 c with FlashLight Unit Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 c stored in OS Version DataStorage Area 20663 b 1 (Paragraph [0349]) of Communication Device 200(S4). Assuming that CPU211 detects in S4 that Flash Light UnitController Version Data 20663 b 1 c of Communication Device 200 is of anold version. CPU 211 sends a New Flash Light Unit Controller SendingRequest, which is received by Host H (S5). Here, the New Flash LightUnit Controller Sending Request is a request to send Flash Light UnitController H63OSc (Paragraph [0352]) stored in Host H to CommunicationDevice 200. Host H retrieves Flash Light Unit Controller H63OSc(Paragraph [0352]), which is of the latest version, from OperatingSystem Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0352]), and sends the controllerto Communication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving Flash Light UnitController H63OSc from Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores Flash Light UnitController H63OSc as Flash Light Unit Controller 20663OSc in OperatingSystem 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) (S8). The old version of Flash LightUnit Controller 20663OSc (Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0363]—This Paragraph [0363] illustrates Indicator ControllerUpdating Software H63 c 1 d (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H (Paragraph[0025]) and Indicator Controller Updating Software 20663 c 1 d(Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, which update IndicatorController 20663OSd stored in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0345]) of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrieves Indicator ControllerVersion Data 20663 b 1 d from OS Version Data Storage Area 20663 b 1(Paragraph [0349]) and sends the data to Host H (S1). Upon receivingIndicator Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 d (Paragraph [0349]) fromCommunication Device 200 (S2), Host H compares Indicator ControllerVersion Data 20663 b 1 d (Paragraph [0349]) with Indicator ControllerVersion Data H63 b 1 d stored in OS Version Data Storage Area H63 b 1(Paragraph [0355]) of Host H (S3). Assuming that Host H detects in S3that Indicator Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 d of CommunicationDevice 200 is of an old version. Host H retrieves Indicator ControllerH63OSd, which is of the latest version, from Operating System StorageArea H63OS (Paragraph [0352]), and sends the controller to CommunicationDevice 200 (S4). Upon receiving Indicator Controller H63OSd from Host H(S5), CPU 211 stores Indicator Controller H63OSd as Indicator Controller20663OSd in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) (S6). The oldversion of Indicator Controller 20663OSd (Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0364]—This Paragraph [0364] illustrates another embodiment ofIndicator Controller Updating Software H63 c 1 d (Paragraph [0356]) ofHost H (Paragraph [0025]) and Indicator Controller Updating Software20663 c 1 d (Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, which updateIndicator Controller 20663OSd stored in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a Indicator ControllerUpdate Request, which is received by Host H (S1). Here, the IndicatorController Update Request is a request to send Indicator ControllerVersion Data H63 b 1 d (Paragraph [0355]) stored in Host H toCommunication Device 200. In response to the request, Host H retrievesIndicator Controller Version Data H63 b 1 d from OS Version Data StorageArea H63 b 1 (Paragraph [0355]), and sends the data to CommunicationDevice 200 (S2). Upon receiving Indicator Controller Version Data H63 b1 d from Host H (S3), CPU 211 compares Indicator Controller Version DataH63 b 1 d with Indicator Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 d stored inOS Version Data Storage Area 20663 b 1 (Paragraph [0349]) ofCommunication Device 200 (S4). Assuming that CPU211 detects in S4 thatIndicator Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 d of Communication Device200 is of an old version. CPU 211 sends a New Indicator ControllerSending Request, which is received by Host H (S5). Here, the NewIndicator Controller Sending Request is a request to send IndicatorController H63OSd (Paragraph [0352]) stored in Host H to CommunicationDevice 200. Host H retrieves Indicator Controller H63OSd (Paragraph[0352]), which is of the latest version, from Operating System StorageArea H63OS (Paragraph [0352]), and sends the controller to CommunicationDevice 200 (S6). Upon receiving Indicator Controller H63OSd from Host H(S7), CPU 211 stores Indicator Controller H63OSd as Indicator Controller20663OSd in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) (S8). The oldversion of Indicator Controller 20663OSd (Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0365]—This Paragraph [0365] illustrates Input DeviceController Updating Software H63 c 1 e (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and Input Device Controller Updating Software 20663 c1 e (Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, which update InputDevice Controller 20663OSe stored in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0345]) of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrieves Input Device ControllerVersion Data 20663 b 1 e from OS Version Data Storage Area 20663 b 1(Paragraph [0349]) and sends the data to Host H (S1). Upon receivingInput Device Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 e (Paragraph [0349]) fromCommunication Device 200 (S2), Host H compares Input Device ControllerVersion Data 20663 b 1 e (Paragraph [0349]) with Input Device ControllerVersion Data H63 b 1 e stored in OS Version Data Storage Area H63 b 1(Paragraph [0355]) of Host H (S3). Assuming that Host H detects in S3that Input Device Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 e of CommunicationDevice 200 is of an old version. Host H retrieves Input DeviceController H63OSe, which is of the latest version, from Operating SystemStorage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0352]), and sends the controller toCommunication Device 200 (S4). Upon receiving Input Device ControllerH63OSe from Host H (S5), CPU 211 stores Input Device Controller H63OSeas Input Device Controller 20663OSe in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0345]) (S6). The old version of Input Device Controller20663OSe (Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0366]—This Paragraph [0366] illustrates another embodiment ofInput Device Controller Updating Software H63 c 1 e (Paragraph [0356])of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) and Input Device Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663 c 1 e (Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200,which update Input Device Controller 20663OSe stored in Operating System20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a InputDevice Controller Update Request, which is received by Host H (S1).Here, the Input Device Controller Update Request is a request to sendInput Device Controller Version Data H63 b 1 e (Paragraph [0355]) storedin Host H to Communication Device 200. In response to the request, HostH retrieves Input Device Controller Version Data H63 b 1 e from OSVersion Data Storage Area H63 b 1 (Paragraph [0355]), and sends the datato Communication Device 200 (S2). Upon receiving Input Device ControllerVersion Data H63 b 1 e from Host H (S3), CPU 211 compares Input DeviceController Version Data H63 b 1 e with Input Device Controller VersionData 20663 b 1 e stored in OS Version Data Storage Area 20663 b 1(Paragraph [0349]) of Communication Device 200 (S4). Assuming thatCPU211 detects in S4 that Input Device Controller Version Data 20663 b 1e of Communication Device 200 is of an old version. CPU 211 sends a NewInput Device Controller Sending Request, which is received by Host H(S5). Here, the New Input Device Controller Sending Request is a requestto send Input Device Controller H63OSe (Paragraph [0352]) stored in HostH to Communication Device 200. Host H retrieves Input Device ControllerH63OSe (Paragraph [0352]), which is of the latest version, fromOperating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0352]), and sends thecontroller to Communication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving Input DeviceController H63OSe from Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores Input DeviceController H63OSe as Input Device Controller 20663OSe in OperatingSystem 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) (S8). The old version of Input DeviceController 20663OSe (Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0367]—This Paragraph [0367] illustrates LCD ControllerUpdating Software H63 c 1 f (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H (Paragraph[0025]) and LCD Controller Updating Software 20663 c 1 f (Paragraph[0350]) of Communication Device 200, which update LCD Controller20663OSf stored in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) ofCommunication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 retrieves LCD Controller Version Data 20663 b 1f from OS Version Data Storage Area 20663 b 1 (Paragraph [0349]) andsends the data to Host H (S1). Upon receiving LCD Controller VersionData 20663 b 1 f (Paragraph [0349]) from Communication Device 200 (S2),Host H compares LCD Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 f (Paragraph[0349]) with LCD Controller Version Data H63 b 1 f stored in OS VersionData Storage Area H63 b 1 (Paragraph [0355]) of Host H (S3). Assumingthat Host H detects in S3 that LCD Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 fof Communication Device 200 is of an old version. Host H retrieves LCDController H63OSf, which is of the latest version, from Operating SystemStorage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0352]), and sends the controller toCommunication Device 200 (S4). Upon receiving LCD Controller H63OSf fromHost H (S5), CPU 211 stores LCD Controller H63OSf as LCD Controller20663OSf in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) (S6). The oldversion of LCD Controller 20663OSf (Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0368]—This Paragraph [0368] illustrates another embodiment ofLCD Controller Updating Software H63 c 1 f (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and LCD Controller Updating Software 20663 c 1 f(Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, which update LCDController 20663OSf stored in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0345]) of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a LCD Controller UpdateRequest, which is received by Host H (S1). Here, the LCD ControllerUpdate Request is a request to send LCD Controller Version Data H63 b 1f (Paragraph [0355]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Inresponse to the request, Host H retrieves LCD Controller Version DataH63 b 1 f from OS Version Data Storage Area H63 b 1 (Paragraph [0355]),and sends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2). Upon receiving LCDController Version Data H63 b 1 f from Host H (S3), CPU 211 compares LCDController Version Data H63 b 1 f with LCD Controller Version Data 20663b 1 f stored in OS Version Data Storage Area 20663 b 1 (Paragraph[0349]) of Communication Device 200 (S4). Assuming that CPU211 detectsin S4 that LCD Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 f of CommunicationDevice 200 is of an old version. CPU 211 sends a New LCD ControllerSending Request, which is received by Host H (S5). Here, the New LCDController Sending Request is a request to send LCD Controller H63OSf(Paragraph [0352]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Host Hretrieves LCD Controller H63OSf (Paragraph [0352]), which is of thelatest version, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph[0352]), and sends the controller to Communication Device 200 (S6). Uponreceiving LCD Controller H63OSf from Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores LCDController H63OSf as LCD Controller 20663OSf in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0345]) (S8). The old version of LCD Controller 20663OSf(Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0369]—This Paragraph [0369] illustrates LED ControllerUpdating Software H63 c 1 g (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H (Paragraph[0025]) and LED Controller Updating Software 20663 c 1 g (Paragraph[0350]) of Communication Device 200, which update LED Controller20663OSg stored in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) ofCommunication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 retrieves LED Controller Version Data 20663 b 1g from OS Version Data Storage Area 20663 b 1 (Paragraph [0349]) andsends the data to Host H (S1). Upon receiving LED Controller VersionData 20663 b 1 g (Paragraph [0349]) from Communication Device 200 (S2),Host H compares LED Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 g (Paragraph[0349]) with LED Controller Version Data H63 b 1 g stored in OS VersionData Storage Area H63 b 1 (Paragraph [0355]) of Host H (S3). Assumingthat Host H detects in S3 that LED Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 gof Communication Device 200 is of an old version. Host H retrieves LEDController H63OSg, which is of the latest version, from Operating SystemStorage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0352]), and sends the controller toCommunication Device 200 (S4). Upon receiving LED Controller H63OSg fromHost H (S5), CPU 211 stores LED Controller H63OSg as LED Controller20663OSg in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) (S6). The oldversion of LED Controller 20663OSg (Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0370]—This Paragraph [0370] illustrates another embodiment ofLED Controller Updating Software H63 c 1 g (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and LED Controller Updating Software 20663 c 1 g(Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, which update LEDController 20663OSg stored in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0345]) of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a LED Controller UpdateRequest, which is received by Host H (S1). Here, the LED ControllerUpdate Request is a request to send LED Controller Version Data H63 b 1g (Paragraph [0355]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Inresponse to the request, Host H retrieves LED Controller Version DataH63 b 1 g from OS Version Data Storage Area H63 b 1 (Paragraph [0355]),and sends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2). Upon receiving LEDController Version Data H63 b 1 g from Host H (S3), CPU 211 compares LEDController Version Data H63 b 1 g with LED Controller Version Data 20663b 1 g stored in OS Version Data Storage Area 20663 b 1 (Paragraph[0349]) of Communication Device 200 (S4). Assuming that CPU211 detectsin S4 that LED Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 g of CommunicationDevice 200 is of an old version. CPU 211 sends a New LED ControllerSending Request, which is received by Host H (S5). Here, the New LEDController Sending Request is a request to send LED Controller H63OSg(Paragraph [0352]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Host Hretrieves LED Controller H63OSg (Paragraph [0352]), which is of thelatest version, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph[0352]), and sends the controller to Communication Device 200 (S6). Uponreceiving LED Controller H63OSg from Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores LEDController H63OSg as LED Controller 20663OSg in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0345]) (S8). The old version of LED Controller 20663OSg(Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0371]—This Paragraph [0371] illustrates Memory Card InterfaceController Updating Software H63 c 1 h (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and Memory Card Interface Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663 c 1 h (Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200,which update Memory Card Interface Controller 20663OSh stored inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200.In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200retrieves Memory Card Interface Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 h fromOS Version Data Storage Area 20663 b 1 (Paragraph [0349]) and sends thedata to Host H (S1). Upon receiving Memory Card Interface ControllerVersion Data 20663 b 1 h (Paragraph [0349]) from Communication Device200 (S2), Host H compares Memory Card Interface Controller Version Data20663 b 1 h (Paragraph [0349]) with Memory Card Interface ControllerVersion Data H63 b 1 h stored in OS Version Data Storage Area H63 b 1(Paragraph [0355]) of Host H (S3). Assuming that Host H detects in S3that Memory Card Interface Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 h ofCommunication Device 200 is of an old version. Host H retrieves MemoryCard Interface Controller H63OSh, which is of the latest version, fromOperating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0352]), and sends thecontroller to Communication Device 200 (S4). Upon receiving Memory CardInterface Controller H63OSh from Host H (S5), CPU 211 stores Memory CardInterface Controller H63OSh as Memory Card Interface Controller 20663OShin Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) (S6). The old version ofMemory Card Interface Controller 20663OSh (Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0372]—This Paragraph [0372] illustrates another embodiment ofMemory Card Interface Controller Updating Software H63 c 1 h (Paragraph[0356]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) and Memory Card InterfaceController Updating Software 20663 c 1 h (Paragraph [0350]) ofCommunication Device 200, which update Memory Card Interface Controller20663OSh stored in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) ofCommunication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 sends a Memory Card Interface Controller UpdateRequest, which is received by Host H (S1). Here, the Memory CardInterface Controller Update Request is a request to send Memory CardInterface Controller Version Data H63 b 1 h (Paragraph [0355]) stored inHost H to Communication Device 200. In response to the request, Host Hretrieves Memory Card Interface Controller Version Data H63 b 1 h fromOS Version Data Storage Area H63 b 1 (Paragraph [0355]), and sends thedata to Communication Device 200 (S2). Upon receiving Memory CardInterface Controller Version Data H63 b 1 h from Host H (S3), CPU 211compares Memory Card Interface Controller Version Data H63 b 1 h withMemory Card Interface Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 h stored in OSVersion Data Storage Area 20663 b 1 (Paragraph [0349]) of CommunicationDevice 200 (S4). Assuming that CPU211 detects in S4 that Memory CardInterface Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 h of Communication Device200 is of an old version. CPU 211 sends a New Memory Card InterfaceController Sending Request, which is received by Host H (S5). Here, theNew Memory Card Interface Controller Sending Request is a request tosend Memory Card Interface Controller H63OSh (Paragraph [0352]) storedin Host H to Communication Device 200. Host H retrieves Memory CardInterface Controller H63OSh (Paragraph [0352]), which is of the latestversion, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0352]),and sends the controller to Communication Device 200 (S6). Uponreceiving Memory Card Interface Controller H63OSh from Host H (S7), CPU211 stores Memory Card Interface Controller H63OSh as Memory CardInterface Controller 20663OSh in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0345]) (S8). The old version of Memory Card Interface Controller20663OSh (Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0373]—This Paragraph [0373] illustrates Microphone ControllerUpdating Software H63 c 1 i (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H (Paragraph[0025]) and Microphone Controller Updating Software 20663 c 1 i(Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, which update MicrophoneController 20663OSi stored in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0345]) of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrieves Microphone ControllerVersion Data 20663 b 1 i from OS Version Data Storage Area 20663 b 1(Paragraph [0349]) and sends the data to Host H (S1). Upon receivingMicrophone Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 i (Paragraph [0349]) fromCommunication Device 200 (S2), Host H compares Microphone ControllerVersion Data 20663 b 1 i (Paragraph [0349]) with Microphone ControllerVersion Data H63 b 1 i stored in OS Version Data Storage Area H63 b 1(Paragraph [0355]) of Host H (S3). Assuming that Host H detects in S3that Microphone Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 i of CommunicationDevice 200 is of an old version. Host H retrieves Microphone ControllerH63OSi, which is of the latest version, from Operating System StorageArea H63OS (Paragraph [0352]), and sends the controller to CommunicationDevice 200 (S4). Upon receiving Microphone Controller H63OSi from Host H(S5), CPU 211 stores Microphone Controller H63OSi as MicrophoneController 20663OSi in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) (S6).The old version of Microphone Controller 20663OSi (Paragraph [0345]) isdeleted.

Paragraph [0374]—This Paragraph [0374] illustrates another embodiment ofMicrophone Controller Updating Software H63 c 1 i (Paragraph [0356]) ofHost H (Paragraph [0025]) and Microphone Controller Updating Software20663 c 1 i (Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, which updateMicrophone Controller 20663OSi stored in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a Microphone ControllerUpdate Request, which is received by Host H (S1). Here, the MicrophoneController Update Request is a request to send Microphone ControllerVersion Data H63 b 1 i (Paragraph [0355]) stored in Host H toCommunication Device 200. In response to the request, Host H retrievesMicrophone Controller Version Data H63 b 1 i from OS Version DataStorage Area H63 b 1 (Paragraph [0355]), and sends the data toCommunication Device 200 (S2). Upon receiving Microphone ControllerVersion Data H63 b 1 i from Host H (S3), CPU 211 compares MicrophoneController Version Data H63 b 1 i with Microphone Controller VersionData 20663 b 1 i stored in OS Version Data Storage Area 20663 b 1(Paragraph [0349]) of Communication Device 200 (S4). Assuming thatCPU211 detects in S4 that Microphone Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 iof Communication Device 200 is of an old version. CPU 211 sends a NewMicrophone Controller Sending Request, which is received by Host H (S5).Here, the New Microphone Controller Sending Request is a request to sendMicrophone Controller H63OSi (Paragraph [0352]) stored in Host H toCommunication Device 200. Host H retrieves Microphone Controller H63OSi(Paragraph [0352]), which is of the latest version, from OperatingSystem Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0352]), and sends the controllerto Communication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving Microphone ControllerH63OSi from Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores Microphone Controller H63OSi asMicrophone Controller 20663OSi in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0345]) (S8). The old version of Microphone Controller 20663OSi(Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0375]—This Paragraph [0375] illustrates Photometer ControllerUpdating Software H63 c 1 j (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H (Paragraph[0025]) and Photometer Controller Updating Software 20663 c 1 j(Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, which update PhotometerController 20663OSj stored in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0345]) of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrieves Photometer ControllerVersion Data 20663 b 1 j from OS Version Data Storage Area 20663 b 1(Paragraph [0349]) and sends the data to Host H (S1). Upon receivingPhotometer Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 j (Paragraph [0349]) fromCommunication Device 200 (S2), Host H compares Photometer ControllerVersion Data 20663 b 1 j (Paragraph [0349]) with Photometer ControllerVersion Data H63 b 1 j stored in OS Version Data Storage Area H63 b 1(Paragraph [0355]) of Host H (S3). Assuming that Host H detects in S3that Photometer Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 j of CommunicationDevice 200 is of an old version. Host H retrieves Photometer ControllerH63OSj, which is of the latest version, from Operating System StorageArea H63OS (Paragraph [0352]), and sends the controller to CommunicationDevice 200 (S4). Upon receiving Photometer Controller H63OSj from Host H(S5), CPU 211 stores Photometer Controller H63OSj as PhotometerController 20663OSj in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) (S6).The old version of Photometer Controller 20663OSj (Paragraph [0345]) isdeleted.

Paragraph [0376]—This Paragraph [0376] illustrates another embodiment ofPhotometer Controller Updating Software H63 c 1 j (Paragraph [0356]) ofHost H (Paragraph [0025]) and Photometer Controller Updating Software20663 c 1 j (Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, which updatePhotometer Controller 20663OSj stored in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a Photometer ControllerUpdate Request, which is received by Host H (S1). Here, the PhotometerController Update Request is a request to send Photometer ControllerVersion Data H63 b 1 j (Paragraph [0355]) stored in Host H toCommunication Device 200. In response to the request, Host H retrievesPhotometer Controller Version Data H63 b 1 j from OS Version DataStorage Area H63 b 1 (Paragraph [0355]), and sends the data toCommunication Device 200 (S2). Upon receiving Photometer ControllerVersion Data H63 b 1 j from Host H (S3), CPU 211 compares PhotometerController Version Data H63 b 1 j with Photometer Controller VersionData 20663 b 1 j stored in OS Version Data Storage Area 20663 b 1(Paragraph [0349]) of Communication Device 200 (S4). Assuming thatCPU211 detects in S4 that Photometer Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 jof Communication Device 200 is of an old version. CPU 211 sends a NewPhotometer Controller Sending Request, which is received by Host H (S5).Here, the New Photometer Controller Sending Request is a request to sendPhotometer Controller H63OSj (Paragraph [0352]) stored in Host H toCommunication Device 200. Host H retrieves Photometer Controller H63OSj(Paragraph [0352]), which is of the latest version, from OperatingSystem Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0352]), and sends the controllerto Communication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving Photometer ControllerH63OSj from Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores Photometer Controller H63OSj asPhotometer Controller 20663OSj in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0345]) (S8). The old version of Photometer Controller 20663OSj(Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0377]—This Paragraph [0377] illustrates RAM ControllerUpdating Software H63 c 1 k (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H (Paragraph[0025]) and RAM Controller Updating Software 20663 c 1 k (Paragraph[0350]) of Communication Device 200, which update RAM Controller20663OSk stored in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) ofCommunication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 retrieves RAM Controller Version Data 20663 b 1k from OS Version Data Storage Area 20663 b 1 (Paragraph [0349]) andsends the data to Host H (S1). Upon receiving RAM Controller VersionData 20663 b 1 k (Paragraph [0349]) from Communication Device 200 (S2),Host H compares RAM Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 k (Paragraph[0349]) with RAM Controller Version Data H63 b 1 k stored in OS VersionData Storage Area H63 b 1 (Paragraph [0355]) of Host H (S3). Assumingthat Host H detects in S3 that RAM Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 kof Communication Device 200 is of an old version. Host H retrieves RAMController H63OSk, which is of the latest version, from Operating SystemStorage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0352]), and sends the controller toCommunication Device 200 (S4). Upon receiving RAM Controller H63OSk fromHost H (S5), CPU 211 stores RAM Controller H63OSk as RAM Controller20663OSk in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) (S6). The oldversion of RAM Controller 20663OSk (Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0378]—This Paragraph [0378] illustrates another embodiment ofRAM Controller Updating Software H63 c 1 k (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and RAM Controller Updating Software 20663 c 1 k(Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, which update RAMController 20663OSk stored in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0345]) of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a RAM Controller UpdateRequest, which is received by Host H (S1). Here, the RAM ControllerUpdate Request is a request to send RAM Controller Version Data H63 b 1k (Paragraph [0355]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Inresponse to the request, Host H retrieves RAM Controller Version DataH63 b 1 k from OS Version Data Storage Area H63 b 1 (Paragraph [0355]),and sends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2). Upon receiving RAMController Version Data H63 b 1 k from Host H (S3), CPU 211 compares RAMController Version Data H63 b 1 k with RAM Controller Version Data 20663b 1 k stored in OS Version Data Storage Area 20663 b 1 (Paragraph[0349]) of Communication Device 200 (S4). Assuming that CPU211 detectsin S4 that RAM Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 k of CommunicationDevice 200 is of an old version. CPU 211 sends a New RAM ControllerSending Request, which is received by Host H (S5). Here, the New RAMController Sending Request is a request to send RAM Controller H63OSk(Paragraph [0352]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Host Hretrieves RAM Controller H63OSk (Paragraph [0352]), which is of thelatest version, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph[0352]), and sends the controller to Communication Device 200 (S6). Uponreceiving RAM Controller H63OSk from Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores RAMController H63OSk as RAM Controller 20663OSk in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0345]) (S8). The old version of RAM Controller 20663OSk(Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0379]—This Paragraph [0379] illustrates ROM ControllerUpdating Software H63 c 1 l (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H (Paragraph[0025]) and ROM Controller Updating Software 20663 c 1 l (Paragraph[0350]) of Communication Device 200, which update ROM Controller20663OSl stored in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) ofCommunication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 retrieves ROM Controller Version Data 20663 b 1l from OS Version Data Storage Area 20663 b 1 (Paragraph [0349]) andsends the data to Host H (S1). Upon receiving ROM Controller VersionData 20663 b 1 l (Paragraph [0349]) from Communication Device 200 (S2),Host H compares ROM Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 l (Paragraph[0349]) with ROM Controller Version Data H63 b 1 l stored in OS VersionData Storage Area H63 b 1 (Paragraph [0355]) of Host H (S3). Assumingthat Host H detects in S3 that ROM Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 lof Communication Device 200 is of an old version. Host H retrieves ROMController H63OS1, which is of the latest version, from Operating SystemStorage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0352]), and sends the controller toCommunication Device 200 (S4). Upon receiving ROM Controller H63OS1 fromHost H (S5), CPU 211 stores ROM Controller H63OS1 as ROM Controller20663OSl in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) (S6). The oldversion of ROM Controller 20663OSl (Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0380]—This Paragraph [0380] illustrates another embodiment ofROM Controller Updating Software H63 c 1 l (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and ROM Controller Updating Software 20663 c 1 l(Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, which update ROMController 20663OSl stored in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0345]) of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a ROM Controller UpdateRequest, which is received by Host H (S1). Here, the ROM ControllerUpdate Request is a request to send ROM Controller Version Data H63 b 1l (Paragraph [0355]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Inresponse to the request, Host H retrieves ROM Controller Version DataH63 b 1 l from OS Version Data Storage Area H63 b 1 (Paragraph [0355]),and sends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2). Upon receiving ROMController Version Data H63 b 1 l from Host H (S3), CPU 211 compares ROMController Version Data H63 b 1 l with ROM Controller Version Data 20663b 1 l stored in OS Version Data Storage Area 20663 b 1 (Paragraph[0349]) of Communication Device 200 (S4). Assuming that CPU211 detectsin S4 that ROM Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 l of CommunicationDevice 200 is of an old version. CPU 211 sends a New ROM ControllerSending Request, which is received by Host H (S5). Here, the New ROMController Sending Request is a request to send ROM Controller H63OS1(Paragraph [0352]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Host Hretrieves ROM Controller H63OS1 (Paragraph [0352]), which is of thelatest version, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph[0352]), and sends the controller to Communication Device 200 (S6). Uponreceiving ROM Controller H63OS1 from Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores ROMController H63OS1 as ROM Controller 20663OSl in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0345]) (S8). The old version of ROM Controller 20663OSl(Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0381]—This Paragraph [0381] illustrates Signal ProcessorController Updating Software H63 c 1 m (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and Signal Processor Controller Updating Software20663 c 1 m (Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, which updateSignal Processor Controller 20663OSm stored in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrieves Signal ProcessorController Version Data 20663 b 1 m from OS Version Data Storage Area20663 b 1 (Paragraph [0349]) and sends the data to Host H (S1). Uponreceiving Signal Processor Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 m(Paragraph [0349]) from Communication Device 200 (S2), Host H comparesSignal Processor Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 m (Paragraph [0349])with Signal Processor Controller Version Data H63 b 1 m stored in OSVersion Data Storage Area H63 b 1 (Paragraph [0355]) of Host H (S3).Assuming that Host H detects in S3 that Signal Processor ControllerVersion Data 20663 b 1 m of Communication Device 200 is of an oldversion. Host H retrieves Signal Processor Controller H63OSm, which isof the latest version, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS(Paragraph [0352]), and sends the controller to Communication Device 200(S4). Upon receiving Signal Processor Controller H63OSm from Host H(S5), CPU 211 stores Signal Processor Controller H63OSm as SignalProcessor Controller 20663OSm in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0345]) (S6). The old version of Signal Processor Controller 20663OSm(Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0382]—This Paragraph [0382] illustrates another embodiment ofSignal Processor Controller Updating Software H63 c 1 m (Paragraph[0356]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) and Signal Processor ControllerUpdating Software 20663 c 1 m (Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device200, which update Signal Processor Controller 20663OSm stored inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200.In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends aSignal Processor Controller Update Request, which is received by Host H(S1). Here, the Signal Processor Controller Update Request is a requestto send Signal Processor Controller Version Data H63 b 1 m(Paragraph[0355]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. In response to therequest, Host H retrieves Signal Processor Controller Version Data H63 b1 m from OS Version Data Storage Area H63 b 1 (Paragraph [0355]), andsends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2). Upon receiving SignalProcessor Controller Version Data H63 b 1 m from Host H (S3), CPU 211compares Signal Processor Controller Version Data H63 b 1 m with SignalProcessor Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 m stored in OS Version DataStorage Area 20663 b 1 (Paragraph [0349]) of Communication Device 200(S4). Assuming that CPU211 detects in S4 that Signal ProcessorController Version Data 20663 b 1 m of Communication Device 200 is of anold version. CPU 211 sends a New Signal Processor Controller SendingRequest, which is received by Host H (S5). Here, the New SignalProcessor Controller Sending Request is a request to send SignalProcessor Controller H63OSm (Paragraph [0352]) stored in Host H toCommunication Device 200. Host H retrieves Signal Processor ControllerH63OSm (Paragraph [0352]), which is of the latest version, fromOperating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0352]), and sends thecontroller to Communication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving SignalProcessor Controller H63OSm from Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores SignalProcessor Controller H63OSm as Signal Processor Controller 20663OSm inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) (S8). The old version ofSignal Processor Controller 20663OSm (Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0383]—This Paragraph [0383] illustrates Signal ProcessorController Updating Software H63 c 1 n (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and Signal Processor Controller Updating Software20663 c 1 n(Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, which updateSignal Processor Controller 20663OSn stored in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrieves Signal ProcessorController Version Data 20663 b 1 n from OS Version Data Storage Area20663 b 1 (Paragraph [0349]) and sends the data to Host H (S1). Uponreceiving Signal Processor Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 n(Paragraph [0349]) from Communication Device 200 (S2), Host H comparesSignal Processor Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 n (Paragraph [0349])with Signal Processor Controller Version Data H63 b 1 n stored in OSVersion Data Storage Area H63 b 1 (Paragraph [0355]) of Host H (S3).Assuming that Host H detects in S3 that Signal Processor ControllerVersion Data 20663 b 1 n of Communication Device 200 is of an oldversion. Host H retrieves Signal Processor Controller H63OSn, which isof the latest version, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS(Paragraph [0352]), and sends the controller to Communication Device 200(S4). Upon receiving Signal Processor Controller H63OSn from Host H(S5), CPU 211 stores Signal Processor Controller H63OSn as SignalProcessor Controller 20663OSn in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0345]) (S6). The old version of Signal Processor Controller 20663OSn(Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0384]—This Paragraph [0384] illustrates another embodiment ofSignal Processor Controller Updating Software H63 c 1 n (Paragraph[0356]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) and Signal Processor ControllerUpdating Software 20663 c 1 n(Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device200, which update Signal Processor Controller 20663OSn stored inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200.In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends aSignal Processor Controller Update Request, which is received by Host H(S1). Here, the Signal Processor Controller Update Request is a requestto send Signal Processor Controller Version Data H63 b 1 n (Paragraph[0355]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. In response to therequest, Host H retrieves Signal Processor Controller Version Data H63 b1 n from OS Version Data Storage Area H63 b 1 (Paragraph [0355]), andsends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2). Upon receiving SignalProcessor Controller Version Data H63 b 1 n from Host H (S3), CPU 211compares Signal Processor Controller Version Data H63 b 1 n with SignalProcessor Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 n stored in OS Version DataStorage Area 20663 b 1 (Paragraph [0349]) of Communication Device 200(S4). Assuming that CPU211 detects in S4 that Signal ProcessorController Version Data 20663 b 1 n of Communication Device 200 is of anold version. CPU 211 sends a New Signal Processor Controller SendingRequest, which is received by Host H (S5). Here, the New SignalProcessor Controller Sending Request is a request to send SignalProcessor Controller H63OSn (Paragraph [0352]) stored in Host H toCommunication Device 200. Host H retrieves Signal Processor ControllerH63OSn (Paragraph [0352]), which is of the latest version, fromOperating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0352]), and sends thecontroller to Communication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving SignalProcessor Controller H63OSn from Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores SignalProcessor Controller H63OSn as Signal Processor Controller 20663OSn inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) (S8). The old version ofSignal Processor Controller 20663OSn (Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0385]—This Paragraph [0385] illustrates Solar PanelController Updating Software H63 c 1 o (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and Solar Panel Controller Updating Software 20663 c10 (Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, which update SolarPanel Controller 20663OSo stored in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0345]) of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrieves Solar Panel ControllerVersion Data 20663 b 10 from OS Version Data Storage Area 20663 b 1(Paragraph [0349]) and sends the data to Host H (S1). Upon receivingSolar Panel Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 o (Paragraph [0349]) fromCommunication Device 200 (S2), Host H compares Solar Panel ControllerVersion Data 20663 b 1 o (Paragraph [0349]) with Solar Panel ControllerVersion Data H63 b 1 o stored in OS Version Data Storage Area H63 b 1(Paragraph [0355]) of Host H (S3). Assuming that Host H detects in S3that Solar Panel Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 o of CommunicationDevice 200 is of an old version. Host H retrieves Solar Panel ControllerH63OSo, which is of the latest version, from Operating System StorageArea H63OS (Paragraph [0352]), and sends the controller to CommunicationDevice 200 (S4). Upon receiving Solar Panel Controller H63OSo from HostH (S5), CPU 211 stores Solar Panel Controller H63OSo as Solar PanelController 20663OSo in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) (S6).The old version of Solar Panel Controller 20663OSo (Paragraph [0345]) isdeleted.

Paragraph [0386]—This Paragraph [0386] illustrates another embodiment ofSolar Panel Controller Updating Software H63 c 1 o (Paragraph [0356]) ofHost H (Paragraph [0025]) and Solar Panel Controller Updating Software20663 c 1 o (Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, which updateSolar Panel Controller 20663OSo stored in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a Solar Panel ControllerUpdate Request, which is received by Host H (S1). Here, the Solar PanelController Update Request is a request to send Solar Panel ControllerVersion Data H63 b 1 o (Paragraph [0355]) stored in Host H toCommunication Device 200. In response to the request, Host H retrievesSolar Panel Controller Version Data H63 b 1 o from OS Version DataStorage Area H63 b 1 (Paragraph [0355]), and sends the data toCommunication Device 200 (S2). Upon receiving Solar Panel ControllerVersion Data H63 b 1 o from Host H (S3), CPU 211 compares Solar PanelController Version Data H63 b 1 o with Solar Panel Controller VersionData 20663 b 1 o stored in OS Version Data Storage Area 20663 b 1(Paragraph [0349]) of Communication Device 200 (S4). Assuming thatCPU211 detects in S4 that Solar Panel Controller Version Data 20663 b 1o of Communication Device 200 is of an old version. CPU 211 sends a NewSolar Panel Controller Sending Request, which is received by Host H(S5). Here, the New Solar Panel Controller Sending Request is a requestto send Solar Panel Controller H63OSo (Paragraph [0352]) stored in HostH to Communication Device 200. Host H retrieves Solar Panel ControllerH63OSo (Paragraph [0352]), which is of the latest version, fromOperating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0352]), and sends thecontroller to Communication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving Solar PanelController H63OSo from Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores Solar PanelController H63OSo as Solar Panel Controller 20663OSo in Operating System20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) (S8). The old version of Solar PanelController 20663OSo (Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0387]—This Paragraph [0387] illustrates Speaker ControllerUpdating Software H63 c 1 p (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H (Paragraph[0025]) and Speaker Controller Updating Software 20663 c 1 p (Paragraph[0350]) of Communication Device 200, which update Speaker Controller20663OSp stored in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) ofCommunication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 retrieves Speaker Controller Version Data 20663b 1 p from OS Version Data Storage Area 20663 b 1 (Paragraph [0349]) andsends the data to Host H (S1). Upon receiving Speaker Controller VersionData 20663 b 1 p (Paragraph [0349]) from Communication Device 200 (S2),Host H compares Speaker Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 p (Paragraph[0349]) with Speaker Controller Version Data H63 b 1 p stored in OSVersion Data Storage Area H63 b 1 (Paragraph [0355]) of Host H (S3).Assuming that Host H detects in S3 that Speaker Controller Version Data20663 b 1 p of Communication Device 200 is of an old version. Host Hretrieves Speaker Controller H63OSp, which is of the latest version,from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0352]), and sendsthe controller to Communication Device 200 (S4). Upon receiving SpeakerController H63OSp from Host H (S5), CPU 211 stores Speaker ControllerH63OSp as Speaker Controller 20663OSp in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0345]) (S6). The old version of Speaker Controller 20663OSp(Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0388]—This Paragraph [0388] illustrates another embodiment ofSpeaker Controller Updating Software H63 c 1 p (Paragraph [0356]) ofHost H (Paragraph [0025]) and Speaker Controller Updating Software 20663c 1 p (Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, which updateSpeaker Controller 20663OSp stored in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a Speaker ControllerUpdate Request, which is received by Host H (S1). Here, the SpeakerController Update Request is a request to send Speaker ControllerVersion Data H63 b 1 p (Paragraph [0355]) stored in Host H toCommunication Device 200. In response to the request, Host H retrievesSpeaker Controller Version Data H63 b 1 p from OS Version Data StorageArea H63 b 1 (Paragraph [0355]), and sends the data to CommunicationDevice 200 (S2). Upon receiving Speaker Controller Version Data H63 b 1p from Host H (S3), CPU 211 compares Speaker Controller Version Data H63b 1 p with Speaker Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 p stored in OSVersion Data Storage Area 20663 b 1 (Paragraph [0349]) of CommunicationDevice 200 (S4). Assuming that CPU211 detects in S4 that SpeakerController Version Data 20663 b 1 p of Communication Device 200 is of anold version. CPU 211 sends a New Speaker Controller Sending Request,which is received by Host H (S5). Here, the New Speaker ControllerSending Request is a request to send Speaker Controller H63OSp(Paragraph [0352]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Host Hretrieves Speaker Controller H63OSp (Paragraph [0352]), which is of thelatest version, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph[0352]), and sends the controller to Communication Device 200 (S6). Uponreceiving Speaker Controller H63OSp from Host H (S7), CPU 211 storesSpeaker Controller H63OSp as Speaker Controller 20663OSp in OperatingSystem 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) (S8). The old version of SpeakerController 20663OSp (Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0389]—This Paragraph [0389] illustrates Vibrator ControllerUpdating Software H63 c 1 q (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H (Paragraph[0025]) and Vibrator Controller Updating Software 20663 c 1 q (Paragraph[0350]) of Communication Device 200, which update Vibrator Controller20663OSq stored in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) ofCommunication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 retrieves Vibrator Controller Version Data20663 b 1 q from OS Version Data Storage Area 20663 b 1 (Paragraph[0349]) and sends the data to Host H (S1). Upon receiving VibratorController Version Data 20663 b 1 q (Paragraph [0349]) fromCommunication Device 200 (S2), Host H compares Vibrator ControllerVersion Data 20663 b 1 q (Paragraph [0349]) with Vibrator ControllerVersion Data H63 b 1 q stored in OS Version Data Storage Area H63 b 1(Paragraph [0355]) of Host H (S3). Assuming that Host H detects in S3that Vibrator Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 q of CommunicationDevice 200 is of an old version. Host H retrieves Vibrator ControllerH63OSq, which is of the latest version, from Operating System StorageArea H63OS (Paragraph [0352]), and sends the controller to CommunicationDevice 200 (S4). Upon receiving Vibrator Controller H63OSq from Host H(S5), CPU 211 stores Vibrator Controller H63OSq as Vibrator Controller20663OSq in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) (S6). The oldversion of Vibrator Controller 20663OSq (Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0390]—This Paragraph [0390] illustrates another embodiment ofVibrator Controller Updating Software H63 c 1 q (Paragraph [0356]) ofHost H (Paragraph [0025]) and Vibrator Controller Updating Software20663 c 1 q (Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, which updateVibrator Controller 20663OSq stored in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a Vibrator ControllerUpdate Request, which is received by Host H (S1). Here, the VibratorController Update Request is a request to send Vibrator ControllerVersion Data H63 b 1 q (Paragraph [0355]) stored in Host H toCommunication Device 200. In response to the request, Host H retrievesVibrator Controller Version Data H63 b 1 q from OS Version Data StorageArea H63 b 1 (Paragraph [0355]), and sends the data to CommunicationDevice 200 (S2). Upon receiving Vibrator Controller Version Data H63 b 1q from Host H (S3), CPU 211 compares Vibrator Controller Version DataH63 b 1 q with Vibrator Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 q stored in OSVersion Data Storage Area 20663 b 1 (Paragraph [0349]) of CommunicationDevice 200 (S4). Assuming that CPU211 detects in S4 that VibratorController Version Data 20663 b 1 q of Communication Device 200 is of anold version. CPU 211 sends a New Vibrator Controller Sending Request,which is received by Host H (S5). Here, the New Vibrator ControllerSending Request is a request to send Vibrator Controller H63OSq(Paragraph [0352]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Host Hretrieves Vibrator Controller H63OSq (Paragraph [0352]), which is of thelatest version, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph[0352]), and sends the controller to Communication Device 200 (S6). Uponreceiving Vibrator Controller H63OSq from Host H (S7), CPU 211 storesVibrator Controller H63OSq as Vibrator Controller 20663OSq in OperatingSystem 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) (S8). The old version of VibratorController 20663OSq (Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0391]—This Paragraph [0391] illustrates Video ProcessorController Updating Software H63 c 1 r (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and Video Processor Controller Updating Software20663 c 1 r (Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, which updateVideo Processor Controller 20663OSr stored in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrieves Video ProcessorController Version Data 20663 b 1 r from OS Version Data Storage Area20663 b 1 (Paragraph [0349]) and sends the data to Host H (S1). Uponreceiving Video Processor Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 r (Paragraph[0349]) from Communication Device 200 (S2), Host H compares VideoProcessor Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 r (Paragraph [0349]) withVideo Processor Controller Version Data H63 b 1 r stored in OS VersionData Storage Area H63 b 1 (Paragraph [0355]) of Host H (S3). Assumingthat Host H detects in S3 that Video Processor Controller Version Data20663 b 1 r of Communication Device 200 is of an old version. Host Hretrieves Video Processor Controller H63OSr, which is of the latestversion, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0352]),and sends the controller to Communication Device 200 (S4). Uponreceiving Video Processor Controller H63OSr from Host H (S5), CPU 211stores Video Processor Controller H63OSr as Video Processor Controller20663OSr in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) (S6). The oldversion of Video Processor Controller 20663OSr (Paragraph [0345]) isdeleted.

Paragraph [0392]—This Paragraph [0392] illustrates another embodiment ofVideo Processor Controller Updating Software H63 c 1 r (Paragraph[0356]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) and Video Processor ControllerUpdating Software 20663 c 1 r (Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device200, which update Video Processor Controller 20663OSr stored inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200.In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends aVideo Processor Controller Update Request, which is received by Host H(S1). Here, the Video Processor Controller Update Request is a requestto send Video Processor Controller Version Data H63 b 1 r (Paragraph[0355]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. In response to therequest, Host H retrieves Video Processor Controller Version Data H63 b1 r from OS Version Data Storage Area H63 b 1 (Paragraph [0355]), andsends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2). Upon receiving VideoProcessor Controller Version Data H63 b 1 r from Host H (S3), CPU 211compares Video Processor Controller Version Data H63 b 1 r with VideoProcessor Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 r stored in OS Version DataStorage Area 20663 b 1 (Paragraph [0349]) of Communication Device 200(S4). Assuming that CPU211 detects in S4 that Video Processor ControllerVersion Data 20663 b 1 r of Communication Device 200 is of an oldversion. CPU 211 sends a New Video Processor Controller Sending Request,which is received by Host H (S5). Here, the New Video ProcessorController Sending Request is a request to send Video ProcessorController H63OSr (Paragraph [0352]) stored in Host H to CommunicationDevice 200. Host H retrieves Video Processor Controller H63OSr(Paragraph [0352]), which is of the latest version, from OperatingSystem Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0352]), and sends the controllerto Communication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving Video ProcessorController H63OSr from Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores Video ProcessorController H63OSr as Video Processor Controller 20663OSr in OperatingSystem 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) (S8). The old version of VideoProcessor Controller 20663OSr (Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0393]—This Paragraph [0393] illustrates Wireless ReceiverController Updating Software H63 c 1 s (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and Wireless Receiver Controller Updating Software20663 c 1 s (Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, which updateWireless Receiver Controller 20663OSs stored in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrieves Wireless ReceiverController Version Data 20663 b 1 s from OS Version Data Storage Area20663 b 1 (Paragraph [0349]) and sends the data to Host H (S1). Uponreceiving Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 s(Paragraph [0349]) from Communication Device 200 (S2), Host H comparesWireless Receiver Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 s (Paragraph [0349])with Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data H63 b 1 s stored in OSVersion Data Storage Area H63 b 1 (Paragraph [0355]) of Host H (S3).Assuming that Host H detects in S3 that Wireless Receiver ControllerVersion Data 20663 b 1 s of Communication Device 200 is of an oldversion. Host H retrieves Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSs, which isof the latest version, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS(Paragraph [0352]), and sends the controller to Communication Device 200(S4). Upon receiving Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSs from Host H(S5), CPU 211 stores Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSs as WirelessReceiver Controller 20663OSs in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0345]) (S6). The old version of Wireless Receiver Controller 20663OSs(Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0394]—This Paragraph [0394] illustrates another embodiment ofWireless Receiver Controller Updating Software H63 c 1 s (Paragraph[0356]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) and Wireless Receiver ControllerUpdating Software 20663 c 1 s (Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device200, which update Wireless Receiver Controller 20663OSs stored inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200.In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends aWireless Receiver Controller Update Request#1, which is received by HostH (S1). Here, the Wireless Receiver Controller Update Request#1 is arequest to send Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data H63 b 1 s(Paragraph [0355]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Inresponse to the request, Host H retrieves Wireless Receiver ControllerVersion Data H63 b 1 s from OS Version Data Storage Area H63 b 1(Paragraph [0355]), and sends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2).Upon receiving Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data H63 b 1 s fromHost H (S3), CPU 211 compares Wireless Receiver Controller Version DataH63 b 1 s with Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 sstored in OS Version Data Storage Area 20663 b 1 (Paragraph [0349]) ofCommunication Device 200 (S4). Assuming that CPU211 detects in S4 thatWireless Receiver Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 s of CommunicationDevice 200 is of an old version. CPU 211 sends a New Wireless ReceiverController Sending Request#1, which is received by Host H (S5). Here,the New Wireless Receiver Controller Sending Request#1 is a request tosend Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSs (Paragraph [0352]) stored inHost H to Communication Device 200. Host H retrieves Wireless ReceiverController H63OSs (Paragraph [0352]), which is of the latest version,from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0352]), and sendsthe controller to Communication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving WirelessReceiver Controller H63OSs from Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores WirelessReceiver Controller H63OSs as Wireless Receiver Controller 20663OSs inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) (S8). The old version ofWireless Receiver Controller 20663OSs (Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0395]—This Paragraph [0395] illustrates Wireless ReceiverController Updating Software H63 c 1 t (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and Wireless Receiver Controller Updating Software20663 c 1 t (Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, which updateWireless Receiver Controller 20663OSt stored in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrieves Wireless ReceiverController Version Data 20663 b 1 t from OS Version Data Storage Area20663 b 1 (Paragraph [0349]) and sends the data to Host H (S1). Uponreceiving Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 t(Paragraph [0349]) from Communication Device 200 (S2), Host H comparesWireless Receiver Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 t (Paragraph [0349])with Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data H63 b 1 t stored in OSVersion Data Storage Area H63 b 1 (Paragraph [0355]) of Host H (S3).Assuming that Host H detects in S3 that Wireless Receiver ControllerVersion Data 20663 b 1 t of Communication Device 200 is of an oldversion. Host H retrieves Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSt, which isof the latest version, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS(Paragraph [0352]), and sends the controller to Communication Device 200(S4). Upon receiving Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSt from Host H(S5), CPU 211 stores Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSt as WirelessReceiver Controller 20663OSt in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0345]) (S6). The old version of Wireless Receiver Controller 20663OSt(Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0396]—This Paragraph [0396] illustrates another embodiment ofWireless Receiver Controller Updating Software H63 c 1 t (Paragraph[0356]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) and Wireless Receiver ControllerUpdating Software 20663 c 1 t (Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device200, which update Wireless Receiver Controller 20663OSt stored inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200.In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends aWireless Receiver Controller Update Request#2, which is received by HostH (S1). Here, the Wireless Receiver Controller Update Request#2 is arequest to send Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data H63 b 1 t(Paragraph [0355]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Inresponse to the request, Host H retrieves Wireless Receiver ControllerVersion Data H63 b 1 t from OS Version Data Storage Area H63 b 1(Paragraph [0355]), and sends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2).Upon receiving Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data H63 b 1 t fromHost H (S3), CPU 211 compares Wireless Receiver Controller Version DataH63 b 1 t with Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 tstored in OS Version Data Storage Area 20663 b 1 (Paragraph [0349]) ofCommunication Device 200 (S4). Assuming that CPU211 detects in S4 thatWireless Receiver Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 t of CommunicationDevice 200 is of an old version. CPU 211 sends a New Wireless ReceiverController Sending Request#2, which is received by Host H (S5). Here,the New Wireless Receiver Controller Sending Request#2 is a request tosend Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSt (Paragraph [0352]) stored inHost H to Communication Device 200. Host H retrieves Wireless ReceiverController H63OSt (Paragraph [0352]), which is of the latest version,from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0352]), and sendsthe controller to Communication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving WirelessReceiver Controller H63OSt from Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores WirelessReceiver Controller H63OSt as Wireless Receiver Controller 20663OSt inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) (S8). The old version ofWireless Receiver Controller 20663OSt (Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0397]—This Paragraph [0397] illustrates Wireless ReceiverController Updating Software H63 c 1 u (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and Wireless Receiver Controller Updating Software20663 c 1 u (Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, which updateWireless Receiver Controller 20663OSu stored in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, CPU211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrieves Wireless ReceiverController Version Data 20663 b 1 u from OS Version Data Storage Area20663 b 1 (Paragraph [0349]) and sends the data to Host H (S1). Uponreceiving Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 u(Paragraph [0349]) from Communication Device 200 (S2), Host H comparesWireless Receiver Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 u (Paragraph [0349])with Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data H63 b 1 u stored in OSVersion Data Storage Area H63 b 1 (Paragraph [0355]) of Host H (S3).Assuming that Host H detects in S3 that Wireless Receiver ControllerVersion Data 20663 b 1 u of Communication Device 200 is of an oldversion. Host H retrieves Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSu, which isof the latest version, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS(Paragraph [0352]), and sends the controller to Communication Device 200(S4). Upon receiving Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSu from Host H(S5), CPU 211 stores Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSu as WirelessReceiver Controller 20663OSu in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0345]) (S6). The old version of Wireless Receiver Controller 20663OSu(Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0398]—This Paragraph [0398] illustrates another embodiment ofWireless Receiver Controller Updating Software H63 c 1 u (Paragraph[0356]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) and Wireless Receiver ControllerUpdating Software 20663 c 1 u (Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device200, which update Wireless Receiver Controller 20663OSu stored inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200.In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends aWireless Receiver Controller Update Request#3, which is received by HostH (S1). Here, the Wireless Receiver Controller Update Request#3 is arequest to send Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data H63 b 1 u(Paragraph [0355]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Inresponse to the request, Host H retrieves Wireless Receiver ControllerVersion Data H63 b 1 u from OS Version Data Storage Area H63 b 1(Paragraph [0355]), and sends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2).Upon receiving Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data H63 b 1 u fromHost H (S3), CPU 211 compares Wireless Receiver Controller Version DataH63 b 1 u with Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 ustored in OS Version Data Storage Area 20663 b 1 (Paragraph [0349]) ofCommunication Device 200 (S4). Assuming that CPU211 detects in S4 thatWireless Receiver Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 u of CommunicationDevice 200 is of an old version. CPU 211 sends a New Wireless ReceiverController Sending Request#3, which is received by Host H (S5). Here,the New Wireless Receiver Controller Sending Request#3 is a request tosend Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSu (Paragraph [0352]) stored inHost H to Communication Device 200. Host H retrieves Wireless ReceiverController H63OSu (Paragraph [0352]), which is of the latest version,from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0352]), and sendsthe controller to Communication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving WirelessReceiver Controller H63OSu from Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores WirelessReceiver Controller H63OSu as Wireless Receiver Controller 20663OSu inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) (S8). The old version ofWireless Receiver Controller 20663OSu (Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0399]—This Paragraph [0399] illustrates Wireless TransmitterController Updating Software H63 c 1 v (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and Wireless Transmitter Controller Updating Software20663 c 1 v (Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, which updateWireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSv stored in Operating System20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrievesWireless Transmitter Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 v from OS VersionData Storage Area 20663 b 1 (Paragraph [0349]) and sends the data toHost H (S1). Upon receiving Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data20663 b 1 v (Paragraph [0349]) from Communication Device 200 (S2), HostH compares Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 v(Paragraph [0349]) with Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data H63b 1 v stored in OS Version Data Storage Area H63 b 1 (Paragraph [0355])of Host H (S3). Assuming that Host H detects in S3 that WirelessTransmitter Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 v of Communication Device200 is of an old version. Host H retrieves Wireless TransmitterController H63OSv, which is of the latest version, from Operating SystemStorage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0352]), and sends the controller toCommunication Device 200 (S4). Upon receiving Wireless TransmitterController H63OSv from Host H (S5), CPU 211 stores Wireless TransmitterController H63OSv as Wireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSv inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) (S6). The old version ofWireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSv (Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0400]—This Paragraph [0400] illustrates another embodiment ofWireless Transmitter Controller Updating Software H63 c 1 v (Paragraph[0356]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) and Wireless Transmitter ControllerUpdating Software 20663 c 1 v (Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device200, which update Wireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSv stored inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200.In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends aWireless Transmitter Controller Update Request#1, which is received byHost H (S1). Here, the Wireless Transmitter Controller Update Request#1is a request to send Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data H63 b1 v (Paragraph [0355]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Inresponse to the request, Host H retrieves Wireless TransmitterController Version Data H63 b 1 v from OS Version Data Storage Area H63b 1 (Paragraph [0355]), and sends the data to Communication Device 200(S2). Upon receiving Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data H63 b1 v from Host H (S3), CPU 211 compares Wireless Transmitter ControllerVersion Data H63 b 1 v with Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data20663 b 1 v stored in OS Version Data Storage Area 20663 b 1 (Paragraph[0349]) of Communication Device 200 (S4). Assuming that CPU211 detectsin S4 that Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 v ofCommunication Device 200 is of an old version. CPU 211 sends a NewWireless Transmitter Controller Sending Request#1, which is received byHost H (S5). Here, the New Wireless Transmitter Controller SendingRequest#1 is a request to send Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSv(Paragraph [0352]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Host Hretrieves Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSv (Paragraph [0352]),which is of the latest version, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS(Paragraph [0352]), and sends the controller to Communication Device 200(S6). Upon receiving Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSv from Host H(S7), CPU 211 stores Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSv as WirelessTransmitter Controller 20663OSv in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0345]) (S8). The old version of Wireless Transmitter Controller20663OSv (Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0401]—This Paragraph [0401] illustrates Wireless TransmitterController Updating Software H63 c 1 w (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and Wireless Transmitter Controller Updating Software20663 c 1 w (Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, which updateWireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSw stored in Operating System20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrievesWireless Transmitter Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 w from OS VersionData Storage Area 20663 b 1 (Paragraph [0349]) and sends the data toHost H (S1). Upon receiving Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data20663 b 1 w (Paragraph [0349]) from Communication Device 200 (S2), HostH compares Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 w(Paragraph [0349]) with Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data H63b 1 w stored in OS Version Data Storage Area H63 b 1 (Paragraph [0355])of Host H (S3). Assuming that Host H detects in S3 that WirelessTransmitter Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 w of Communication Device200 is of an old version. Host H retrieves Wireless TransmitterController H63OSw, which is of the latest version, from Operating SystemStorage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0352]), and sends the controller toCommunication Device 200 (S4). Upon receiving Wireless TransmitterController H63OSw from Host H (S5), CPU 211 stores Wireless TransmitterController H63OSw as Wireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSw inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) (S6). The old version ofWireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSw (Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0402]—This Paragraph [0402] illustrates another embodiment ofWireless Transmitter Controller Updating Software H63 c 1 w (Paragraph[0356]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) and Wireless Transmitter ControllerUpdating Software 20663 c 1 w (Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device200, which update Wireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSw stored inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200.In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends aWireless Transmitter Controller Update Request#2, which is received byHost H (S1). Here, the Wireless Transmitter Controller Update Request#2is a request to send Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data H63 b1 w (Paragraph [0355]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Inresponse to the request, Host H retrieves Wireless TransmitterController Version Data H63 b 1 w from OS Version Data Storage Area H63b 1 (Paragraph [0355]), and sends the data to Communication Device 200(S2). Upon receiving Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data H63 b1 w from Host H (S3), CPU 211 compares Wireless Transmitter ControllerVersion Data H63 b 1 w with Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data20663 b 1 w stored in OS Version Data Storage Area 20663 b 1 (Paragraph[0349]) of Communication Device 200 (S4). Assuming that CPU211 detectsin S4 that Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 w ofCommunication Device 200 is of an old version. CPU 211 sends a NewWireless Transmitter Controller Sending Request#2, which is received byHost H (S5). Here, the New Wireless Transmitter Controller SendingRequest#2 is a request to send Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSw(Paragraph [0352]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Host Hretrieves Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSw (Paragraph [0352]),which is of the latest version, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS(Paragraph [0352]), and sends the controller to Communication Device 200(S6). Upon receiving Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSw from Host H(S7), CPU 211 stores Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSw as WirelessTransmitter Controller 20663OSw in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0345]) (S8). The old version of Wireless Transmitter Controller20663OSw (Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0403]—This Paragraph [0403] illustrates Wireless TransmitterController Updating Software H63 c 1 x (Paragraph [0356]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and Wireless Transmitter Controller Updating Software20663 c 1 x (Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device 200, which updateWireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSx stored in Operating System20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrievesWireless Transmitter Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 x from OS VersionData Storage Area 20663 b 1 (Paragraph [0349]) and sends the data toHost H (S1). Upon receiving Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data20663 b 1 x (Paragraph [0349]) from Communication Device 200 (S2), HostH compares Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 x(Paragraph [0349]) with Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data H63b 1 x stored in OS Version Data Storage Area H63 b 1 (Paragraph [0355])of Host H (S3). Assuming that Host H detects in S3 that WirelessTransmitter Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 x of Communication Device200 is of an old version. Host H retrieves Wireless TransmitterController H63OSx, which is of the latest version, from Operating SystemStorage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0352]), and sends the controller toCommunication Device 200 (S4). Upon receiving Wireless TransmitterController H63OSx from Host H (S5), CPU 211 stores Wireless TransmitterController H63OSx as Wireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSx inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) (S6). The old version ofWireless Transmitter Controller 2066305 x (Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0404]—This Paragraph [0404] illustrates another embodiment ofWireless Transmitter Controller Updating Software H63 c 1 x (Paragraph[0356]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) and Wireless Transmitter ControllerUpdating Software 20663 c 1 x (Paragraph [0350]) of Communication Device200, which update Wireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSx stored inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345]) of Communication Device 200.In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends aWireless Transmitter Controller Update Request#3, which is received byHost H (S1). Here, the Wireless Transmitter Controller Update Request#3is a request to send Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data H63 b1 x (Paragraph [0355]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Inresponse to the request, Host H retrieves Wireless TransmitterController Version Data H63 b 1 x from OS Version Data Storage Area H63b 1 (Paragraph [0355]), and sends the data to Communication Device 200(S2). Upon receiving Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data H63 b1 x from Host H (S3), CPU 211 compares Wireless Transmitter ControllerVersion Data H63 b 1 x with Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data20663 b 1 x stored in OS Version Data Storage Area 20663 b 1 (Paragraph[0349]) of Communication Device 200 (S4). Assuming that CPU211 detectsin S4 that Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data 20663 b 1 x ofCommunication Device 200 is of an old version. CPU 211 sends a NewWireless Transmitter Controller Sending Request#3, which is received byHost H (S5). Here, the New Wireless Transmitter Controller SendingRequest#3 is a request to send Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSx(Paragraph [0352]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Host Hretrieves Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSx (Paragraph [0352]),which is of the latest version, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS(Paragraph [0352]), and sends the controller to Communication Device 200(S6). Upon receiving Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSx from Host H(S7), CPU 211 stores Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSx as WirelessTransmitter Controller 20663OSx in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0345]) (S8). The old version of Wireless Transmitter Controller20663OSx (Paragraph [0345]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0405]—As another embodiment, each and all data and softwareprograms described in this specification stored in Communication Device200 may be updated in the manner described hereinbefore.

Paragraph [0406]—For the avoidance of doubt, the present function may beutilized to repair the operating system of Communication Device 200,i.e., Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0345] and Paragraph [0345])in the form of downloading updates.

Paragraph [0407]—<<OCR Function>>

Paragraph [0408]—This Paragraph [0408] illustrates the storage areaincluded in RAM 206 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, RAM 206 includes OCRInformation Storage Area 20666 a of which the data and the softwareprograms stored therein are described in Paragraph [0410].

Paragraph [0409]—The data and/or the software programs stored in OCRInformation Storage Area 20666 a (Paragraph [0408]) may be downloadedfrom Host H (Paragraph [0025]).

Paragraph [0410]—This Paragraph [0410] illustrates the storage areasincluded in OCR Information Storage Area 20666 a (Paragraph [0408]). Inthis embodiment, OCR Information Storage Area 20666 a includes OCR DataStorage Area 20666 b and OCR Software Storage Area 20666 c. OCR DataStorage Area 20666 b stores the data necessary to implement the presentfunction, such as the ones described in Paragraph [0411] throughParagraph [0416]. OCR Software Storage Area 20666 c stores the softwareprograms necessary to implement the present function, such as the onesdescribed in Paragraph [0417].

Paragraph [0411]—This Paragraph [0411] illustrates the storage areasincluded in OCR Data Storage Area 20666 b (Paragraph [0410]). In thisembodiment, OCR Data Storage Area 20666 b includes Web Address DataStorage Area 20666 b 1, Email Address Data Storage Area 20666 b 2, PhoneData Storage Area 20666 b 3, Alphanumeric Data Storage Area 20666 b 4,Image Data Storage Area 20666 b 5, and Work Area 20666 b 6. Web AddressData Storage Area 20666 b 1 stores the data described in Paragraph[0412]. Email Address Data Storage Area 20666 b 2 stores the datadescribed in Paragraph [0413]. Phone Data Storage Area 20666 b 3 storesthe data described in Paragraph [0414]. Alphanumeric Data Storage Area20666 b 4 stores the data described in Paragraph [0415]. Image DataStorage Area 20666 b 5 stores the data described in Paragraph [0416].Work Area 20666 b 6 is utilized as a work area to perform calculationand temporarily store data.

Paragraph [0412]—This Paragraph [0412] illustrates the data stored inWeb Address Data Storage Area 20666 b 1 (Paragraph [0411]). In thisembodiment, Web Address Data Storage Area 20666 b 1 comprises twocolumns, i.e., ‘Web Address ID’ and ‘Web Address Data’. Column ‘WebAddress ID’ stores the web address IDs, and each web address ID is thetitle of the corresponding web address data stored in column ‘WebAddress Data’ utilized for identification purposes. Column ‘Web AddressData’ stores the web address data, and each web address data representsa web address composed of alphanumeric data of which the first portionthereof is ‘http://’. In this embodiment, Web Address Data Storage Area20666 b 1 stores the following data: the web address ID ‘Web Address#1’and the corresponding web address data ‘Web Address Data#1’; the webaddress ID ‘Web Address#2’ and the corresponding web address data ‘WebAddress Data#2’; the web address ID ‘Web Address#3’ and thecorresponding web address data ‘Web Address Data#3’; and the web addressID ‘Web Address#4’ and the corresponding web address data ‘Web AddressData#4’.

Paragraph [0413]—This Paragraph [0413] illustrates the data stored inEmail Address Data Storage Area 20666 b 2 (Paragraph [0411]). In thisembodiment, Email Address Data Storage Area 20666 b 2 comprises twocolumns, i.e., ‘Email Address ID’ and ‘Email Address Data’. Column‘Email Address ID’ stores the email address IDs, and each email addressID is the title of the corresponding email address data stored in column‘Email Address Data’ utilized for identification purposes. Column ‘EmailAddress Data’ stores the email address data, and each email address datarepresents an email address composed of alphanumeric data which includes‘@’ mark therein. In this embodiment, Email Address Data Storage Area20666 b 2 stores the following data: the email address ID ‘EmailAddress#1’ and the corresponding email address data ‘Email AddressData#1’; the email address ID ‘Email Address#2’ and the correspondingemail address data ‘Email Address Data#2’; the email address ID ‘EmailAddress#3’ and the corresponding email address data ‘Email AddressData#3’; and the email address ID ‘Email Address#4’ and thecorresponding email address data ‘Email Address Data#4’.

Paragraph [0414]—This Paragraph [0414] illustrates the data stored inPhone Data Storage Area 20666 b 3 (Paragraph [0411]). In thisembodiment, Phone Data Storage Area 20666 b 3 comprises two columns,i.e., ‘Phone ID’ and ‘Phone Data’. Column ‘Phone ID’ stores the phoneIDs, and each phone ID is the title of the corresponding phone datastored in column ‘Phone Data’ utilized for identification purposes.Column ‘Phone Data’ stores the phone data, and each phone datarepresents a phone number composed of numeric figure of which the formatis ‘xxx-xxx-xxxx’. In this embodiment, Phone Data Storage Area 20666 b 3stores the following data: the phone ID ‘Phone#1’ and the correspondingphone data ‘Phone Data#1’; the phone ID ‘Phone#2’ and the correspondingphone data ‘Phone Data#2’; the phone ID ‘Phone#3’ and the correspondingphone data ‘Phone Data#3’; and the phone ID ‘Phone#4’ and thecorresponding phone data ‘Phone Data#4’.

Paragraph [0415]—This Paragraph [0415] illustrates the data stored inAlphanumeric Data Storage Area 20666 b 4 (Paragraph [0411]). In thisembodiment, Alphanumeric Data Storage Area 20666 b 4 comprises twocolumns, i.e., ‘Alphanumeric ID’ and ‘Alphanumeric Data’. Column‘Alphanumeric ID’ stores alphanumeric IDs, and each alphanumeric ID isthe title of the corresponding alphanumeric data stored in column‘Alphanumeric Data’ utilized for identification purposes. Column‘Alphanumeric Data’ stores the alphanumeric data, and each alphanumericdata represents alphanumeric figure primarily composed of numbers,texts, words, and letters. In this embodiment, Alphanumeric Data StorageArea 20666 b 4 stores the following data: the alphanumeric ID‘Alphanumeric#1’ and the corresponding alphanumeric data ‘AlphanumericData#1’; the alphanumeric ID ‘Alphanumeric#2’ and the correspondingalphanumeric data ‘Alphanumeric Data#2’; the alphanumeric ID‘Alphanumeric#3’ and the corresponding alphanumeric data ‘AlphanumericData#3’; and the alphanumeric ID ‘Alphanumeric#4’ and the correspondingalphanumeric data ‘Alphanumeric Data#4’. Paragraph [0416]—This Paragraph[0416] illustrates the data stored in Image Data Storage Area 20666 b 5(Paragraph [0411]). In this embodiment, Image Data Storage Area 20666 b5 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Image ID’ and ‘Image Data’. Column‘Image ID’ stores the image IDs, and each image ID is the title of thecorresponding image data stored in column ‘Image Data’ utilized foridentification purposes. Column ‘Image Data’ stores the image data, andeach image data is a data composed of image such as the image input viaCCD Unit 214 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, Image Data Storage Area 20666b 5 stores the following data: the Image ID ‘Image#1’ and thecorresponding Image Data ‘Image Data#1’; the Image ID ‘Image#2’ and thecorresponding Image Data ‘Image Data#2’; the Image ID ‘Image#3’ and thecorresponding Image Data ‘Image Data#3’; and the Image ID ‘Image#4’ andthe corresponding Image Data ‘Image Data#4’. Paragraph [0417]—ThisParagraph [0417] illustrates the software programs stored in OCRSoftware Storage Area 20666 c (Paragraph [0410]). In this embodiment,OCR Software Storage Area 20666 c stores Image Data Scanning Software20666 c 1, Image Data Storing Software 20666 c 2, OCR Software 20666 c3, Alphanumeric Data Storing Software 20666 c 4, Web Address DataIdentifying Software 20666 c 5 a, Web Address Data Correcting Software20666 c 5 b, Web Address Data Storing Software 20666 c 5 c, AddressAccessing Software 20666 c 5 d, Email Address Data Identifying Software20666 c 6 a, Email Address Data Correcting Software 20666 c 6 b, EmailAddress Data Storing Software 20666 c 6 c, Email Editing Software 20666c 6 d, Phone Data Identifying Software 20666 c 7 a, Phone DataCorrecting Software 20666 c 7 b, Phone Data Storing Software 20666 c 7c, and Dialing Software 20666 c 7 d. Image Data Scanning Software 20666c 1 is the software program described in Paragraph [0418]. Image DataStoring Software 20666 c 2 is the software program described inParagraph [0419]. OCR Software 20666 c 3 is the software programdescribed in Paragraph [0420]. Alphanumeric Data Storing Software 20666c 4 is the software program described in Paragraph [0421]. Web AddressData Identifying Software 20666 c 5 a is the software program describedin Paragraph [0422]. Web Address Data Correcting Software 20666 c 5 b isthe software program described in Paragraph [0423]. Web Address DataStoring Software 20666 c 5 c is the software program described inParagraph [0424]. Web Address Accessing Software 20666 c 5 d is thesoftware program described in Paragraph [0425]. Email Address DataIdentifying Software 20666 c 6 a is the software program described inParagraph [0426]. Email Address Data Correcting Software 20666 c 6 b isthe software program described in Paragraph [0427]. Email Address DataStoring Software 20666 c 6 c is the software program described inParagraph [0428]. Email Editing Software 20666 c 6 d is the softwareprogram described in Paragraph [0429]. Phone Data Identifying Software20666 c 7 a is the software program described in Paragraph [0430]. PhoneData Correcting Software 20666 c 7 b is the software program describedin Paragraph [0431]. Phone Data Storing Software 20666 c 7 c is thesoftware program described in Paragraph [0432]. Dialing Software 20666 c7 d is the software program described in Paragraph [0433].

Paragraph [0418]—This Paragraph [0418] illustrates Image Data ScanningSoftware 20666 c 1 (not shown) of Communication Device 200, which scansan image by utilizing CCD Unit (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) scans an image by utilizing CCD Unit (FIG. 1) (S1), and storesthe extracted image data in Work Area 20666 b 6 (Paragraph [0411]) (S2).CPU 211 then retrieves the image data from Work Area 20666 b 6(Paragraph [0411]) and displays the data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S3).

Paragraph [0419]—This Paragraph [0419] illustrates Image Data StoringSoftware 20666 c 2 (not shown) of Communication Device 200, which storesthe image data scanned by CCD Unit (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) retrieves the image data from Work Area 20666 b 6 (Paragraph[0411]) and displays the data On LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). The user ofCommunication Device 200 inputs an image ID, i.e., a title of the imagedata by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognitionsystem (S2). CPU 211 then stores the image ID and the image data inImage Data Storage Area 20666 b 5 (Paragraph [0416]) (S3). Paragraph[0420]—This Paragraph [0420] illustrates OCR Software 20666 c 3 (notshown) of Communication Device 200, which extracts alphanumeric datafrom image data by utilizing the method so-called ‘optical characterrecognition’ or ‘OCR’. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) retrievesthe image IDs from Image Data Storage Area 20666 b 5 (Paragraph [0416])and displays the data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). The user ofCommunication Device 200 selects one of the image IDs by utilizing InputDevice 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S2). CPU 211 thenretrieves the image data of the image ID selected in S2 from Image DataStorage Area 20666 b 5 (Paragraph [0416]) and displays the image data onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S3). CPU 211 executes the OCR process, i.e., extractsalphanumeric data from the image data (S4), and stores the extractedalphanumeric data in Work Area 20666 b 6 (Paragraph [0411]) (S5).

Paragraph [0421]—This Paragraph [0421] illustrates Alphanumeric DataStoring Software 20666 c 4 (not shown) of Communication Device 200,which stores the extracted alphanumeric data in Alphanumeric DataStorage Area 20666 b 4 (Paragraph [0415]). In this embodiment, the userof Communication Device 200 inputs an alphanumeric ID (i.e., the titleof the alphanumeric data) (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) then retrieves thealphanumeric data from Work Area 20666 b 6 (Paragraph [0411]) (S2), andstores the data in Alphanumeric Data Storage Area 20666 b 4 (Paragraph[0415]) with the Alphanumeric ID (S3). Paragraph [0422]—This Paragraph[0422] illustrates Web Address Data Identifying Software 20666 c 5 a(not shown) of Communication Device 200, which identifies the webaddress data among the Alphanumeric Data. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) retrieves the alphanumeric IDs from Alphanumeric Data StorageArea 20666 b 4 (Paragraph [0415]) and displays the alphanumeric IDs onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). The user of Communication Device 200 selects oneof the Alphanumeric IDs by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or viavoice recognition system (S2). CPU 211 retrieves the correspondingalphanumeric data from Alphanumeric Data Storage Area 20666 b 4(Paragraph [0415]) and displays the data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S3). CPU211 stores the alphanumeric data retrieved in S3 in Work Area 20666 b 6(Paragraph [0411]) for the web address data identification explained inthe next step (S4). CPU 211 scans the alphanumeric data, i.e., appliesthe web address criteria (for example, ‘http://’, ‘www.’, ‘.com’,‘.org’, ‘.edu’) to each alphanumeric data, and identifies the webaddress data included therein (S5). CPU 211 emphasizes the identifiedweb address data by changing the font color (for example, blue) anddrawing underlines to the identified web address data (S6). CPU 211displays the alphanumeric data with the identified web address dataemphasized on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) thereafter (S7).

Paragraph [0423]—This Paragraph [0423] illustrates Web Address DataCorrecting Software 20666 c 5 b (not shown) of Communication Device 200,which corrects the misidentified web address data by manually selectingthe start point and the end point of the web address data. For example,if the web address data is misidentified as ‘www.yahoo’ and leaves outthe remaining ‘.com’, the user of Communication Device 200 may manuallycorrect the web address data by selecting the start point and the endpoint of ‘www.yahoo.com’. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) displaysthe alphanumeric data with web address data emphasized (S1). The user ofCommunication Device 200 selects the start point of the web address data(S2) and the end point of the web address data by utilizing Input Device210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S3). CPU 211 thenidentifies the alphanumeric data located between the start point and theend point as web address data (S4), and emphasizes the web address databy changing the font color (for example, blue) and drawing underlinesthereto (S5). The alphanumeric data with the web address data emphasizedare displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) thereafter (S6).

Paragraph [0424]—This Paragraph [0424] illustrates Web Address DataStoring Software 20666 c 5 c (not shown) of Communication Device 200,which stores the web address data in Web Address Data Storage Area 20666b 1 (Paragraph [0412]). In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) displaysthe alphanumeric data with web address data emphasized (S1). The user ofCommunication Device 200 selects one of the web address data byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system, andCPU 211 emphasizes the data (for example, change to bold font) (S2). Theuser then inputs the web address ID (the title of the web address data)(S3). CPU 211 stores the web address ID and the web address data in WebAddress Data Storage Area 20666 b 1 (Paragraph [0412]) (S4).

Paragraph [0425]—This Paragraph [0425] illustrates Web Address AccessingSoftware 20666 c 5 d (not shown) of Communication Device 200, whichaccesses the web site represented by the web address data. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) displays the alphanumeric data with webaddress data emphasized (S1). The user of Communication Device 200selects one of the web address data by utilizing Input Device 210(FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (for example, click one of theweb address data) (S2). CPU 211 then opens an internet browser (forexample, the Internet Explorer) and enters the web address data selectedin S2 therein (S3). CPU 211 accesses the web site thereafter (S4).

Paragraph [0426]—This Paragraph [0426] illustrates Email Address DataIdentifying Software 20666 c 6 a (not shown) of Communication Device200, which identifies the email address data among the alphanumericdata. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) retrieves the alphanumericIDs from Alphanumeric Data Storage Area 20666 b 4 (Paragraph [0415]) anddisplays the alphanumeric IDs on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). The user ofCommunication Device 200 selects one of the alphanumeric IDs byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system(S2). CPU 211 retrieves the corresponding alphanumeric data fromAlphanumeric Data Storage Area 20666 b 4 (Paragraph [0415]) and displaysthe data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S3). CPU 211 stores the alphanumeric dataretrieved in S3 in Work Area 20666 b 6 (Paragraph [0411]) for the emailaddress data identification explained in the next step (S4). CPU 211scans the alphanumeric data, i.e., applies the email address criteria(for example, ‘@’) to each alphanumeric data, and identifies the emailaddress data included therein (S5). CPU 211 emphasizes the identifiedemail address data by changing the font color (for example, green) anddrawing underlines to the identified email address data (S6). CPU 211displays the alphanumeric data with the identified email address dataemphasized on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) thereafter (S7).

Paragraph [0427]—This Paragraph [0427] illustrates Email Address DataCorrecting Software 20666 c 6 b (not shown) of Communication Device 200,which corrects the misidentified email address data by manuallyselecting the start point and the end point of the email address data.For example, if the email address data is misidentified as‘iwaofujisaki@yahoo’ and leaves out the remaining ‘com’, the user ofCommunication Device 200 may manually correct the email address data byselecting the start point and the end point of ‘iwaofujisaki@yahoo.com’.In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) displays the alphanumeric data withemail address data emphasized (S1). The user of Communication Device 200selects the start point of the email address data (S2) and the end pointof the email address data by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or viavoice recognition system (S3). CPU 211 then identifies the alphanumericdata located between the start point and the end point as email addressdata (S4), and emphasizes the email address data by changing the fontcolor (for example, green) and drawing underlines thereto (S5). Thealphanumeric data with the email address data emphasized are displayedon LCD 201 (FIG. 1) thereafter (S6).

Paragraph [0428]—This Paragraph [0428] illustrates Email Address DataStoring Software 20666 c 6 c (not shown) of Communication Device 200,which stores the email address data to Email Address Data Storage Area20666 b 2 (Paragraph [0413]). In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1)displays the alphanumeric data with the email address data emphasized(S1). The user of Communication Device 200 selects one of the emailaddress data, and CPU 211 emphasizes the data (for example, change tobold font) (S2). The user then inputs the email address ID (the title ofthe email address data) by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or viavoice recognition system (S3). CPU 211 stores the email address ID andthe email address data in Email Address Data Storage Area 20666 b 2(Paragraph [0413]) (S4).

Paragraph [0429]—This Paragraph [0429] illustrates Email EditingSoftware 20666 c 6 d (not shown) of Communication Device 200, whichopens an email editor (for example, the Outlook Express) wherein theemail address data is set as the receiver's address. In this embodiment,CPU 211 (FIG. 1) displays the alphanumeric data with the email addressdata emphasized (S1). The user of Communication Device 200 selects oneof the email address data (for example, click one of the email addressdata) by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognitionsystem (S2). CPU 211 then opens an email editor (for example, theOutlook Express) (S3), and sets the email address data selected in S2 asthe receiver's address (S4).

Paragraph [0430]—This Paragraph [0430] illustrates Phone DataIdentifying Software 20666 c 7 a (not shown) of Communication Device200, which identifies the phone data among the alphanumeric data. Inthis embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) retrieves the alphanumeric IDs fromAlphanumeric Data Storage Area 20666 b 4 (Paragraph [0415]) and displaysthe alphanumeric IDs on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). The user of CommunicationDevice 200 selects one of the alphanumeric IDs (S2). CPU 211 retrievesthe corresponding alphanumeric data from Alphanumeric Data Storage Area20666 b 4 (Paragraph [0415]) and displays the data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1)(S3). CPU 211 stores the alphanumeric data retrieved in S3 in Work Area20666 b 6 (Paragraph [0411]) for the phone data identification explainedin the next step (S4). CPU 211 scans the alphanumeric data, i.e.,applies the phone criteria (for example, numeric data with‘xxx-xxx-xxxx’ format) to each alphanumeric data, and identifies thephone data included therein (S5). CPU 211 emphasizes the identifiedphone data by changing the font color (for example, yellow) and drawingunderlines to the identified phone data (S6). CPU 211 displays thealphanumeric data with the identified phone data emphasized on LCD 201(FIG. 1) thereafter (S7).

Paragraph [0431]—This Paragraph [0431] illustrates Phone Data CorrectingSoftware 20666 c 7 b (not shown) of Communication Device 200, whichcorrects the misidentified phone data by manually selecting the startpoint and the end point of the phone data. For example, if the phonedata is misidentified as ‘916-455-’ and leaves out the remaining ‘1293’,the user of Communication Device 200 may manually correct the phone databy selecting the start point and the end point of ‘916-455-1293’. Inthis embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) displays the alphanumeric data withphone data emphasized (S1). The user of Communication Device 200 selectsthe start point of the phone data (S2) and the end point of the phonedata by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognitionsystem (S3). CPU 211 then identifies the alphanumeric data locatedbetween the start point and the end point as phone data (S4), andemphasizes the phone data by changing the font color (for example,yellow) and drawing underlines thereto (S5). The alphanumeric data withthe phone data emphasized are displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) thereafter(S6).

Paragraph [0432]—This Paragraph [0432] illustrates Phone Data StoringSoftware 20666 c 7 c (not shown) of Communication Device 200, whichstores the phone data to Phone Data Storage Area 20666 b 3 (Paragraph[0414]). In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) displays the alphanumericdata with the phone data emphasized (S1). The user of CommunicationDevice 200 selects one of the phone data, and CPU 211 emphasizes thedata (for example, change to bold font) (S2). The user then inputs thephone ID (the title of the phone data) (S3). CPU 211 stores the phone IDand the phone data in Phone Data Storage Area 20666 b 3 (Paragraph[0414]) (S4).

Paragraph [0433]—This Paragraph [0433] illustrates Dialing Software20666 c 7 d (not shown) of Communication Device 200, which opens a phonedialer and initiates a dialing process by utilizing the phone data. Inthis embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) displays the alphanumeric data withthe phone data emphasized (S1). The user of Communication Device 200selects one of the phone data by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) orvia voice recognition system (for example, click one of the phone data)(S2). CPU 211 then opens a phone dialer (S3), and inputs the phone dataselected in S2 (S4). A dialing process is initiated thereafter.

Paragraph [0434]—<<Multiple Mode Implementing Function>>

Paragraph [0435]—Paragraph [0436] through Paragraph [0440] illustratethe multiple mode implementing function of Communication Device 200which enables to activate and implement a plurality of modes, functions,and/or systems described in this specification simultaneously.

Paragraph [0436]—This Paragraph [0436] illustrates the software programsstored in RAM 206 (FIG. 1) to implement the multiple mode implementingfunction (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, RAM 206 includes Multiple ModeImplementer Storage Area 20690 a. Multiple Mode Implementer Storage Area20690 a stores Multiple Mode Implementer 20690 b, Mode List DisplayingSoftware 20690 c, Mode Selecting Software 20690 d, Mode ActivatingSoftware 20690 e, and Mode Implementation Repeater 20690 f, all of whichare software programs. Multiple Mode Implementer 20690 b administers theoverall implementation of the present function. One of the major tasksof Multiple Mode Implementer 20690 b is to administer and control thetiming and sequence of Mode List Displaying Software 20690 c, ModeSelecting Software 20690 d, Mode Activating Software 20690 e, and ModeImplementation Repeater 20690 f. For example, Multiple Mode Implementer20690 b executes them in the following order: Mode List DisplayingSoftware 20690 c, Mode Selecting Software 20690 d, Mode ActivatingSoftware 20690 e, and Mode Implementation Repeater 20690 f. Mode ListDisplaying Software 20690 c displays on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) a list of acertain amount or all modes, functions, and/or systems explained in thisspecification of which the sequence is explained in Paragraph [0438].Mode Selecting Software 20690 d selects a certain amount or all modes,functions, and/or systems explained in this specification of which thesequence is explained in Paragraph [0438]. Mode Activating Software20690 e activates a certain amount or all modes, functions, and/orsystems selected by the Mode Selecting Software 20690 d of which thesequence is explained in Paragraph [0439]. Mode Implementation Repeater20690 f executes Multiple Mode Implementer 20690 b which reactivatesMode List Displaying Software 20690 c, Mode Selecting Software 20690 d,Mode Activating Software 20690 e of which the sequence is explained inParagraph [0440].

Paragraph [0437]—This Paragraph [0437] illustrates the sequence of ModeList Displaying Software 20690 c (Paragraph [0436]). In this embodiment,CPU 211 (FIG. 1), under the command of Mode List Displaying Software20690 c, displays a list of a certain amount or all modes, functions,and/or systems described in this specification on LCD 201 (FIG. 1).

Paragraph [0438]—This Paragraph [0438] illustrates the sequence of ModeSelecting Software 20690 d (Paragraph [0436]). In this embodiment, theuser of Communication Device 200 inputs an input signal by utilizingInput Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system identifyingone of the modes, functions, and/or systems displayed on LCD 201(FIG. 1) (S1), and CPU 211 (FIG. 1), under the command of Mode SelectingSoftware 20690 d, interprets the input signal and selects thecorresponding mode, function, or system (S2).

Paragraph [0439]—This Paragraph [0439] illustrates the sequence of ModeActivating Software 20690 e (Paragraph [0436]). In this embodiment, CPU211 (FIG. 1), under the command of Mode Activating Software 20690 e,activates the mode, function, or, system selected in S2 of Paragraph[0438]. CPU 211 thereafter implements the activated mode, function, orsystem as described in the relevant paragraphs in this specification.

Paragraph [0440]—This Paragraph [0440] illustrates the sequence of ModeImplementation Repeater 20690 f (Paragraph [0436]). In this embodiment,the user of Communication Device 200 inputs an input signal by utilizingInput Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). Once theactivation of the selected mode, function, or system described inParagraph [0439] hereinbefore is completed, and if the input signalindicates to repeat the process to activate another mode, function, orsystem (S2), CPU 211 (FIG. 1), under the command of Mode ImplementationRepeater 20690 f, executes Multiple Mode Implementer 20690 b (Paragraph[0436]), which reactivates Mode List Displaying Software 20690 c(Paragraph [0436]), Mode Selecting Software 20690 d (Paragraph [0436]),and Mode Activating Software 20690 e (Paragraph [0436]) to activate thesecond mode, function, or system while the first mode, function, orsystem is implemented by utilizing the method of so-called ‘timesharing’ (S3). Mode List Displaying Software 20690 c, Mode SelectingSoftware 20690 d, and Mode Activating Software 20690 e can be repeatedlyexecuted until all modes, function, and systems displayed on LCD 201(FIG. 1) are selected and activated. The activation of modes, functions,and/or systems is not repeated if the input signal explained in S2 soindicates.

Paragraph [0441]—<<Incorporation By Reference>>

Paragraph [0442]—The following paragraphs and drawings described in U.S.Ser. No. 10/710,600, filed 2004 Jul. 23, are incorporated to thisapplication by reference: the preamble described in paragraph [1806] (nodrawings); Communication Device 200 (Voice Communication Mode) describedin paragraphs [1807] through [1812] (FIGS. 1 through 2 c); VoiceRecognition System described in paragraphs [1813] through [1845] (FIGS.3 through 19); Positioning System described in paragraphs [1846] through[1877] (FIGS. 20 a through 32 e); Auto Backup System described inparagraphs [1878] through [1887] (FIGS. 33 through 37); Signal Amplifierdescribed in paragraphs [1888] through [1893] (FIG. 38); Audio/VideoData Capturing System described in paragraphs [1894] through [1906](FIGS. 39 through 44 b); Digital Mirror Function (1) described inparagraphs [1907] through [1915] (FIGS. 44 c through 44 e); Caller IDSystem described in paragraphs [1916] through [1923] (FIGS. 45 through47); Stock Purchasing Function described in paragraphs [1924] through[1933] (FIGS. 48 through 52); Timer Email Function described inparagraphs [1934] through [1940] (FIGS. 53 a and 53 b); Call BlockingFunction described in paragraphs [1941] through [1954] (FIGS. 54 through59); Online Payment Function described in paragraphs [1955] through[1964] (FIGS. 60 through 64); Navigation System described in paragraphs[1965] through [1987] (FIGS. 65 through 74 a); Remote Controlling Systemdescribed in paragraphs [1988] through [2006] (FIGS. 75 through 85);Auto Emergency Calling System described in paragraphs [2007] through[2015] (FIGS. 86 and 87); Cellular TV Function described in paragraphs[2016] through [2100] (FIGS. 88 through 135); 3D Video Game Functiondescribed in paragraphs [2101] through [2113] (FIGS. 136 through 144);Digital Mirror Function (2) described in paragraphs [2114] through[2123] (FIGS. 145 through 155); Voice Recognition Sys—E-mail (2)described in paragraphs [2124] through [2132] (FIGS. 156 through 160);Positioning System—GPS Search Engine described in paragraphs [2133]through [2175] (FIGS. 161 through 182); Mobile Ignition Key Functiondescribed in paragraphs [2176] through [2198] (FIGS. 183 through 201);Voice Print Authentication System described in paragraphs [2199] through[2209] (FIGS. 202 through 211); Fingerprint Authentication Systemdescribed in paragraphs [2210] through [2222] (FIGS. 212 through 221);Auto Time Adjust Function described in paragraphs through [2227] (FIGS.222 through 224); Video/Photo Mode described in paragraphs [2228]through [2256] (FIGS. 225 through 242); Call Taxi Function described inparagraphs [2257] through [2297] (FIGS. 243 through 269); Shooting VideoGame Function described in paragraphs through [2314] (FIGS. 270 through283); Driving Video Game Function described in paragraphs [2315] through[2328] (FIGS. 284 through 294); Address Book Updating Function describedin paragraphs [2329] through [2349] (FIGS. 295 through 312); BatchAddress Book Updating Function—With Host described in paragraphs [2350]through [2371] (FIGS. 313 through 329); Batch Address Book UpdatingFunction—Peer-To-Peer Connection described in paragraphs through [2376](FIGS. 329 a through 329 c); Batch Scheduler Updating Function—With Hostdescribed in paragraphs [2377] through [2400] (FIGS. 330 through 350);Batch Scheduler Updating Function—Peer-To-Peer Connection described inparagraphs [2401] through [2405] (FIGS. 351 and 352); CalculatorFunction described in paragraphs [2406] through [2411] (FIGS. 353through 356); Spreadsheet Function described in paragraphs [2412]through [2419] (FIGS. 357 through 360); Word Processing Functiondescribed in paragraphs [2420] through [2435] (FIGS. 361 through 373);TV Remote Controller Function described in paragraphs [2436] through[2458] (FIGS. 374 through 394); CD/PC Inter-communicating Functiondescribed in paragraphs [2459] through [2483] (FIGS. 413 through 427);PDWR Sound Selecting Function described in paragraphs [2484] through[2520] (FIGS. 428 through 456); Start Up Software Function described inparagraphs [2521] through [2537] (FIGS. 457 through 466); AnotherEmbodiment Of Communication Device 200 described in paragraphs [2538]through [2542] (FIGS. 467 a through 467 d); Stereo Audio Data OutputFunction described in paragraphs [2543] through [2562] (FIGS. 468through 479); Stereo Visual Data Output Function described in paragraphs[2563] through (FIGS. 480 through 491); Multiple Signal ProcessingFunction described in paragraphs through [2655] (FIGS. 492 through 529);Positioning System—Pin-pointing Function described in paragraphs [2656]through [2689] (FIGS. 530 through 553); Artificial Satellite Hostdescribed in paragraphs [2690] through [2708] (FIGS. 554 through 567);CCD Bar Code Reader Function described in paragraphs [2709] through[2730] (FIGS. 568 through 579); Online Renting Function described inparagraphs [2731] through [2808] (FIGS. 580 through 633); SOS CallingFunction described in paragraphs [2809] through [2829] (FIGS. 634through 645); Input Device described in paragraphs [2830] through [2835](FIGS. 646 through 650); PC Remote Controlling Function described inparagraphs [2836] through [0105] (FIGS. 651 through 670); PC RemoteDownloading Function described in paragraphs [0106] through [2921](FIGS. 671 through 701); Audiovisual Playback Function described inparagraphs [2922] through [2947] (FIGS. 702 through 716); Audio PlaybackFunction described in paragraphs [2948] through [2972] (FIGS. 717through 731); Ticket Purchasing Function described in paragraphs [2973]through [3002] (FIGS. 732 through 753); Remote Data Erasing Functiondescribed in paragraphs [3003] through [3032] (FIGS. 754 through 774);Business Card Function described in paragraphs [3033] through [3049](FIGS. 775 through 783); Game Vibrating Function described in paragraphs[3050] through [3060] (FIGS. 784 through 786); Part-time Job FindingFunction described in paragraphs [3061] through [3081] (FIGS. 787through 801); Parking Lot Finding Function described in paragraphs[3082] through (FIGS. 802 through 832); Parts Upgradable CommunicationDevice described in paragraphs through [3147] (FIGS. 833 a through 833x); On Demand TV Function described in paragraphs [3148] through [3178](FIGS. 834 through 855); Inter-communicating TV Function described inparagraphs [3179] through [3213] (FIGS. 856 through 882); DisplayControlling Function described in paragraphs [3214] through [3231](FIGS. 883 through 894); Multiple Party Communicating Function describedin paragraphs [3232] through [3265] (FIGS. 894 a through 917); DisplayBrightness Controlling Function described in paragraphs [3266] through[3275] (FIGS. 918 through 923); Multiple Party Pin-pointing Functiondescribed in paragraphs [3276] through [3323] (FIGS. 924 through 950 f);Digital Camera Function described in paragraphs [3324] through [3351](FIGS. 951 through 968); Phone Number Linking Function described inparagraphs through [3375] (FIGS. 968 a through 983); Multiple WindowDisplaying Function described in paragraphs [3376] through [0159] (FIGS.984 through 995); Mouse Pointer Displaying Function described inparagraphs [0160] through [3432] (FIGS. 996 through 1021); House ItemPin-pointing Function described in paragraphs [3433] through [3592](FIGS. 1022 through 1152); Membership Administrating Function describedin paragraphs [3593] through [3635] (FIGS. 1153 through 1188); KeywordSearch Timer Recording Function described in paragraphs [3636] through[0193] (FIGS. 1189 through 1254); Weather Forecast Displaying Functiondescribed in paragraphs [0194] through [3769] (FIGS. 1255 through 1288);Multiple Language Displaying Function described in paragraphs [3770]through [3827] (FIGS. 1289 through 1331); Caller's InformationDisplaying Function described in paragraphs [3828] through [3880] (FIGS.1332 through 1375); Communication Device Remote Controlling Function (ByPhone) described in paragraphs [3881] through [3921] (FIGS. 1394 through1415); Communication Device Remote Controlling Function (By Web)described in paragraphs [3922] through [3962] (FIGS. 1416 through 1437);Shortcut Icon Displaying Function described in paragraphs [3963] through[3990] (FIGS. 1438 through 1455); Task Tray Icon Displaying Functiondescribed in paragraphs [3991] through [4013] (FIGS. 1456 through 1470);Multiple Channel Processing Function described in paragraphs [4014]through [4061] (FIGS. 1471 through 1498); Solar Battery ChargingFunction described in paragraphs [4062] through [4075] (FIGS. 1499through 1509); OS Updating Function described in paragraphs [4076]through [0262] (FIGS. 1510 through 1575); Device Managing Functiondescribed in paragraphs [0263] through [4161] (FIGS. 1576 through 1587);Automobile Controlling Function described in paragraphs [4162] through[0304] (FIGS. 1588 through 1627); OCR Function described in paragraphs[0305] through [4246] (FIGS. 1628 through 1652); Multiple ModeImplementing Function described in paragraphs [4248] through [4255](FIGS. 395 through 400); Multiple Software Download Function describedin paragraphs [4256] through (FIGS. 401 through 407); Selected SoftwareDistributing Function described in paragraphs through [4285] (FIGS. 1376through 1393 d); Multiple Software Download And Mode ImplementationFunction described in paragraphs [4286] through [4293] (FIGS. 408through 412); and the last sentence described in paragraph [4295] (nodrawings).

Paragraph [0443]—The paragraphs and drawings described in U.S. Ser. No.10/710,600 filed 2004-07-23 based on U.S. Pat. No. 8,090,402 and alsoincorporated to this application by reference are: the preamble (col 57line 64-col 58 line 15; no drawings); Communication Device 200 (VoiceCommunication Mode) (col 58 line 16-col 60 line 2; FIGS. 1 through 2 c);Voice Recognition System (col 60 line 3-col 65 line 3; FIGS. 3 through19); Positioning System (col 65 line 4-col 69 line 46; FIGS. 20 athrough 32 g); Auto Backup System (col 69 line 47-col 70 line 51; FIGS.33 through 37); Signal Amplifier (col 70 line 52-col 71 line 13; FIG.38); Audio/Video Data Capturing System (col 71 line 14-col 72 line 67;FIGS. 39 through 44 b); Digital Mirror Function (1) (col 73 line 1-col74 line 45; FIGS. 44 c through 44 e); Caller ID System (col 74 line46-col 75 line 18; FIGS. 45 through 47); Stock Purchasing Function (col75 line 19-col 76 line 23; FIGS. 48 through 52); Timer Email Function(col 76 line 24-col 76 line 67; FIGS. 53 a and 53 b); Call BlockingFunction (col 77 line 1-col 78 line 35; FIGS. 54 through 59); OnlinePayment Function (col 78 line 36-col 79 line 67; FIGS. 60 through 64);Navigation System (col 80 line 1-col 84 line 3; FIGS. 65 through 74 a);Remote Controlling System (col 84 line 4-col 87 line 10; FIGS. 75through 85); Auto Emergency Calling System (col 87 line 11-col 87 line62; FIGS. 86 and 87); Cellular TV Function (col 87 line 63-col 101 line54; FIGS. 88 through 135); 3D Video Game Function (col 101 line 55-col104 line 18; FIGS. 136 through 144); Digital Mirror Function (2) (col104 line 19-col 106 line 6; FIGS. 145 through 155); Voice RecognitionSys—E-mail (2) (col 106 line 7-col 107 line 38; FIGS. 156 through 160);Positioning System—GPS Search Engine (col 107 line 39-col 117 line 12;FIGS. 161 through 182); Mobile Ignition Key Function (col 117 line13-col 121 line 35; FIGS. 183 through 201); Voice Print AuthenticationSystem (col 121 line 36-col 123 line 44; FIGS. 202 through 211);Fingerprint Authentication System (col 123 line 45-col 126 line 7; FIGS.212 through 221); Auto Time Adjust Function (col 126 line 8-col 126 line48; FIGS. 222 through 224); Video/Photo Mode (col 126 line 49-col 131line 63; FIGS. 225 through 242); Call Taxi Function (col 131 line 64-col140 line 52; FIGS. 243 through 269); Shooting Video Game Function (col140 line 53-col 143 line 42; FIGS. 270 through 283); Driving Video GameFunction (col 143 line 43-col 146 line 7; FIGS. 284 through 294);Address Book Updating Function (col 146 line 8-col 149 line 13; FIGS.295 through 312); Batch Address Book Updating Function—With Host (col149 line 14-col 152 line 4; FIGS. 313 through 329); Batch Address BookUpdating Function—Peer-To-Peer Connection (col 152 line 5-col 152 line49; FIGS. 329 a through 329 c); Batch Scheduler Updating Function—WithHost (col 152 line 50-col 156 line 16; FIGS. 330 through 350); BatchScheduler Updating Function—Peer-To-Peer Connection (col 156 line 17-col156 line 67; FIGS. 351 and 352); Calculator Function (col 157 line 1-col157 line 59; FIGS. 353 through 356); Spreadsheet Function (col 157 line60-col 159 line 9; FIGS. 357 through 360); Word Processing Function (col159 line 10-col 162 line 61; FIGS. 361 through 373); TV RemoteController Function (col 162 line 62-col 167 line 19; FIGS. 374 through394); CD/PC Inter-communicating Function (col 167 line 20-col 171 line49; FIGS. 413 through 427); PDWR Sound Selecting Function (col 171 line50-col 179 line 3; FIGS. 428 through 456); Start Up Software Function(col 179 line 4-col 180 line 67; FIGS. 457 through 466); AnotherEmbodiment Of Communication Device 200 (col 181 line 1-col 183 line 13;FIGS. 467 a through 467 d); Stereo Audio Data Output Function (col 183line 14-col 185 line 67; FIGS. 468 through 479); Stereo Visual DataOutput Function (col 186 line 1-col 188 line 51; FIGS. 480 through 491);Multiple Signal Processing Function (col 188 line 52-col 199 line 13;FIGS. 492 through 529); Positioning System—Pin-pointing Function (col199 line 14-col 204 line 67; FIGS. 530 through 553); ArtificialSatellite Host (col 205 line 1-col 208 line 22; FIGS. 554 through 567);CCD Bar Code Reader Function (col 208 line 23-col 211 line 27; FIGS. 568through 579); Online Renting Function (col 211 line 28-col 225 line 57;FIGS. 580 through 633); SOS Calling Function (col 225 line 58-col 228line 31; FIGS. 634 through 645); Input Device (col 228 line 32-col 229line 50; FIGS. 646 through 650); PC Remote Controlling Function (col 229line 51-col 235 line 27; FIGS. 651 through 670); PC Remote DownloadingFunction (col 235 line 28-col 244 line 15; FIGS. 671 through 701);Audiovisual Playback Function (col 244 line 16-col 249 line 15; FIGS.702 through 716); Audio Playback Function (col 249 line 16-col 253 line58; FIGS. 717 through 731); Ticket Purchasing Function (col 253 line59-col 259 line 5; FIGS. 732 through 753); Remote Data Erasing Function(col 259 line 6-col 263 line 43; FIGS. 754 through 774); Business CardFunction (col 263 line 44-col 266 line 6; FIGS. 775 through 783); GameVibrating Function (col 266 line 7-col 267 line 17; FIGS. 784 through786); Part-time Job Finding Function (col 267 line 18-col 270 line 57;FIGS. 787 through 801); Parking Lot Finding Function (col 270 line58-col 277 line 47; FIGS. 802 through 832); Parts UpgradableCommunication Device (col 277 line 48-col 280 line 67; FIGS. 833 athrough 833 x); On Demand TV Function (col 281 line 1-col 287 line 3;FIGS. 834 through 855); Inter-communicating TV Function (col 287 line4-col 292 line 6; FIGS. 856 through 882); Display Controlling Function(col 292 line 7-col 295 line 4; FIGS. 883 through 894); Multiple PartyCommunicating Function (col 295 line 5-col 301 line 34; FIGS. 894 athrough 917); Display Brightness Controlling Function (col 301 line35-col 302 line 50; FIGS. 918 through 923); Multiple Party Pin-pointingFunction (col 302 line 51-col 311 line 12; FIGS. 924 through 9500;Digital Camera Function (col 311 line 13-col 316 line 15; FIGS. 951through 968); Phone Number Linking Function (col 316 line 16-col 320line 5; FIGS. 968 a through 983); Multiple Window Displaying Function(col 320 line 6-col 323 line 32; FIGS. 984 through 995); Mouse PointerDisplaying Function (col 323 line 33-col 328 line 64; FIGS. 996 through1021); House Item Pin-pointing Function (col 328 line 65-col 356 line64; FIGS. 1022 through 1152); Membership Administrating Function (col356 line 65-col 363 line 67; FIGS. 1153 through 1188); Keyword SearchTimer Recording Function (col 364 line 1-col 385 line 55; FIGS. 1189through 1254); Weather Forecast Displaying Function (col 385 line 56-col394 line 56; FIGS. 1255 through 1288); Multiple Language DisplayingFunction (col 394 line 57-col 411 line 63; FIGS. 1289 through 1331);Caller's Information Displaying Function (col 411 line 64-col 423 line52; FIGS. 1332 through 1375); Communication Device Remote ControllingFunction (By Phone) (col 423 line 53-col 430 line 46; FIGS. 1394 through1415); Communication Device Remote Controlling Function (By Web) (col430 line 47-col 437 line 61; FIGS. 1416 through 1437); Shortcut IconDisplaying Function (col 437 line 62-col 442 line 29; FIGS. 1438 through1455); Task Tray Icon Displaying Function (col 442 line 30-col 445 line62; FIGS. 1456 through 1470); Multiple Channel Processing Function (col445 line 63-col 455 line 27; FIGS. 1471 through 1498); Solar BatteryCharging Function (col 455 line 28-col 458 line 26; FIGS. 1499 through1509); OS Updating Function (col 458 line 27-col 489 line 3; FIGS. 1510through 1575); Device Managing Function (col 489 line 4-col 492 line 59;FIGS. 1576 through 1587); Automobile Controlling Function (col 492 line60-col 505 line 55; FIGS. 1588 through 1627); OCR Function (col 505 line56-col 512 line 51; FIGS. 1628 through 1652); Multiple Mode ImplementingFunction (col 512 line 52-col 515 line 56; FIGS. 395 through 400);Multiple Software Download Function (col 515 line 57-col 518 line 3;FIGS. 401 through 407); Selected Software Distributing Function (col 518line 4-col 523 line 54; FIGS. 1376 through 1393 d); Multiple SoftwareDownload And Mode Implementation Function (col 523 line 55-col 525 line33; FIGS. 408 through 412); and the last sentence (col 525 line 34-col525 line 51; no drawings). If there is ever discrepancy between thedisclosures of this application and U.S. Pat. No. 8,090,402, the latterprevails.

1. A communication device, which is a handheld device, comprising: amicrophone; a speaker; an input device; a display; an antenna; a voicecommunicating implementer, wherein voice communication is implemented bysending and receiving audio data via said antenna; a downloaded videogame implementer, wherein a video game software which is downloaded froma host computer is executed; an auto time adjusting implementer, whereinthe clock of said communication device is automatically adjusted byreferring to a certain data received via said antenna; a moving picturereplaying implementer, wherein a moving picture stored in saidcommunication device is replayed; a calculating implementer, wherein amathematical calculation is implemented by utilizing numeric data inputvia said input device; a bold font displaying implementer, wherein acertain portion of alphanumeric data is displayed with bold font; astereo audio data output implementer, wherein stereo audio data storedin said communication device is processed to be output in a stereofashion; a photo quality setting implementer, wherein a photo is storedin said communication device with the user identified quality; amultiple language implementer, wherein a list of multiple languages isdisplayed from which the user is operable to select a certain language,and the user interface of said communication device is displayed withthe selected certain language; and a caller's information displayingimplementer, wherein upon receiving a phone call, a caller's informationwhich indicates the phone number and/or name of the caller is displayed.2. The communication device of claim 1, wherein said input device usedfor initiating voice communication is configured to be the device tomanually control a video game object while said video game software isexecuted.
 3. The communication device of claim 1, wherein said speakerincludes a first speaker and a second speaker, and said stereo audiodata is output from said first and second speakers.
 4. The communicationdevice of claim 1, wherein the quality with which said photo is storedin said communication device is identified by a selection made frommultiple quality candidates.
 5. The communication device of claim 1,wherein said list of multiple languages includes English.
 6. Thecommunication device of claim 1, wherein said caller's informationfurther indicates the caller's title at work and/or address.
 7. A systemcomprising: a communication device, which is a handheld device,comprising a microphone, a speaker, an input device, a display, and anantenna; a voice communicating implementer, wherein voice communicationis implemented by sending and receiving audio data via said antenna; adownloaded video game implementer, wherein a video game software whichis downloaded from a host computer is executed; an auto time adjustingimplementer, wherein the clock of said communication device isautomatically adjusted by referring to a certain data received via saidantenna; a moving picture replaying implementer, wherein a movingpicture stored in said communication device is replayed; a calculatingimplementer, wherein a mathematical calculation is implemented byutilizing numeric data input via said input device; a bold fontdisplaying implementer, wherein a certain portion of alphanumeric datais displayed with bold font; a stereo audio data output implementer,wherein stereo audio data stored in said communication device isprocessed to be output in a stereo fashion; a photo quality settingimplementer, wherein a photo is stored in said communication device withthe user identified quality; a multiple language implementer, wherein alist of multiple languages is displayed from which the user is operableto select a certain language, and the user interface of saidcommunication device is displayed with the selected certain language;and a caller's information displaying implementer, wherein uponreceiving a phone call, a caller's information which indicates the phonenumber and/or name of the caller is displayed.
 8. The system of claim 7,wherein said input device used for initiating voice communication isconfigured to be the device to manually control a video game objectwhile said video game software is executed.
 9. The system of claim 7,wherein said speaker includes a first speaker and a second speaker, andsaid stereo audio data is output from said first and second speakers.10. The system of claim 7, wherein the quality with which said photo isstored in said communication device is identified by a selection madefrom multiple quality candidates.
 11. The system of claim 7, whereinsaid list of multiple languages includes English.
 12. The system ofclaim 7, wherein said caller's information further indicates thecaller's title at work and/or address.
 13. A method for a communicationdevice, which is a handheld device, comprising a microphone, a speaker,an input device, a display, and an antenna, said method comprising: avoice communicating implementing step, wherein voice communication isimplemented by sending and receiving audio data via said antenna; adownloaded video game implementing step, wherein a video game softwarewhich is downloaded from a host computer is executed; an auto timeadjusting implementing step, wherein the clock of said communicationdevice is automatically adjusted by referring to a certain data receivedvia said antenna; a moving picture replaying implementing step, whereina moving picture stored in said communication device is replayed; acalculating implementing step, wherein a mathematical calculation isimplemented by utilizing numeric data input via said input device; abold font displaying implementing step, wherein a certain portion ofalphanumeric data is displayed with bold font; a stereo audio dataoutput implementing step, wherein stereo audio data stored in saidcommunication device is processed to be output in a stereo fashion; aphoto quality setting implementing step, wherein a photo is stored insaid communication device with the user identified quality; a multiplelanguage implementing step, wherein a list of multiple languages isdisplayed from which the user is operable to select a certain language,and the user interface of said communication device is displayed withthe selected certain language; and a caller's information displayingimplementing step, wherein upon receiving a phone call, a caller'sinformation which indicates the phone number and/or name of the calleris displayed.
 14. The method of claim 13, wherein said input device usedfor initiating voice communication is configured to be the device tomanually control a video game object while said video game software isexecuted.
 15. The method of claim 13, wherein said speaker includes afirst speaker and a second speaker, and said stereo audio data is outputfrom said first and second speakers.
 16. The method of claim 13, whereinthe quality with which said photo is stored in said communication deviceis identified by a selection made from multiple quality candidates. 17.The method of claim 13, wherein said list of multiple languages includesEnglish.
 18. The method of claim 13, wherein said caller's informationfurther indicates the caller's title at work and/or address.